Sie S626 7.5B

VECTOR-CONTROLLED INVERTER DRIVES WITH
POWER REGENERATIVE FUNCTION FOR MACHINE TOOLS

VARISPEED-626M5/656MR5
USER'S MANUAL
INVERTER (VS-626M5) MODEL : CIMR-M5
200V CLASS 3.7/2.2 TO 37/30kW(5/3 TO 50/40HP) 400V CLASS 5.5/3.7 TO 45/37kW(7.5/5 TO 60/50HP)
CONVERTER (VS-656MR5) MODEL : CIMR-MR5
200V CLASS 3.7/2.2 TO 37/30kW (5/3 TO 50/40HP, 7 TO 30kVA) 400V CLASS 5.5/3.7 TO 45/37kW (7.5/5 TO 60/50HP, 9 TO 70kVA)
MANUAL NO. SIE-S626-7.5B

PREFACE
This instruction manual describes installation, maintenance and inspection,

troubleshooting, and specifications of the VS-626M5 and the VS-656MR5. Read this
instruction manual thoroughly before operation.
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
General Precautions
D The diagrams in this manual may be indicated without covers or safety shields to show
details.
Be sure to restore covers or shields before operating the Units and run the Units according
to the instructions described in this manual.
D Any illustrations, photographs, or examples used in this manual are provided as examples
only and may not apply to all products to which this manual is applicable.
D The products and specifications described in this manual or the content and presentation
of the manual may be changed without notice to improve the product and/or the manual.
D When ordering a new copy of the manual due to damage or loss, contact your Yaskawa
representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office and provide the manual number
shown on the front cover.
D If nameplates become warn or damaged, order new ones from your Yaskawa representa-
tives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office.
i
Notes for Safe Operation
Read this instruction manual thoroughly before installation, operation, maintenance or inspection of the
VS-626M5. In this manual, Notes for Safe Operation are classified as “WARNING” or “CAUTION.”
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury to personnel.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury to person-
nel and damage to equipment.
It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
Even items described in CAUTION may result in a vital accident in some situations. In either case, follow
these important notes.
The warning symbols for ISO and JIS standards are different, as shown below.
ISO JIS
The ISO symbol is used in this manual.

Both of these symbols appear on warning labels on Yaskawa products. Please abide by these warning labels regard-
less of which symbol is used.
The following shows the symbols of prohibition and mandatory action.
PROHIBITED
Specifies prohibited handling.
MANDATORY
Specifies actions that must be taken.
ii
Notes for Inverter and Converter
J Confirmation upon Delivery
CAUTION
Page
D Do not install any Inverter or Converter that is damaged or has missing parts. 2 -2
Failure to observe this caution may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
J Installation
CAUTION
Page
D Always hold the case when carrying the Inverter. 2 -5
If the Inverter is held by the front cover, the main body of the Inverter may fall, possibly result-
ing in injury.
D Mount the Inverter and the Converter on nonflammable material (i.e. metal). 2 -5
Failure to observe this caution may result in a fire.
D Install a fan or other cooling device to keep the ambient temperature of Inverter and 2 -5
Converter below 55_C (131_F) and the intake air temperature to heatsink below
45_C (113_F).
Overheating may cause a fire or damage to the unit.
J Disconnecting the Digital Operator
WARNING
Page
D Disconnect all power before removing Digital Operator (JVOP-132). Then wait for the 2 -9
time described on warning labels after the main circuit power supply and control pow-
er supply are disconnected and all indicators on the Inverter and the Converter have
gone out.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock.
CAUTION
Page
D Use only the screws provided with the cable bracket when installing the cable. 2 -9
Improper installation may result.
iii
J Wiring
WARNING
Page
D Always turn OFF the input power supply before wiring terminals. 3 -2
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire may occur.
D Wiring should be performed only by qualified personnel. 3 -2
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock or a fire.
D Make sure to ground the ground terminal . 3 -2
(200V class: Ground to 100Ω or less, 400V class: Ground to 10Ω or less)
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock or a fire.
D Always check the operation of any emergency stop circuits after they are wired. 3 -2
Otherwise, there is the possibility of injury. (Wiring is the responsibility of the user.)
D Never touch the output terminals directly with your hands or allow the output lines to 3 -2
come into contact with the Inverter case. Never short the output circuits.
Otherwise, electrical shock or grounding may occur.
CAUTION
Page
D Verify that the rated voltage of the Converter coincides with the AC power supply volt- 3 -2
age.
Failure to observe this caution may result in personal injury or a fire.
D Do not perform a withstand voltage test of the Inverter and the Converter. 3 -2
It may cause semi-conductor elements to be damaged.
D Make sure to connect the Inverter and the Converter as shown in the connection dia- 3 -2
grams.
The Inverter or Converter may be damaged.
D Tighten terminal screws to the specified tightening torque. 3 -2
Failure to observe this caution may result in a fire.
D Never connect the power supply to output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. 3 -2
The Inverter may be damaged.
D Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output cir- 3 -2
cuits.
The Inverter may be damaged or internal parts burnt if these devices are connected.
D Do not connect electromagnetic switches or contactors to the output circuits. 3 -2
If a load is connected while the Inverter is operating, surge current will cause the overcurrent
protection circuit inside the Inverter to operate.
J Trial Operation
WARNING
Page
D Only turn ON the input power supply after closing the upper and lower cover. Do not 6 -3
open the covers while current is flowing.
D Since the stop button can be disabled by a function setting, install a separate emer- 6 -3
gency stop switch.
Failure to observe this warning may result in personal injury.
iv
CAUTION
Page
D Never touch the heatsink since the temperature is very high. 6 -3
Failure to observe this caution may result in harmful burns to the body.
D Since it is easy to change operation speed from low to high speed, verify the safe 6 -3
working range of the Motor and machine before operation.
Failure to observe this caution may result in personal injury.
D Do not check signals during operation. 6 -3
The machine or the unit may be damaged.
D Do not change the settings of the Inverter unnecessarily. All the constants of the In- 6 -3
verter have been preset at the factory.
The machine or the unit may be damaged.
J Maintenance and Inspection
WARNING
Page
D Never touch high-voltage terminals in the Inverter and the Converter. 13 -2
D Close upper and lower covers before powering up the Inverter or the Converter. To 13 -2
open the covers, make sure to shut OFF the molded-case circuit breaker.
D Perform maintenance or inspection only after verifying that the CHARGE LED indica- 13 -2
tor and 7-segment display go OFF, after the main circuit power supply and control
power supply are turned OFF.
The capacitors are still charged and may be dangerous.
D Only authorized personnel should be permitted to perform maintenance, inspections 13 -2
or parts replacement.
Remove all metal objects, such as watches and rings, before starting work. Always
use grounded tools.
CAUTION
Page
D The control PC board employs CMOS ICs. Do not touch the CMOS elements. 13 -2
They are easily damaged by static electricity.
D Do not connect or disconnect wires or connectors while power is applied to the cir- 13 -2
cuit.
v
J Others
WARNING
D Never modify the product.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock or personal injury and will invalidate the war-
ranty.
CAUTION
D Do not store or transport the equipment in locations where halogen, fluorine, chlorine, bromine,
or iodine is present.
Failure to observe this caution may result in damage to the machine or burnout of the parts.
vi
Notes for Motor
Notes for Motor
J Notes on Use
WARNING
Observe the following precautions to avoid electrical shock or injury.
D Ground the ground terminals of the Inverter and the Motor (or ground a metallic part, such as the
frame, if there is no ground terminal, according to local and/or national electrical codes.
Failure to observe this warning may result in electrical shock.
D Use grounding wires of a size complying with relevant international or local standards.
D Make wiring lengths as short as possible. Separate power cables from signal lines.
Noise on signal lines may cause vibration or malfunctions.
D Perform wiring or inspection only after verifying that the CHARGE indicator and the 7-segment
display of the Inverter go OFF after the power supply is turned OFF.
D Do not damage the cables or apply excess stress to them; do not place heavy objects on the
cables or clamp the cables.
CAUTION
D Use only a specified combination of Inverter and Motor.
Failure to observe this caution may result in fire or malfunctions.
D Never use at locations exposed to water splashes, corrosive, or inflammable gases, or near
combustible substances.
Failure to observe this caution may result in fire or malfunctions.
D Use under the following environmental conditions.
(1) Indoors where no corrosive or explosive gas exists
(2) Well-ventilated without dust or metallic particles
(3) Easy to check, clean, and maintain
For use at locations where excessive water or oil splashes exist, use a cover or other protection.
It is recommended to place the terminal box upward.
D Do not touch the Motor while the power is ON or immediately after turning the power OFF.
Failure to observe this caution may cause harmful burn.
J Storage
PROHIBITED
D Do not store the equipment in locations where water splashes are present or where there are
corrosive gases or liquids.
MANDATORY
D Store the equipment protected from direct sunlight in the specified ranges of temperature and
humidity. (0°C to 60°C (32°F to 140°F), 5% to 95%)
D After long-term storage, contact your YASKAWA representative before using the Motor.
vii
J Transportation
CAUTION
D Do not lift the Motor by the cables or the motor shaft when carrying the Motor.
Failure to observe this caution may result in product malfunctions or personal injury.
D Do not overload the products.
Failure to observe this caution may result in collapse of cargo and personal injury.
MANDATORY
D Use the motor eyebolts when lifting and transporting the Motor.
Do not attempt to move a Motor when other equipment is attached to it.
J Installation
CAUTION
D Do not climb on the Motor or place heavy objects on it.
D Do not block the air inlet and outlet, and do not let foreign materials enter.
Failure to observe this caution may result in fire.
D Do not apply heavy shock.
Failure to observe this caution may result in a malfunction.
D When unpacking, be careful of the nails in the wood frame.
D Cover the rotary parts to prevent them from being touched.
Failure to observe this warning may result in personal injury.
D The motor shaft extension is coated with anticorrosive paint. Before installation, wipe off the paint
with a cloth soaked in detergent liquid.
D When connecting the Motor to a load machine, be careful of centering, belt tension, and pulley
parallelism.
D Use a flexible coupling for coupling with the load machine.
D The motor system is a high-precision device. Do not apply shock to the Motor or the motor output
shaft. Design machines so that the thrust load and radial load applied to the motor shaft exten-
sion during operation are within the allowable ranges specified in the manual for each model.
With a thrust load, the allowable load is 0 N in the direction where the output shaft is pressed into
the motor.
D Never perform any additional machining on the Motor.
D Flange-mounted types must be installed with the load motor output shaft either horizontally, or
vertically with the shaft down. If the output shaft is to be placed horizontally, place the terminal box
upward. Foot-mounted Motors must be installed on the floor with the feet down. For details, refer
to the manual for each model.
viii
Notes for Motor
J Wiring
CAUTION
D Perform wiring securely according to the connection diagrams.
Failure to observe this caution may cause Motor overrun and personal injury.
D Verify that the input power is OFF before wiring.
D Perform proper grounding and noise control.
D Make wiring length as short as possible. Separate the power cables from the signal lines. Do not
run power cables and signal lines in the same duct or bundle. Noise on signal lines may cause
vibration or malfunctions.
D Never connect a commercial power supply directly to the Motor.
D Use Yaskawa-specified cables. To use other cables, check the rated current of your equipment,
and consider the operating environment to select correct cables. If a cable not specified by Yas-
kawa is to be used for the Encoder, select a twisted-pair shielded cable.
D The terminal block, connectors, or connector pin layout differ according to the model. Refer to the
manuals for your model before wiring.
D If no terminal block is used, protect lead joints with insulating tubes or tapes.
Failure to observe this caution may result in electrical shock or fire.
J Operation
WARNING
D Do not operate the equipment with the terminal box cover removed. After wiring, replace the ter-
minal box cover.
CAUTION
D Perform trial operation as follows: Secure the Motor and disconnect it from load machine system,
check operations, then reconnect the Motor to the load machine.
D If an alarm is issued, correct the cause, verify safety, then reset the alarm and resume operation.
D If momentary power loss occurs, turn OFF the power supply.
The machine may resume operation suddenly and may result in personal injury.
D Before starting a liquid-cooled Motor, verify that cooling oil is properly supplied to the Motor.
D For oil mist lubrication Motors, verify that the lubrication is properly performed before starting op-
eration.
D Build an emergency stop circuit or a device that protects the Motor by immediately stopping op-
eration in case of malfunctions of cooling oil supply or oil mist lubrication.
After emergency stop, restart operation using the following procedure.
(1) Recover cooling oil supply or oil mist lubrication.
(2) Cool the Motor sufficiently (for one hour or longer), then restart operation from low speed.
(3) Gradually increase rotation speed while verifying that there is no abnormal noise, increase
of vibration or rise in temperatures.
PROHIBITED
D Do not operate liquid-cooled Motors without supplying cooling oil.
D Do not operate oil mist lubrication Motors without supplying proper lubricant.
ix
MANDATORY
D Build an external emergency stop circuit that immediately stops operation and shuts OFF power
in an emergency.
J Maintenance and Inspection
PROHIBITED
D Only authorized personnel should be permitted to disassemble or repair the equipment.
D If it becomes necessary to disassemble the Motor, contact your YASKAWA representative.
J Warning Label
Warning labels are displayed on the upper cover and the front cover of the Inverter and the Converter, as shown
below. Follow these instructions when handling the Inverter and the Converter.
Converter Inverter
Warning Warning
Label 1 Label 1
Warning Warning
Label 2 Label 3
Model CIMR-MR5A27P5 [200V 10HP (7.5KW)] Model CIMR-M5A27P5 [200V 10HP (7.5KW)]
x
Notes for Motor
xi
Warranty Information
J Free Warranty Period and Scope

Warranty Period
This product is warranted for twelve months after being delivered to Yaskawa’s customer or if appli-
cable eighteen months from the date of shipment from Yaskawa’s factory whichever comes first.
Scope of Warranty
Inspections
Periodic inspections must be conducted by the customer. However, upon request, Yaskawa or one
of Yaskawa’s Service Centers can inspect the product for a fee. In this case, if after conferring with
the customer, a Yaskawa product is found to be defective due to Yaskawa workmanship or materials
and the defect occurs during the warranty period, then this fee will be waived and the problem reme-
died free of charge.
Repairs
If a Yaskawa product is found to be defective due to Yaskawa workmanship or materials and the de-
fect occurs during the warranty period, Yaskawa will provide a replacement, repair the defective
product, and provide shipping to and from the site free of charge.
However, if the Yaskawa Authorized Service Center determines that the problem with a Yaskawa
product is not due to defects in Yaskawa’s workmanship or materials, then the customer will be re-
sponsible for the cost of any necessary repairs. Some problems that are outside the scope of this war-
ranty are:
D Problems due to improper maintenance or handling, carelessness, or other reasons where

the customer is determined to be responsible.
D Problems due to additions or modifications made to a Yaskawa product without Yaskawa’s
understanding.
D Problems due to the use of a Yaskawa product under conditions that do not meet the recom-
mended specifications.
D Problems caused by natural disaster or fire.
D Or other problems not due to defects in Yaskawa workmanship or materials.
Warranty service is only applicable within Japan.
However, after-sales service is available for customers outside of Japan for a reasonable fee.
Contact your local Yaskawa representative for more information.
J Exceptions
Any inconvenience to the customer or damage to non-Yaskawa products due to Yaskawa’s defective
products whether within or outside the warranty period are NOT covered by this warranty.
xii
Warranty Information
J Restrictions
D The Varispeed 626M5/656MR5 was not designed or manufactured for use in devices or sys-
tems that may directly affect or threaten human lives or health.
D Customers who intend to use the product described in this manual for devices or systems
relating to transportation, health care, space aviation, atomic or electric power, or underwa-
ter use must contact their Yaskawa representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office be-
forehand.
D This product has been manufactured under strict quality-control guidelines. However, if
this product is to be installed in any location where failure of this product could involve
or result in a life-and-death situation or loss of human life or in a facility where failure may
cause a serious accident or physical injury, safety devices must be installed to minimize
the likelihood of any accident.
xiii
Visual Aids
The following aids are used to indicate certain types of information for easier reference.
AEXAMPLE" Indicates application examples.
INFO Indicates supplemental information.
IMPORTANT Indicates important information that should be memorized.
xiv
CONTENTS
1 Introduction 1
2 Handling 2
3 Wiring 3
4 Control Signals 4
5 Operating the Digital Operator 5
6 Trial Operation 6
7 Wide Fixed-output Control 7

Using Coil Switching
8 Orientation Control Using an

Encoder
8
9 Magnetic Sensor Orientation 9

Control
10 Control Constants 10
11 Operating Status Displays 11
xv
CONTENTS
12 12 Troubleshooting
13 13 Maintenance and Inspection
14 14 Specifications
15 15 Appendix
xvi
Table of Contents
Notes for Safe Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii

Notes for Inverter and Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Notes for Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Visual Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -1
1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -2
1.1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -2
1.1.2 Inverter Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -3
1.1.3 Converter Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -4
1.2 Identifying Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -5

1.2.1 Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -5
1.2.2 Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -6
2 Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -1
2.1 Confirmation upon Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -2
2.1.1 Inverter Nameplate Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -2
2.1.2 Converter Nameplate Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -3
2.1.3 Motor Nameplate Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -4
2.2 Checking and Controlling the Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -5

2.2.1 Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -5
2.2.2 Operating Ambient Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -6
2.2.3 Protecting the Inverter and Converter from Foreign Matter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -6
2.2.4 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -6
2.3 CLEARANCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -7
2.3.1 External Heatsink Cooling Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -7
2.3.2 Open Chassis Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -8
2.4 Attaching the Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -9

2.5 Motor Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -10
2.5.1 Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -10
2.5.2 Installation Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -10
2.5.3 Coupling Motor and Machinery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -11
3 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -1
3.1 Connection with Peripheral Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -2
3.2 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -5
3.3 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -7
3.3.1 Wires and Suitable Crimp Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -7
3.3.2 Functions of Main Circuit Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -13
3.3.3 Main Circuit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -15
3.3.4 Main Circuit Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -19
3.3.5 Wiring the Main Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -21
xvii
3.4 Wiring Control Circuit Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -24
3.4.1 Control Signal Connectors and Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -24
3.4.2 Terminal Arrangement of Control Signal Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -26
3.4.3 Control Signal Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -28
3.4.4 Sequence Input Signal Circuit (for Stand-alone Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -32
3.4.5 Sequence Output Signal Circuit (for Stand-alone Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -33
3.4.6 Precautions for Control Signal Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -33
3.5 Wiring Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -35
4 Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -1
4.1 Sequence Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -2
4.1.1 Connecting Sequence Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -2
4.1.2 Selecting Sequence Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -2
4.1.3 Status Display of Sequence Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -3
4.1.4 Details on Sequence Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -3
4.2 Analog Speed Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -9
4.3 Using a 12-bit Digital Speed Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -10
4.4 Sequence Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -12
4.4.1 Connecting Sequence Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -12
4.4.2 Setting Sequence Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -12
4.4.3 Status Display of Sequence Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -12
4.4.4 Details on Sequence Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -13
4.5 Analog Monitor Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -18
4.6 Encoder Pulse Input Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -19
4.7 Encoder Pulse Output Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -20
5 Operating the Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -1

5.1 Function of the Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -2
5.2 Display Mode Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5
5.3 Key Operations and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -6
5.3.1 Indication at Power-ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -6
5.3.2 Switching Display Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -6
5.3.3 Operation Status Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -7
5.3.4 Control Constant Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -7
5.3.5 Digital Operator Operation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -8
5.3.6 Fault Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -10
5.3.7 Fault Record Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -11
6 Trial Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -1
6.1 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -4
6.2 Trial Operation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -5
6.2.1 Checking the Power Supply Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -5
6.2.2 Setting the YENET1200 Node Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -5
6.2.3 Turning ON the Control Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -5
6.2.4 Turning ON the Main Circuit Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -5
6.2.5 Checking the Motor Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6
6.2.6 Starting Trial Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6
xviii
6.3 Converter and Inverter LED Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -7
6.3.1 Display Details Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -7
6.3.2 Display when the Converter Control Power Supply Is Turned ON . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -7
6.3.3 Display when an Error Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -8
6.4 Constant Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -9
6.4.1 User Constant Functions Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -9
6.4.2 Soft Start Time Setting (TSFS: C1-10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -10
6.4.3 Load Factor Meter Full Scale (LMFS: C1-18) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -10
6.4.4 Zero Speed Detection Level (ZSLVL: C1-19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -10
6.4.5 Speed Agree Width (AGRBD: C1-20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -10
6.4.6 Speed Detection Level and Detection Width (SDLVL: C1-21, SDHYS: C1-22) 6 -11
6.4.7 Torque Detection Signal Operation Level (TDLVL: C1-23) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -11
6.4.8 External Control Torque Limit Level (TLEXT: C1-24) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -11
6.4.9 Motor Code Selection (MTR: C1-25) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -11
6.4.10 Rated Speed (S100: C1-26) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -13
6.4.11 Gear Ratios (RHGR: C1-27, RMGR: C1-28, RLGR: C1-29) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -13
6.4.12 Servo Mode Flux and Base Speed Ratio
(ΦSVH: C1-31, RBSH: C1-32, ΦSVL: C1-33, RSBL: C1-34) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -13
6.4.13 Positioning Completion Detection Width (ZFIN: C2-09 and C3-09) and
Positioning Completion Cancel Width (ZCAN: C2-10 and C3-10) . . . . . . . . . . 6 -13
6.4.14 Orientation Speed (SORT : C2-11 and C3-11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -14
6.4.15 BCD Stop Position Reference Resolution (PBCD: C2-12 and C3-12) . . . . . . . 6 -15
6.5 Speed Control Mode Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -16
7 Wide Constant Power Control Using Winding Selection 7 -1

7.1 Features of the Winding Selection Wide Constant Power Drive . . . . 7 -2
7.2 Winding Selection Motor Standard Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -3
7.3 Motor Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -4
7.4 Winding Selection Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -5
7.5 Winding Selection Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -6
7.5.1 M Code Winding Selection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -6
7.5.2 Automatic Winding Selection methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -8
7.6 Winding Selection Control Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -11
8 Orientation Control Using an Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -1

8.1 Device Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -2
8.2 Standard Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -3
8.3 Orientation Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -5
8.3.1 Standard Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -5
8.3.2 Load Shaft Encoder Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -5
8.4 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -6
8.4.1 Encoder Orientation Card (ETC62613X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -6
8.4.2 Load Shaft Mounted Encoder (NE-1024-2MDF-068) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -6
8.5 Load Shaft Encoder Connector Terminal Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -7
8.6 Important Points for Encoder Mounting and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8
xix
8.7 Stop Position Reference Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -9
8.7.1 Stop Position Reference Signal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -9
8.7.2 Stop Position Reference Signal Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -9
8.7.3 Details of the Stop Position Reference Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -9
8.8 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -11
8.8.1 Absolute Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -11
8.8.2 Incremental Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -12
8.8.3 Precautions on Orientation Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -13
8.9 Encoder Orientation Control Mode Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . 8 -14
9 Magnetic Sensor Orientation Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -1

9.1 Device Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -2
9.2 Standard Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -3
9.3 Orientation Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -4
9.3.1 Standard Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -4
9.3.2 Magnet Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -4
9.3.3 Magnetic Sensor Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -5
9.4 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -6
9.4.1 Magnetic Sensor Orientation Card (ETC62614X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -6
9.4.2 Magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -6
9.4.3 Magnetic Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -7
9.5 Connections between Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -8
9.5.1 Magnetic Sensor Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -8
9.5.2 Stop Position References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -8
9.6 Control Signal Connector Terminal Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -9
9.7 Magnet and Magnetic Sensor Mountings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -10
9.8 Mounting Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -11
9.9 Stop Position Reference Signal Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -13
9.10 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -14
9.10.1 Fixed Position Stopping Operation Using the Magnetic Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -14
9.10.2 User-set Position Stop Control Using Incremental Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -15
9.11 Magnetic Sensor Orientation Control Mode Adjustment Procedure 9 -16
10 Control Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -1
10.1 User Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -2
10.2 Encoder Orientation Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -8
10.3 Magnetic Sensor Orientation Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -11
11 Operating Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 -1

11.1 Inverter Operating Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 -2
11.2 Encoder Orientation Control Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 -3
11.3 Magnetic Sensor Orientation Control Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 -3
11.4 Miscellaneous Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 -4
xx
12 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 -1
12.1 Troubleshooting Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 -2
12.2 Converter Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 -3
12.3 Inverter Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 -5
12.4 Motor Faults and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 -13
13 Maintenance and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 -1

13.1 Maintenance and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 -3
13.1.1 Daily Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 -3
13.1.2 Periodic Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 -3
13.1.3 Parts Replacement Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 -4
14 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -1
14.1 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -2
14.1.1 Standard Drive Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -2
14.1.2 Winding Selection Drive Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -6
14.1.3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -10
14.1.4 Panel Cutout Dimensions for External Heatsink Cooling Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -14
14.1.5 Calorific Value and Cooling Air Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -15
14.2 Standard Motor Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -17
14.2.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -17
14.2.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -17
14.2.3 Output and Torque Speed Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -19
14.2.4 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -30
14.2.5 Tolerance Radial Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -37
14.2.6 Motor Total Indicator Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -37
14.2.7 Encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -38
14.2.8 Encoder Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -39
14.2.9 Spare Motor Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -40
14.2.10 Replacing the Motor Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -41
14.3 Options and Peripheral Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -42
14.3.1 AC Reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -42
14.3.2 Molded Case Circuit Breaker and Magnetic Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -46
14.3.3 Magnetic Contactor Specifications for Winding Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -47
14.3.4 Busbar and Cable Kits for Connecting Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -49
14.3.5 Digital Operator and Connector Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -54
14.3.6 Connector Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -58
14.3.7 Noise Filters (Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -62
14.3.8 Surge Absorbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -68
15 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -1
15.1 Inverter Drive Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -2
15.1.1 Principle of an Inverter Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -2
15.1.2 Inverter and Converter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -3
15.1.3 Squirrel Cage Induction Motor Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -3
15.1.4 Controlling an Induction Motor Using Vector Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -5
15.2 Basic Inverter Drive mechanics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -6
15.2.1 Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -6
15.2.2 Rotator and Linear Operator Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -6
15.2.3 Inertial Moment and GD2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -7
15.2.4 Converting Metric Units and SI Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -10
xxi
15.3 Determining Drive Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -11
15.3.1 Load Drive Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -11
15.3.2 Acceleration/deceleration Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -15
15.3.3 Calculating Start and Stop Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -17
15.3.4 Intermittent Load Operating Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -18
15.4 Interface Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -19
15.4.1 Sequence Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -19
15.4.2 Speed Reference Signals (M5A Stand-alone Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -21
15.4.3 Sequence Output Signals (M5A Stand-alone Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -21
15.4.4 Analog Monitor Signals (M5A Stand-alone Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -22
15.4.5 YENET1200 Signals (M5N NC Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -22
15.5 Inverter/Converter Cooling Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -23
15.5.1 Temperature Rise within the Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -23
15.5.2 Heat Exchanger Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -24
15.6 Wiring Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -25
15.6.1 Independent Operation for Speed Control Using a Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . 15 -25
15.6.2 Speed Control Operation Combined with NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -27
15.6.3 Multi-step Speed Operation Combined with PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -28
15.7 Internal Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -29
15.8 VS-626M5 Specifications Entry Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -30
xxii
1 1
Introduction
This chapter provides an overview of the VS-626M5 Inverter and

VS-656MR5 Converter and describes their functions and components.
1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -2
1.1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -2
1.1.2 Inverter Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -3
1.1.3 Converter Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -4
1.2 Identifying Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -5

1.2.1 Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -5
1.2.2 Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -6
1 -1
Introduction
1.1.1 Features
1.1 Overview
The VS-625M5 Inverter and VS-656MR5 Converter form a highly reliable, high-performance AC drive system
in which an AC spindle motor is controlled by the Inverter using vector control with a regenerative function.
The system ensures stable drive control of machine tools, such as machining centers and lathes, and industrial
machines, such as transfer machines and testing machines, while providing high speed and the ability to handle
tough environmental conditions.
1.1.1 Features
1 The system has the following features.
J Multi-axis Driving
The Inverter and Converter are separate units of highly reliable, compact book-type construction. The
Converter incorporates a power regeneration function and multi-axis driving configuration, providing
power to the spindle drive and servo drive with easy control through the control panel.
J Compact
The Inverter and Converter are more compact and ensure higher precision than conventional models. This
was enabled by the development of a compact, high-precision detector, improvement in output voltage
under optimal vector control, and the selection of an optimum cooling construction as a result of thermal
analysis.
J Compatible with Yaskawa’s YENET1200 Standard Network
The Inverter and Converter are available in models that are compatible with Yaskawa’s YENET1200 stan-
dard high-speed serial network, making it possible to reduce the number of wires for CNC connections.
The Inverter and Converter are also available in models that are compatible with analog I/O interfaces as
well so that the Inverter and Converter can be used with the VS-626 Series for conventional spindle driv-
ing. Sequence I/O can be connected to 0- and 24-V common terminals.
J Compact, Lightweight Spindle Motor
The downsizing of the spindle motor was enabled by the optimum electromagnetic design of the system
ensuring ideal heat distribution, improvements in the core and cooling construction of the system, and
changes in the circuit design of the encoder. The system ensures higher reliability under tough environ-
mental conditions than any conventional system.
J High-precision, High Servo Performance
The system employs a high-speed IGBT (insulated gate bipolar transistor) power element for high−preci-
sion, high-frequency PWM control at high speeds, suppressing current distortion that may cause torque
ripples and reducing rotational fluctuations. The system employs a DSP (digital signal processor) as well
to improve the servo performance of the system.
J Improved Orientation Function
The system performs orientation control to a fixed position using the motor encoder. This function is used
when the motor shaft is connected to the load shaft at a ratio of one to one. For orientation control with
a magnetic sensor, the detected signal of the motor encoder will be used for orientation control to desired
position.
J Expanded Fixed Output Range via Winding Selection
If a winding selection motor is used, a dedicated electromagnetic contactor will select the winding, making
it possible to expand the fixed output range without an increase in the capacity of the Inverter. This will
eliminate the speed change mechanism of the machinery to enable downsizing.
J Continuous Regenerative Operation
The Converter and Inverter employ an IGBT so that the Converter will respond to frequent accelerations
and decelerations, suppress temperature rises, and save energy consumption, improving the rate of power
supply regeneration and enabling regenerative control at high speeds.
J Construction
Inverter and Converter models with external heatsink cooling are available and panel-mounting construc-
tion with an integral cooling fan are provided for ease of panel mounting and maintenance.
1 -2
1.1 Overview
J International Standards
The Inverter and Converter meet EMC and low-voltage directive requirements, allowing machinery
manufacturers to easily acquire CE marking certification.
1.1.2 Inverter Models
Inverter models are offered in both 200 and 400 V classes. Both M5A models for independent drive with
analog speed references and M5N models for NC systems using YENET1200 serial communications are
available in both classes. M5A and M5N models differ from each other in the host control device and in
connection methods.
1
Table 1.1 Inverter Models
VS-626M5 Inverter Model Numbers *
Voltage 30-minute
Type Class Open Chassis Enclosed Wall-mounted
Rated Model Number
CIMR-M5jjjjj5 CIMR-M5jjjjj0
Output (kW)
3.7 CIMR-M5A23P7 CIMR-M5A23P75 CIMR-M5A23P70
11 CIMR-M5A2011 CIMR-M5A20115 CIMR-M5A20110
200 V class 15 CIMR-M5A2015 CIMR-M5A20155 CIMR-M5A20150
18.5 CIMR-M5A2018 CIMR-M5A20185 CIMR-M5A20180
M5A
400 V class 18.5 CIMR-M5A4018 CIMR-M5A40185 CIMR-M5A40180
3.7 CIMR-M5N23P7 CIMR-M5N23P75 CIMR-M5N23P70
11 CIMR-M5N2011 CIMR-M5N20115 CIMR-M5N20110
200 V class 15 CIMR-M5N2015 CIMR-M5N20155 CIMR-M5N20150
18.5 CIMR-M5N2018 CIMR-M5N20185 CIMR-M5N20180
M5N
400 V class 18.5 CIMR-M5N4018 CIMR-M5N40185 CIMR-M5N40180
* Specify all standards through the construction when ordering.
1 -3
Introduction
1.1.3 Converter Models
1.1.3 Converter Models

Converter models are offered in both into 200 and 400 V classes. Both MR5A models for independent
drives with no 24-V control power supply and MR5N models for NC systems with a 24-V control power
supply are available.
Table 1.2 Converter Models

VS-656MR5 Inverter Mode Numbers *
Voltage 30-minute
Type Class Open Chassis Enclosed Wall-mounted
Rated Model Number
CIMR-MR5jjjjj5 CIMR-MR5jjjjj0
1 Output (kW)
3.7 CIMR-MR5A23P7 CIMR-MR5A23P75 CIMR-MR5A23P70
11 CIMR-MR5A2011 CIMR-MR5A20115 CIMR-MR5A20110
200 V class 15 CIMR-MR5A2015 CIMR-MR5A20155 CIMR-MR5A20150
18.5 CIMR-MR5A2018 CIMR-MR5A20185 CIMR-MR5A20180
MR5A
400 V class 18.5 CIMR-MR5A4018 CIMR-MR5A40185 CIMR-MR5A40180
3.7 CIMR-MR5N23P7 CIMR-MR5N23P75 CIMR-MR5N23P70
11 CIMR-MR5N2011 CIMR-MR5N20115 CIMR-MR5N20110
200 V class 15 CIMR-MR5N2015 CIMR-MR5N20155 CIMR-MR5N20150
18.5 CIMR-MR5N2018 CIMR-MR5N20185 CIMR-MR5N20180
MR5N
400 V class 18.5 CIMR-MR5N4018 CIMR-MR5N40185 CIMR-MR5N40180
* Specify all standards through the construction when ordering.
1 -4
1.2 Identifying Components
1.2 Identifying Components

This section provides the names of Converter and Inverter components.
1.2.1 Converter
The appearance of the Converter and the names of its components are shown below.
Mounting Base 1
4-Mounting Holes
Heatsink
Upper Cover
Front Cover
Case
Lower Cover
Upper and Lower Covers Opened
P/¨ P
+
Main Circuit
DC Output N/© N
−
5CN
5CN
Nameplate
CHARGE LED CHARGE

8 8 7-segment LED display
Control Power P1 P1
Supply Output N1 1CN (Not used.)

N1
1CN
R S T
L1 L2 L3
A1 A2
r t
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
A1/r A2/t
Main Circuit
Power Supply Input Control Power
Supply Input
Grounding
Fig 1.1 Appearance of Converter, Model CIMR-MR5A27P55 (200 V, 7.5 kW)
1 -5
Introduction
1.2.2 Inverter
1.2.2 Inverter
The appearance of the Inverter and the names of its components are shown below.
Mounting Base
4-Mounting Holes
Heatsink
1 Upper Cover
Front Cover
Case
Lower Cover
Upper and Lower Covers Opened
Main Circuit P/¨ P

+
Power Supply Input N
N/© −
51CN/52CN
51CN 52CN
Nameplate
CHARGE 4CN
CHARGE LED 6CN
6CN
1CN
Control Power P1 P1
Supply Input N1 N1
7-segment LED display

1CN 8CN
2CN
2CN 8CN (Optional)

3CN
3CN 9CN/10CN (Optional)

9CN
10CN
U V W
T1 T2 T3
Ground
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Inverter Outputs
Ground
Fig 1.2 Appearance of Inverter, Model CIMR-M5A27P55 (200 V, 7.5 kW)
1 -6
2
Handling 2
This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving an Inverter and
Converter and describes installation methods.
2.1 Confirmation upon Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -2

2.1.1 Inverter Nameplate Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -2
2.1.2 Converter Nameplate Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -3
2.1.3 Motor Nameplate Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -4
2.2 Checking and Controlling

the Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -5
2.2.1 Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -5
2.2.2 Operating Ambient Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -6
2.2.3 Protecting the Inverter and Converter from
Foreign Matter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -6
2.2.4 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -6
2.3 CLEARANCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -7
2.3.1 External Heatsink Cooling Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -7
2.3.2 Open Chassis Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -8
2.4 Attaching the Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -9

2.5 Motor Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -10
2.5.1 Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -10
2.5.2 Installation Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -10
2.5.3 Coupling Motor and Machinery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -11
2 -1
Handling
2.1.1 Inverter Nameplate Information
2.1 Confirmation upon Delivery
CAUTION
D Do not install any Inverter or Converter which is damaged or has missing parts.
Failure to observe this caution may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
Check the following items as soon as the Inverter and Converter are delivered.
Table 2.1 Checks

Check points Description
Does the Inverter model number corre- Check the model number on the name plate on the side of the Inverter and
2 spond with the purchase order? that of the Converter. (See 2.1.1).
Are any parts damaged? Visually check the exterior and verify that there was no damage during
transport.
Are any screws or other components Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness.
loose?
If any of the above checkpoints are not satisfactory, contact your Yaskawa representative.
2.1.1 Inverter Nameplate Information
J Nameplate Information
Example of a Model for 200 VAC, 10HP (7.5 kW)
Inverter Model MODEL : CIMR−M5A27P5

Input Spec. INPUT : DC 270−325 V 9.3 kW
Output Spec. OUTPUT : AC 3PH 0−230 V 8.8 kVA
Inverter Spec. SPEC : 27P55E 720003
PROM No. PRG : 0083
Serial No. SER NO : N32762−000/V0004 MASS : 5 kg (11 lb) Mass
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN
Fig 2.1 Inverter Nameplate
J Model Designations
CIMR - M5 N 2 7P5
Inverter
VS-626M5 Series
Symbol Specifications Symbol Max. applicable motor output

A For stand alone system 3P7 5HP (3.7kW)
N For NC system (YENET 1200) 5P5 7.5HP (5.5kW)
to to
Symbol Voltage 045 60HP (45kW)
2 3-phase 200 V class
(“P” indicates a decimal point.)
Fig 2.2 Inverter Model Numbers
2 -2
2.1 Confirmation upon Delivery
J Inverter Specification Designation

2 7P5 5 E *
Symbol Voltage Revision symbol
Symbol Max. applicable motor output Symbol Enclosure

3P7 5HP (3.7kW) 0 Open chassis type
5P5 7.5HP (5.5kW) External heatsink
to to 5 cooling type
045 60HP (45kW)
* For special specifications, a spec. sheet No.
(“P” indicates a decimal point.) appears on the nameplate.
Fig 2.3 Inverter Specifications
2
2.1.2 Converter Nameplate Information
Example of a Model for 200 VAC, 15 HP (11 kW)
Converter Model MODEL : CIMR-MR5A2011

Input Spec. INPUT : AC 3PH 200-220 V 50 Hz
200-230 V 60 Hz 19 kVA
Output Spec. OUTPUT : DC 270-325 V 13.6 kW PRG : 0120 PROM number
Converter Spec. SPEC : 20115E
Serial No. SER NO : N32764-000/V0004 MASS : 12 kg (26.5 lb) Mass
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN
Fig 2.4 Converter Nameplate
J Model Designations
CIMR - MR5 N 2 011
Converter
VS-656MR5 Series
Symbol Specifications Symbol Max. applicable motor output

A For stand alone system 3P7 5HP (3.7kW)
N For NC or stand-alone system 5P5 7.5HP (5.5kW)
to to
Symbol Voltage 045 60HP (45kW)
2 3-phase 200 V class (“P” indicates a decimal point.)
Fig 2.5 Converter Model Numbers
2 -3
Handling
2.1.3 Motor Nameplate Information
J Converter Specification Designation

2 011 5 E
Symbol Voltage Revision symbol
Symbol Max. applicable motor output Symbol Enclosure

3P7 5HP (3.7kW) 0 Open chassis type
5P5 7.5HP (5.5kW) External heatsink
to to 5 cooling type
045 60HP (45kW)
* For special specifications, a spec. sheet No.
(“P” indicates a decimal point.) appears on the nameplate.
Fig 2.6 Converter Model Numbers
2
2.1.3 Motor Nameplate Information
Insulation class Month and year of manufacture

Rated voltage
Model number
Number of phases
Ratings
Bearing number
(load side/motor side)
Serial number
Number of poles
Fig 2.7 Motor Nameplate
J Motor Model Designations
UAASKj−jjjjjjjj
Voltage class ( : 200 V, E: 400 V)
Other specifications
Installation method (1: Flange-mounted; 3: Foot-mounted)
Detector specifications (Z: With home position)
Design order (F: M5 standard; L: High speed)
Capacity (04: 3.7/2.2 kW to 45: 45/37 kW)
:
:
(45:45/37 kW)
Output characteristics
A: Base speed: 1,500 min−1
B: Wide range output 1:12 (Winding selection)
D: Other wide range output (Winding selection)
E: Base speed: 3,000 min−1
J: Base speed: 1,150 min−1
Cooling method (K: Forced air cooling)
Example: UAASKA−22FZ3OOE
400 V
Other specifications: None
Fig 2.8 Motor Model Numbers
2 -4
2.2 Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
2.2 Checking and Controlling the Installation Site

CAUTION
D Always hold the case when carrying the Inverter.
If the Inverter is held by the front cover, the main body of the Inverter may fall, possibly resulting in inju-
ry.
D Mount the Inverter and the Converter on nonflammable material (i.e. metal).
Failure to observe this caution can result in a fire.
D Install a fan or other cooling device to keep the ambient temperature of Inverter and Converter
below 55_C (131_F) and the intake air temperature to heatsink below 45_C (113_F).
Overheating may cause a fire or damage to the unit.
Install the VS-626M5 Inverter and VS-656MR5 Converter in the installation site described below. Maintain
optimum conditions. 2
2.2.1 Installation Site
Install the Inverter and Converter under the following conditions.
D Install the Inverter and Converter in a clean location free from oil mist and water drops. Water or dirty
oil inside the Inverter or Converter will decrease the insulation resistance, which may result in a ground
fault. Also, any oil on the electronic components may result in an unforeseeable accident.
D Install the Inverter and Converter in a location not in direct sunlight. The interior temperature of the
Inverter or Converter exposed to sunlight will increase and exceed the operating ambient temperature,
which may reduce the service life of internal electronic components.
D Install the Inverter and Converter in a location free from harmful gasses, liquids, excessive dust, and
excessive metal powder. Harmful gasses, corrosion of the electronic or conductive parts, and/or dust
on the Inverter or Converter will decrease the insulation resistance, which may result in a ground fault.
D Do not install the Inverter and Converter on combustible material, such as wood.
D If the Inverter or Converter is installed in a location where the operation conditions are less than ideal
because the occurrence of oil mist, install the Inverter or Converter in the oilproof-control panel.
Oil mist in the Inverter or Converter may cause the corrosion of electronic or conductive part, that may
then decrease the insulation resistance, which may result in a ground fault.
If installing the Inverter or Converter in the control panel, care must be taken when planning this instal-
lation to prevent oil mist from entering the panel thorough gaps in the welded sections.
D Install the Inverter and Converter in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materi-
als.
D Install the Inverter and Converter in a location without excessive vibration.
D Install the Inverter and Converter in a location free from chlorides.
D Design the ventilation or heat exchanger considering the heat radiation of the Inverter and Converter.
Refer to Tables 14.9 to 14.12 for the heat radiation of each Inverter and Converter model. If the ventila-
tion is improper, the heatsink temperature fault protective function will work regardless of whether
or not the output is above the rated value.
D To cool the Inverter and Converter efficiently, install them vertically. Considering the maintainability
and ventilation of the Inverter and Converter, provide sufficient space on the left, right, top, and bottom
of the Inverter and Converter. Refer to 2.3 Clearance for details. If the ventilation is improper, the heat-
sink temperature fault protective function will work regardless of whether or not the output is above
the rated value.
D Although the Inverter and Converter operate between 05C and 555C (325F and 1315F), install the In-
verter and Converter so that the maximum temperature of the heatsink inlet air will be 455C (1135F).
If the temperature of the inlet air is excessively high, the heatsink temperature fault protective function
will work regardless of whether or not the output is less than the rated value.
D Install the Inverter and Converter in a location where the maximum ambient humidity is 90% with no
condensation.
D The heat dissipation in the control panel can be reduced if the control panel has a ventilation duct and
the heatsink of the Inverter and that of the Converter are exposed in the duct to the cooling air. In this
case, the capacity of the heat exchanger, if required, can be reduced. Refer to 15.5 Inverter/Converter
Cooling Design for details.
D If the Inverter is installed in a panel, the air in the box can be mixed to cool the Inverter. The Inverter
must not be installed outside an enclosure. Although the surface of the PCB is coated with varnish,
the Inverter may fail to operate or result in accidents if the PCB comes in contact with moisture or dust.
2 -5
Handling
2.2.2 Operating Ambient Temperature
D Observe these additional cautions if taking the heatsink out of the panel from the opening in the control
panel to cool outside.
D Install an oil-proof gasket on the fitting to prevent oil and dust from entering the unit.
Without a gasket, oil and iron particles may enter the control panel, corrosion of the electronic
parts and conductive parts may occur, and the resulting decrease of the insulation resistance may
result in a ground fault.
D If oil is on the external cooling fan, decrease in the insulation resistance and in the life of the rotat-
ing section may occur over time.
Also, if oil and dust are on the heatsink, cooling efficiency may decrease due to the clogging of
the fins. Attach a filter onto the cooling-air intake and avoid taking in air in locations where the
oil mist is present.
2.2.2 Operating Ambient Temperature
To enhance the reliability of operation, the Inverter and Converter should be installed in an environment
free from extreme temperature increases. If the Inverter or Converter is installed in an enclosed environ-
2 ment, such as a panel, use a cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below
45°C (113°F).
2.2.3 Protecting the Inverter and Converter from Foreign Matter

Place a cover over the Inverter and Converter during installation to shield them from metal power produced
by drilling.
Always remove the covers from the Inverters and Converters after completing installation. Otherwise,
ventilation will be reduced, causing the Inverter and Converter to overheat.
2.2.4 Storage
The Inverter, Converter, and Motor must be stored under the following conditions.
Table 2.2 Storage Conditions

Temperature 0°C to 60°C (32°F to 140°F)
Humidity 5% to 95% with no condensation
The air at 40°C (104°F) with 50% humidity will condensate if the temperature drops to
28°C (82.4°F). Be sure that the place of storage does not have radical temperature changes.
Environment Indoors with no corrosive gas, mist, or dust.
2 -6
2.3 CLEARANCES
2.3 CLEARANCES
Install the Inverter and Converter vertically and allow sufficient clearances for effective cooling as shown in
Fig. 2.9 and Fig. 2.10.
IMPORTANT 1. For the external dimensions and mounting dimensions, refer to 14.1.3 Dimensions.
2. Allowable intake air temperature to the Inverter and the Converter:
S Open chassis type : 0_C to +45_C (32_F to 113_F)
S External heatsink cooling type
Inside of heatsink : 0_C to +45_C (32_F to 113_F)
Inside of unit : 0_C to +55_C (32_F to 131_F)
3. Near the heatsink, cooling air speed should be 2.5 m/s for effective cooling (for external heatsink cooling).
2.3.1 External Heatsink Cooling Type 2
Air
120 mm (4.72 inches)
or more
Max. 70 mm
(2.76 inches)
Heatsink
Converter Inverter
or more
5 mm (0.20 inches)
or more Air
(a) Front View (b) Side View

Fig 2.9 Installation Orientation and Space of Models with External Heatsink Cooling
2 -7
Handling
2.3.2 Open Chassis Type
2.3.2 Open Chassis Type

or more Air
2
Max. 70 mm
(2.76 inches)
Converter Inverter 150 mm (5.91 inches)

or more
5 mm (0.20 inches) Air
or more
(a) Front View (b) Side View

Fig 2.10 Clearances for Open Chassis Type
When using an Open-chassis Converter (11 kW or more) in combination with an Inverter (7.5 kW or less),
follow the installation procedure shown below.
Converter 28 mm (1.1inches)
(11kW or more)
Inverter
(7.5kW or less)
57 mm (2.24inches)
Fig 2.11 Clearances when Combining a Converter or 11 kW or More with an Inverter of

7.5 kW or Less
2 -8
2.4 Attaching the Digital Operator
2.4 Attaching the Digital Operator
WARNING
D Disconnect all power before removing Digital Operator (JVOP-132). Then wait for the time de-
scribed on warning labels after main circuit power supply and control power supply are discon-
nected, and all LEDs of the Inverter and the Converter are extinguished.
Failure to observe this warning can result in an electric shock.
CAUTION
D Do not use any screws other than the ones provided to mount the cable holder.
Otherwise, the cable holder will not be attached securely.
2
The VS-626M5 can support the Multi-functional Display Digital Operator (JVOP-132) as an option. The
Exclusive-use Extension Cable (72616-W5301 or 72616-W5303) is required when connecting the Digital
Operator with the Inverter. Use 3CN to attach the digital operator firmly as follows.
D Turn OFF the Inverter power supply.
D Connect the extension cable on both Inverter and Digital Operator. (See Fig. 2.12.)
D After inserting the connector into the Inverter, tighten two connector screws to prevent the connector
from being removed.
D Install the cable holder on the Digital Operator with the provided tapping screws to prevent the cable
from dropping.
Digital Operator
(Back of JVOP-132)
Cable holder
(Make sure it’s not reversed.)
Attach the cable Control PC board
Connector screws
holder with tapping
screws M3×10. Connector code for
digital operator con-
nection
3CN
Extension cable
Fig 2.12 Extension Cable Installation
2 -9
Handling
2.5 Motor Installation Precautions

This section provides precautions for mechanical designing around the Motor to be installed.
IMPORTANT The motor flange and shaft are coated with anti-corrosive paint or grease. Clean the flange, shaft, and key
groove with paint thinner before installing the motor.

Install the Motor under the following conditions.
D Provide sufficient space so that cooling air will be provided to the cooling fan. Keep a space of at least
100 mm (3.94 inches) between the machine and the ventilation outlet of the Motor. If ventilation is
2 not proper, the motor temperature fault protective function will work regardless of whether or not the
load is at the rated value or not.
D Install the motor in a clean location free from oil mist and water drops. If the motor is likely to come
in contact with water or oil, protect the motor with a cover. The intrusion of water or dirty oil into the
interior of the motor will decrease the insulation resistance, which may result in a ground fault.
D Check that the mounting bed, base, or stand of the Motor is of robust construction because the weight
of the motor as well as the dynamic load of the motor in operation will be imposed on it, possibly caus-
ing vibration. Use the Motor with a maximum vibration acceleration of 2.5 G if it is a Standard Motor
with a maximum capacity of 22/18.5 kW or a Winding Selection Motor with a maximum capacity of
11/7.5 kW or 18.5/15 or 22/18.5 kW and the external diameter is 260 mm (10.2 inches) or less. Use
the Motor with a maximum vibration acceleration of 2 G if it is a Standard Motor with a maximum
capacity of 37/30 kW or a Winding Selection Motor with a maximum capacity of 15/11 kW and the
external diameter is 260 mm (10.2 inches) or less.
Frequency of vibration acceleration is 10 to 60 Hz (constant amplitude) or 60 to 2,500 Hz (constant
acceleration).
D Install the motor in a location free from excessive dust, metal powder, or mist. The motor has a built-in
fan that provides cooling air to the core. If the passage of cooling air is blocked with dust or other for-
eign matter, the cooling efficiency will drop. As a result, the motor temperature fault protective func-
tion will work regardless of whether or not the load is the rated value or not.
Use a motor with oil seal in the case, such as gear coupling, where the motor shaft is likely to come
into contact with oil. For gear coupling, check that the surface of lubricating oil is under the oil seal
lip.
2.5.2 Installation Orientation
Consider the following conditions for the installation direction of the Motor.
D The Flange-type Motor can be mounted with the motor shaft on the load side at any angle between
horizontal and the downward vertical direction. If the motor shaft is facing up, excessive force will
be imposed on the motor shaft. As a result, the service life of the Motor will be adversely affected.
D If the Motor is mounted on legs, mount the legs on the floor. If the legs are installed upward, excessive
force will be imposed on the legs. As a result, the service life of the Motor will be adversely affected.
D Use the Motor of outer diameter j380 with the terminal box facing upward and the motor shaft facing
horizontal if it is a Standard Motor with a minimum capacity of 45/37 kW or a Winding Selection
Motor with a minimum capacity of 18.5/15 kW. If the terminal box is in the horizontal or downward
direction, dust may intrude from the ventilation mouth on the bottom of the load-side bracket. As a
result, the Motor may fail to operate or unexpected accidents may occur.
2 -10
2.5 Motor Installation Precautions
2.5.3 Coupling Motor and Machinery

Consider the following conditions when coupling the Motor with the machinery.
J Direct Coupling
Couple the Motor with the machinery so that the center of the motor shaft and that of the machinery shaft
are on a straight line. Insert a liner for adjustment, if necessary. If the center of the motor shaft does not
coincide with that of the machinery shaft, unnecessary torsion will be imposed on the motor shaft and ma-
chinery shaft. As a result, the bearings may wear out or break quickly.
Level
B
Tolerance A: 0.03 m (0.0012 inches) max.
Surface irregularity B: 0.03 mm (0.0012 inches) max.
2
A
Fig 2.13 Direct Coupling Precision of Motor and Machinery
Use the coupling so that a axial load is not imposed on the motor shaft.
J Belt Coupling
Check that the motor shaft is parallel to the machinery shaft and that the line connecting the centers of the
pulleys and the shafts are at right angles to each other. The radial load imposed on the motor shaft edge
must not exceed the permissible value specified in 14.2.5 Tolerance Radial Loads.
Be sure that no axial load is imposed on the motor shaft.
If the angularity of the belt is improper, the belt will vibrate or slip. If an excessive radial load is imposed
on the motor shaft, the motor bearings will be adversely affected and the service life of the bearings will
be decreased.
Check that the angle of contact of the belt and pulley will be 140° or more, or otherwise the belt may slip.
d
S If C is 1,000 mm (39.4 inches) or less, d < 1 mm (0.039 inches).
S If C is more than 1,000 (39.4) mm (39.4 inches), d/C < 1/1000
S β < 1/3° C
Belt
C
β
φ
Motor shaft
Machinery shaft
Fig 2.14 Belt Installation
J Gear Coupling
Check that the motor shaft is parallel to the machinery shaft and that the centers of the gears are engaged
properly. Refer to 14.2.6 Motor Total Indicator Readings for the precision of the peripheral parts connect-
ing to the motor shaft. The gears may grate if they do not engage properly.
Be sure that no axial load is imposed on the motor shaft.
J Mounting a Pulley or Gear to the Motor Shaft

When mounting a pulley or gear to the motor shaft, consider the mounting balance of the Motor. The dy-
namic balance of the Motor is kept with a half key (for motors with a key way), which is a half as thick
as the key (T) specified in the motor shaft dimensional drawing. The Motor rotates at high speed and a little
imbalance in the mechanism may cause the motor to vibrate.
2 -11
3
Wiring
3
This chapter provides typical connection examples of the Inverter and Con-
verter to peripheral units, main circuit wiring specifications, and control cir-
cuit wiring.
3.1 Connection with Peripheral Units . . . . . . . . 3 -2

3.2 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -5
3.3 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -7
3.3.1 Wires and Suitable Crimp Connectors . . . . . . . . . . 3 -7
3.3.2 Functions of Main Circuit Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -13
3.3.3 Main Circuit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -15
3.3.4 Main Circuit Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -19
3.3.5 Wiring the Main Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -21
3.4 Wiring Control Circuit Signals . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -24

3.4.1 Control Signal Connectors and Wires . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -24
3.4.2 Terminal Arrangement of Control Signal
Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -26
3.4.3 Control Signal Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -28
3.4.4 Sequence Input Signal Circuit
(for Stand-alone Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -32
3.4.5 Sequence Output Signal Circuit
(for Stand-alone Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -33
3.4.6 Precautions for Control Signal Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -33
3.5 Wiring Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -35
3 -1
Wiring
3.1 Connection with Peripheral Units

WARNING
D Always turn OFF the input power supply before wiring terminals.
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
D Wiring should be performed only by qualified personnel.
Failure to observe this warning can result in an electric shock or a fire.
D Make sure to ground the ground terminal .
(200V class: Ground to 100Ω or less, 400V class: Ground to 10Ω or less)
Failure to observe this warning can result in an electric shock or a fire.
D Always check the operation of any emergency stop circuits after they are wired.
Otherwise, there is the possibility of injury. (Wiring is the responsibility of the user.)
D Never touch the output terminals directly with your hands or allow the output lines to come into
contact with the Inverter case. Never short the output circuits.
Otherwise, electrical shock or grounding can occur.
3
CAUTION
D Verify that the rated voltage of the Converter coincides with the AC power supply voltage.
Failure to observe this caution can result in personal injury or a fire.
D Do not perform a withstand voltage test of the Inverter and the Converter.
It may cause semi-conductor elements to be damaged.
D Make sure to connect the Inverter and the Converter as shown in the connection diagram.
The Inverter or the Converter may be damaged.
D Tighten terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.
Failure to observe this caution can result in a fire.
D Do not connect the power supply to output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.
The interior parts of the Inverter will be damaged if voltage is applied to the output terminals.
D Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuits.
The Inverter can be damaged or internal parts burnt if these devices are connected.
D Do not connect electromagnetic switches or contactors to the output circuits.
If a load is connected while the Inverter is operating, surge current will cause the overcurrent protection
circuit inside the Inverter to operate.
3 -2
3.1 Connection with Peripheral Units
The following shows standard connections of the VS-626M5 with peripheral units.
Power Supply: Power Supply:

200 VAC, 200 VAC, 3-phase (200 V Class) or
Single-phase 400 VAC, 3-phase (400 V Class)
Molded-case Circuit Molded-case Circuit

Breaker (2MCCB) or Breaker (1MCCB) or
Ground Fault Ground Fault
Interrupter Interrupter
Magnetic Contactor Input Noise Filter

(2MC)*2
3
Magnetic Contactor
(1MC)*2
AC Reactor (L)*1 Molded-case

Circuit Breaker
(3MCCB) or
R/L1 Ground Fault
S/L2 Interrupter
A1/r T/L3
A2/t VS-626M5
(Inverter)
VS-656MR5
(Converter) Connection Bus Bar
Flat Cable
P1N1 Power Supply Cable
Grounding Grounding
U/T1
Encoder Cable V/T2
W/T3
*1 Make sure to connect an AC reactor to each Converter. Do not connect any equipment
other than the Converter to the secondary side of the AC reactor. If not observed, Con-
verter may burn out.
*2 Connect a surge absorber to the electromagnetic contactor in parallel with the coil of the Z1, Z2, Z3
electromagnetic contactor, or otherwise the control signal lines may malfunction. Motor Motor Cooling Fan
Power Supply
Fig 3.1 Connection with Peripheral Units for External Heatsink Cooling Type
3 -3
Wiring
The following figure shows the system configuration of the Inverter compatible with YENET1200 commu-
nications. For details on the connections of an NC machine and servo units, refer to the manual for the NC ma-
chine.
R
S VS-656MR5
T Converter Unit
r
t P
5CN N
N1 P1
N1 P1
51CN
VS-626M5
Inverter Unit
3 P
N
52CN
2CN
PG M
51CN
Servo Unit
P
N
52CN 2CN
PG M
51CN
Servo Unit
P
52CN N
NC Machine 2CN
PG M
51CN
Servo Unit
1CN P
N
4CN 2CN
PG M
Fig 3.2 Connection Diagram for Inverter Compatible with YNET1200 Communications
3 -4
3.2 Connection Diagram
3.2 Connection Diagram

The connection diagram of the Inverter and Converter is shown in Figures 3.3 and 3.4. Figure 3.3 is for a M5A
Inverter model for stand-alone drives and Figure 3.4 is for a M5N model for NC systems.
3MCCB
Motor
Cooling Fan
Connection Bus Bar
*1 Z1
3−Phase Z2
200 VAC Z3
P/ N/ P/ N/
1MCCB 1MC L VS−656MR5 P1N1 Power Cable VS−626M5 U IM
R/L1 P1 P1 U/T1
R V
*1 N1 N1 V/T2
S/L2 W
3−Phase S W/T3
200 VAC 5CN 51CN
T T/L3
2MCCB 2MC
Single−phase r A1/r
200 VAC t A2/t
Flat Cable
52CN Ground
3
Ground (100 Ω or less)
2CN
(100 Ω or less)
Not used +5V 4,5,6
1CN 1
0V 1,2,3 2
Not used PA 16 3
3CN *PA 17 P 4
PB 18 5
Digital *PB
Operator 19 P 6 PG
(Option) PC 14 7
MCCB: Molded−case Circuit Breaker *PC 15 P 8
MC: Magnetic Contactor 9
L: AC Reactor 6CN *2
*3 19,20,21 EXTCOM0 THSA 8 11 TS
22,23 24VCOM THSB 9 P 12
External 24 V SS
24,25 0VCOM 7 10
Power Supply
6 RDY
7 EMG 1CN
8 FWD PAO 13
9 REV *PAO 14 P
10 TLH PBO 15
11 TLL(INC) *PBO 16 P Motor encoder
PCO 11 signal outputs
12 SSC(SV)
13 RST *PCO 12 P
14 CHW SS 17
5 DAS
15 PPI
16 ORT *2
EXTCOM 31 *3
17 LGR 12−bit Digital Command
24VCOM 32 External 24 V
18 MGR
0VCOM 33 Power Supply BCD
3rd digit 2nd digit BIN
3 SCOM D1 19
Speed reference 1 − 1
4 0V D2 20
2 − 2
2 SS D3 21
4 − 4
D4 22 − 8
33 8
ZSPD D5 23
10 1 16
34 AGR D6 24
20 2 32
35 SDET D7 25
40 4 64
36 TDET D8 26
80 8 128
37 TLE D9 27 100 10 256
38 ORG D10 28 200 20 512
39 ORE D11 29
400 40 1024
40 CHWE D12 30 800 80 2048
42 COM1
6CN
43
SM 47
*1 Connection when the sequence input common 44 FLT
is the external common. 45 0V 48 SM
*2 EXTCOM0 of 1CN and EXTCOM are internally 26 FC0

isolated. LM 50
27 FC1
*3 For 400 V class, 3-phase 400 VAC is used. 28 FC2 LM
0V 49
29 FC3
41 FLTL
46 TALM
P indicates shielded twisted-pair wires. 30 COM2
I/O Card
Fig 3.3 Connection Diagram for Stand-alone Drive, 200 V Class External Heatsink Cool-
ing Type
3 -5
Wiring
3MCCB
R1
S1
T1
Connection Bus Bar
P/ N/ P/ N/ P/ N/
1MCCB 1MC VS-656MR5
L P1N1 Power Cable
Servo Unit
*1 R R/L1 P1 P1 VS-626M5
3-Phase N1
200 VAC S/L2 N1
S
5CN 51CN 52CN 51CN 52CN
T T/L3
2MCCB 2MC
Single-phase r A1/r
200 VAC
t A2/t
Flat Cable Flat Cable
Ground
(100 Ω or less)
1CN 3CN
Digital
Operator
Not used (Option)
3 *2
MCCB: Molded-case Circuit Breaker

MC: Magnetic Contactor *1
L: AC Reactor 3-Phase
200 VAC
Motor
Z1 Cooling Fan
R1
4CN YENET1200 Card Z2
S1
4 R Z3
6 *S SW1 T1
For ST No. Setting U
U/T1 IM
For Terminal Unit V/T2 V
1CN W
W/T3
7 ALM-
8 ALMC
13 PAO
P 14 *PAO
For Monitoring Zero-speed Ground
17 SS (100 Ω or less)
2CN
+5V 4,5,6 1
0V 1,2,3 2
PA 16 3
*PA 17 P 4
PB 18 5
*PB 19 P 6
PC 14 PG
7
*PC 15 P 8
9
THSA 8 TS
THSB 9 P 11
SS 7 12
10
*1 For 400 V class, 3-phase 400 VAC is used.

*2 Refer to the manual of NC machine for connection of
NC machine and servo unit.
P indicates shielded twisted-pair wires.
Fig 3.4 Connection Diagram for NC System, 200 V Class External Heatsink Cooling
Type
3 -6
3.3 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

This section provides information on the specifications, functions, configuration, and wiring of main circuit
terminals.
3.3.1 Wires and Suitable Crimp Connectors

Select wires or crimp connectors to be used from the following table.
Table 3.1 200 V Class Converter Power Cable Specifications

Wire Sizes
Model Tightening UL-approved 600 V Vinyl- 600 V Cross- 600 V Rubber-

Terminal Symbols Terminal Torque 75°C (167°F) sheath Insulated linked Polyethy- insulated Cab-
CIMR-
Screw (N S m) Temperature-rated Wire (IV, VV) lene Wire (IC) tyre Cable (CT)
MR5
Copper Wire 60°C (140°F) 90°C (194°F) 60°C (140°F)
[AWG (mm2)] (mm2) (mm2) (mm2)
P/¨, N/© M6 2.94 (*1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 M5 2.35 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
23P7
A1/r, A2/t M5 2.35 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
P/¨, N/©
M4
M6
1.2 − 2.0
2.94
10 (5.3) 2
(*1)
2 2
3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 M5 2.35 12 (3.3) 3.5 2 3.5
25P5
A1/r, A2/t M5 2.35 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
M4 1.2 − 2.0 10 (5.3) 3.5 2 2
P/¨, N/© M6 2.94 (*1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 M5 2.35 10 (5.3) 3.5 2 3.5
27P5
A1/r, A2/t M5 2.35 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
M4 1.2 − 2.0 10 (5.3) 3.5 2 3.5
P/¨, N/© M6 × 2 2.94 (*1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 M6 3.4 − 4.9 8 (8.4) 8 3.5 8
2011
A1/r, A2/t M4 1.2 − 2.0 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
M6 3.4 − 4.9 8 (8.4) 5.5 3.5 5.5
P/¨, N/© M6 × 2 2.94 (*1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 M6 3.4 − 4.9 6 (13.3) 14 5.5 14
2015
A1/r, A2/t M4 1.2 − 2.0 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
M6 3.4 − 4.9 8 (8.4) 8 5.5 5.5
P/¨, N/© M6 × 2 2.94 (*1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 M6 3.4 − 4.9 4 (21.2) 22 8 22
2018
A1/r, A2/t M4 1.2 − 2.0 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
M6 3.4 − 4.9 6 (13.3) 8 5.5 8
P/¨, N/© M6 × 2 2.94 (*1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 M6 3.4 − 4.9 4 (21.2) 22 14 22
2022
A1/r, A2/t M4 1.2 − 2.0 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
M6 3.4 − 4.9 6 (13.3) 14 8 8
P/¨, N/© M6 × 2 2.94 (*1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 M8 7.8 − 9.8 2 (33.6) 38 2.2 38
2030
A1/r, A2/t M4 1.2 − 2.0 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
M8 7.8 − 9.8 6 (13.3) 14 8 14
P/¨, N/© M6 × 4 2.94 (*1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 M10 14.7 − 19.6 1/0 (53.5) 50 30 60
2037
A1/r, A2/t M4 1.2 − 2.0 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
M8 7.8 − 9.8 4 (21.2) 22 14 14
2011 to 2037 A11/r1, A21/t1 (*2) M4 1.2 − 2.0 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
* 1. Connect using exclusive-use connection bus bar.
* 2. Provided for open chassis type with a minimum capacity of 11 kW. Not provided for external heatsink cooling type.
3 -7
Wiring
Notes: 1. Wire size is selected assuming external suspended wiring of single 3-core cables at
an ambient temperature of 30°C (86°F).
2. If ambient temperature exceeds 30°C (86°F), the allowable current of wire may be lowered.
3. Temperature for each wire indicates the maximum allowable conductor temperature.
Table 3.2 400 V Class Converter Power Cable Specifications

Wire Sizes
Model Tighten- 600 V Vinyl- 600 V Cross- 600 V Rubber-
Terminal ing UL-approved 75°C sheath Insulated linked Polyethy- insulated Cab-
CIMR- Terminal Symbols (167°F) Temperature-
MR5 Screw Torque Wire (IV, VV) lene Wire (IC) tyre Cable (CT)
(N S m) rated Copper Wire 60°C (140°F) 90°C (194°F) 60°C (140°F)
[AWG (mm2)] (mm2) (mm2) (mm2)
P/¨, N/© M6 2.94 (*1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 M5 2.35 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
45P5
A1/r, A2/t M5 2.35 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
M4 1.2 to 2.0 10 (5.3) 2 2 2
P/¨, N/© M6 2.94 (*1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 M5 2.35 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
3 47P5
A1/r, A2/t M5 2.35 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
M4 1.2 to 2.0 10 (5.3) 2 2 2
P/¨, N/© M6 × 2 2.94 (*1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 M6 3.4 to 4.9 12 (3.3) 3.5 2 3.5
4011
A1/r, A2/t M4 1.2 to 2.0 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
M6, M6 3.4 to 4.9 10 (5.3) 3.5 2 2
P/¨, N/© M6 × 2 2.94 (*1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 M6 3.4 to 4.9 10 (5.3) 3.5 2 3.5
4015
A1/r, A2/t M4 1.2 to 2.0 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
M6, M6 3.4 to 4.9 10 (5.3) 3.5 2 3.5
P/¨, N/© M6 × 2 2.94 (*1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 M6 3.4 to 4.9 8 (8.4) 5.5 3.5 5.5
4018
A1/r, A2/t M4 1.2 to 2.0 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
M6, M6 3.4 to 4.9 10 (5.3) 5.5 3.5 3.5
P/¨, N/© M6 × 2 2.94 (*1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 M6 3.4 to 4.9 8 (8.4) 8 3.5 8
4022
A1/r, A2/t M4 1.2 to 2.0 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
M6, M6 3.4 to 4.9 8 (8.4) 5.5 3.5 5.5
P/¨, N/© M6 × 2 2.94 (*1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 M6 3.4 to 4.9 6 (13.3) 14 5.5 14
4030
A1/r, A2/t M4 1.2 to 2.0 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
M6, M6 3.4 to 4.9 8 (8.4) 8 5.5 5.5
P/¨, N/© M6 × 2 2.94 (*1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 M6 3.4 to 4.9 4 (21.2) 22 8 22
4037
A1/r, A2/t M4 1.2 to 2.0 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
M6, M6 3.4 to 4.9 6 (13.3) 8 5.5 8
P/¨, N/© M6 × 2 2.94 (*1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 M6 3.4 to 4.9 4 (21.2) 22 14 22
4045
A1/r, A2/t M4 1.2 to 2.0 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
M6, M6 3.4 to 4.9 6 (13.3) 14 8 8
4011 to
A11/r1, A21/t1 (*2) M4 1.2 to 2.0 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
4045
3 -8
Table 3.3 200 V Class Inverter Power Cable Specifications

Wire Sizes
Tighten- UL-approved 600 V Vinyl- 600 V Cross- 600 V Rubber-in-
Model CIMR- Terminal Symbols Terminal ing 75°C (167°F) sheath Insulated linked Polyethy- sulated Cabtyre
M5 Screw Torque Temperature-rated Wire (IV, VV) lene Wire (IC) Cable (CT)
(N S m) Copper Wire 60°C (140°F) 90°C (194°F) 60°C (140°F)
[AWG (mm2)] (mm2) (mm2) (mm2)
P/¨, N/© M6 2.94 (*1)
23P7 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M5 2.35 8 (8.4) 5.5 3.5 5.5
M5 × 2 2.35 10 (5.3) 3.5 2 3.5
P/¨, N/© M6 2.94 (*1)
25P5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M5 2.35 8 (8.4) 5.5 3.5 5.5
M5 × 2 2.35 10 (5.3) 3.5 2 3.5
P/¨, N/© M6 2.94 (*1)
27P5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M5 2.35 8 (8.4) 8 3.5 8 3
M5 × 2 2.35 8 (8.4) 5.5 3.5 5.5
P/¨, N/© M6 × 2 2.94 (*1)
2011 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M8 6.47 6 (13.3) 14 8 14
M6 × 2 3.4 to 4.9 8 (8.4) 8 5.5 5.5
P/¨, N/© M6 × 2 2.94 (*1)
2015 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M8 6.47 4 (21.2) 22 14 22
M6 × 2 3.4 to 4.9 6 (13.3) 14 8 8
P/¨, N/© M6 × 2 2.94 (*1)
2018 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M8 6.47 3 (26.7) 30 14 30
M6 × 2 3.4 to 4.9 6 (13.3) 14 8 14
P/¨, N/© M6 × 2 2.94 (*1)
2022 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M8 6.47 2 (33.6) 50 22 38
M6 × 2 3.4 to 4.9 6 (13.3) 14 8 14
P/¨, N/© M6 × 2 2.94 (*1)
2030 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M8 7.8 to 9.8 2/0 (67.4) 80 38 80
M6 × 2 3.4 to 4.9 4 (21.2) 22 14 14
P/¨, N/© M6 × 4 2.94 (*1)
14.7 to
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M10 3/0 (85.0) 100 50 100
2037 19.6
M8 × 2, 7.8 to 9.8
M6 3 (26
(26.7)
7) 22 14 22
3.4 to 4.9
2011 to
A12/r2, A22/t2 (*2) M4 1.2 to 2.0 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
2037
3 -9
Wiring
Table 3.4 400 V Class Inverter Power Cable Specifications

Wire Sizes
Tighten- UL-approved 600 V Vinyl- 600 V Cross- 600 V Rubber-in-
Model CIMR- Terminal Symbols Terminal ing 75°C (167°F) sheath Insulated linked Polyethy- sulated Cabtyre
M5 Screw Torque Temperature-rated Wire (IV, VV) lene Wire (IC) Cable (CT)
(N S m) Copper Wire 60°C (140°F) 90°C (194°F) 60°C (140°F)
[AWG (mm2)] (mm2) (mm2) (mm2)
P/¨, N/© M6 2.94 (*1)
45P5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M5 2.35 12 (3.3) 2 2 2
M5 × 2 2.35 10 (5.3) 3.5 2 3.5
P/¨, N/© M6 2.94 (*1)
47P5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M5 2.35 12 (3.3) 3.5 2 3.5
M5 × 2 2.35 10 (5.3) 3.5 2 3.5
P/¨, N/© M6 × 2 2.94 (*1)
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M6 3.4 to 4.9 10 (5.3) 5.5 2 5.5
4011
M5 × 2, 2.1 to 2.5
M6 10 (5.3)
(5 3) 35
3.5 2 35
3.5
3.4 to 4.9
3 P/¨, N/© M6 × 2 2.94 (*1)
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M6 3.4 to 4.9 8 (8.4) 8 3.5 8
4015
M5 × 2, 2.1 to 2.5
M6 8 (8
(8.4)
4) 55
5.5 35
3.5 55
5.5
3.4 to 4.9
P/¨, N/© M6 × 2 2.94 (*1)
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M6 3.4 to 4.9 8 (8.4) 14 5.5 14
4018
M5 × 2, 2.1 to 2.5
M6 8 (8
(8.4)
4) 8 55
5.5 55
5.5
3.4 to 4.9
P/¨, N/© M6 × 2 2.94 (*1)
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M6 3.4 to 4.9 6 (13.3) 14 8 14
4022
M5 × 2, 2.1 to 2.5
M6 8 (8
(8.4)
4) 8 55
5.5 55
5.5
3.4 to 4.9
P/¨, N/© M6 × 2 2.94 (*1)
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M8 7.8 to 9.8 4 (21.2) 22 14 22
4030
M6 × 2, 3.4 to 4.9
M6 6 (13
(13.3)
3) 14 8 8
3.4 to 4.9
P/¨, N/© M6 × 2 2.94 (*1)
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M8 7.8 to 9.8 3 (26.7) 30 14 30
4037
M6 × 2, 3.4 to 4.9
M6 6 (13
(13.3)
3) 14 8 14
3.4 to 4.9
P/¨, N/© M6 × 2 2.94 (*1)
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M8 7.8 to 9.8 1 (42.4) 60 30 50
4045
M6 × 2, 3.4 to 4.9
M6 6 (13
(13.3)
3) 14 8 14
3.4 to 4.9
4011 to
A12/r2, A22/t2 (*2) M4 1.2 to 2.0 14 (2.1) 2 2 2
4045
3 -10
Table 3.5 Terminal Screws for 200 V Class Motors

Inverter Standard Motor Winding Selection Motor
Model Model Terminal Screws Cooling Fan Model Terminal Screws Cooling Fan
CIMR-M5j UAASK- (U, V, W, ) Terminals UAASKj-jjFZ (U, V, W, ) Terminals
j-jjFZ (Z1, Z2, Z3) (Z1, Z2, Z3)
23P7 A-04 M5 M4 − − M4
25P5 A-06 M5 M4 B-06 M6 M4
27P5 A-08 M5 M4 B-08 M6 M4
2011 A-11 M5 M4 B-11 M6 M4
2015 A-15 M8 M4 B-15 M8 M4
2018 A-19 M8 M4 B-19 M10 M4
2022 A-22 M8 M4 B-22 M10 M4
2030 J-30 M10 M4 B-30 M10 M4
2037 J-37 M10 M4 − − M4
Table 3.6 Terminal Screws for 400 V Class Motors 3

Inverter Standard Motor Winding Selection Motor
Model Model Terminal Screws Cooling Fan Model Terminal Screws Cooling Fan
CIMR-M5j UAASKj-jjF (U, V, W, ) Terminals UAASKj-jjF (U, V, W, ) Terminals
Z***E (Z1, Z2, Z3) Z***E (Z1, Z2, Z3)
45P5 A-06 M5 M4 B-06 M6 M4
47P5 A-08 M5 M4 B-08 M6 M4
4011 A-11 M5 M4 B-11 M6 M4
4015 A-15 M8 M4 B-15 M8 M4
4018 A-19 M8 M4 B-19 M10 M4
4022 A-22 M8 M4 B-22 M10 M4
4030 J-30 M10 M4 B-30 M10 M4
4037 J-37 M10 M4 − − M4
4045 J-45 M10 M4 − − M4
3 -11
Wiring
Table 3.7 Closed-loop Crimp Connector Sizes (JIS C 2805) (For 200 V and 400 V Classes)
Wire Sizes Terminal Screws Closed-loop Crimp
Connectors
mm2 AWG
M3.5 1.25 to 3.5
05
0.5 20
M4 1.25 to 4
M3.5 1.25 to 3.5
0 75
0.75 18
M4 1.25 to 4
M3.5 1.25 to 3.5
1 25
1.25 16
M4 1.25 to 4
M3.5 2 to 3.5
M4 2 to 4
2 14 M5 2 to 5
M6 2 to 6
M8 2 to 8
3 M4
M5
5.5 to 4
5.5 to 5
3 5 to 55.5
3.5 5 12 to 10
M6 5.5 to 6
M8 5.5 to 8
M5 8 to 5
8 8 M6 8 to 6
M8 8 to 8
M6 14 to 6
14 6
M8 14 to 8
M6 22 to 6
22 4
M8 22 to 8
30 to 38 3 to 2 M8 38 to 8
M8 60 to 8
50 to 60 1 to 1/0
M10 60 to 10
100 4/0 M10 100 to 10
3 -12
3.3.2 Functions of Main Circuit Terminals

The following tables outline the functions of the main circuit terminals.
Table 3.8 Converter Main Circuit Terminals

Voltage
Symbol Name Functions
Class
R/L1 3-phase
Main circuit power supply
S/L2 200 to 220 VAC 50 Hz
input
T/L3 200 to 230 VAC 60 Hz
Single-phase
A1/r Control power supply
200 to 220 VAC 50 Hz
A2/t input
200 to 230 VAC 60 Hz
Heatsink Single-phase
200 V A11/r1*
Power supply input for 200 to 220 VAC 50 Hz
class A21/t1 cooling fan 200 to 230 VAC 60 Hz
P/¨ 270 to 325 VDC
Main circuit DC output
N/©
P1
(For inverter main circuit power supply)
282 to 325 VDC
3
Control power supply
N1 output (For inverter control power supply)
Ground terminal
Grounding
(Ground resistance: 100 Ω or less)
R/L1 3-phase
Main circuit power supply
S/L2 400 to 440 VAC 50 Hz
input
T/L3 400 to 460 VAC 60 Hz
Single-phase
A1/r Control power supply
200 to 220 VAC 50 Hz
A2/t input
200 to 230 VAC 60 Hz
400 V A11/r1*
Power supply input for 200 to 220 VAC 50 Hz
class A21/t1 cooling fan 200 to 230 VAC 60 Hz
P/¨ 540 to 650VDC
Main circuit DC output
N/© (For inverter main circuit power supply)
P1 Control power supply 282 to 325VDC
N1 output (For inverter control power supply)
Ground terminal
Grounding
* Terminals on Open Chassis Converters with a minimum capacity of 11 kW.
3 -13
Wiring
3.3.2 Functions of Main Circuit Terminals
Table 3.9 Inverter Main Circuit Terminals

Voltage
Symbol Name Functions
Class
P/¨ Main circuit power supply 270 to 325 VDC

N/© input (Supplied from converter)
P1 Control power supply 282 to 325 VDC

N1 input (Supplied from converter)
A12/r2*
200 V Power supply input for 200 to 220 VAC 50 Hz
A22/t2 cooling fan
class 200 to 230 VAC 60 Hz
U/T1
V/T2 Inverter output Inverter output to motor
W/T3
Ground terminal
Grounding
3 P/¨ Main circuit power supply 540 to 650 VDC
N/© input (Supplied from converter)
P1 Control power supply 282 to 325 VDC

N1 input (Supplied from converter)
A12/r2*
400 V Power supply input for 200 to 220 VAC 50 Hz
A22/t2 cooling fan
class 200 to 230 VAC 60 Hz
U/T1
V/T2 Inverter output Inverter output to motor
W/T3
Ground terminal
Grounding
* Terminals on Open Chassis Inverters with a minimum capacity of 11 kW.
3 -14
3.3.3 Main Circuit Configuration

The following diagrams show the main circuit configurations.
J 200 V Class External Heatsink Cooling Type

Converter (VS-656MR5) Inverter (VS-626M5)
CIMR−MR5j23P75 to 27P55 CIMR−M5j23P75 to 27P55
P/ + P/ +
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 + + V/T2
T/L3 W/T3
N/ − N/ −
Power
Control Circuit
A1/r Supply
(RCC)
A2/t +
P1 P1 Power
N1 N1 Supply Control Circuit
(RCC)
+24V 5CN 51CN 52CN

(Note)
+24V (Note)
+24 V
Power
Supply
0V 0V
Converter (VS-656MR5)
CIMR-MR5j20115 to 20375
Inverter (VS-626M5)
CIMR-M5j20115 to 20375
3
P/ + P/ +
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 + + V/T2
T/L3 W/T3
N/ − N/ −
Power
A1/r Supply Control Circuit
+ (RCC)
A2/t P1 P1 Power
(RCC)
Internal Cooling Fan
51CN
+24 V
+24V 5CN +24V (Note) 52CN
Power 0V 0V
Supply
Note: The +24-V power supply is provided to models for NC systems.

Fig 3.5 Main Circuit Configurations of 200 V Class Inverters with External Heatsink Cool-
ing
3 -15
Wiring
J 200 V Class Open Chassis Type

CIMR-MR5j23P70 to 27P50 CIMR-M5j23P70 to 27P50
P/ + P/ +
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 + + V/T2
T/L3 W/T3
N/ − N/ −
Power
A2/t + (RCC)
P1 P1 Power
Supply
N1 N1 (RCC)
Control Circuit
Heatsink Cooling Fan

(Note) 5CN 51CN 52CN
+24V +24V (Note)
+24 V
Power
Supply
0V 0V

CIMR−MR5j20110 to 20300 CIMR−M5j20110 to 20300
P/ +
3
P/ +
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 + + V/T2
T/L3 W/T3
N/ − N/ −
Power
(RCC)
A2/t + P1 P1 Power
Control Circuit
N1 N1 Supply
(RCC)
51CN 52CN
(Note)
+24V 5CN +24V (Note)
+24 V
Power 0V 0V
Supply A12/r2
A11/r1 Heatsink Cooling Fan
A21/t1 Heatsink Cooling Fan A22/t2

CIMR−MR5j20370 CIMR−M5j20370
P/ + P/ +
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 + + V/T2
T/L3 W/T3
N/ − N/ −
A1/r Power
Supply Control Circuit
A2/t + (RCC)
P1 P1 Power
(RCC)
(Note) 5CN 51CN

52CN
+24V +24V (Note)
+24 VPower
Supply 0V 0V
A11/r1 A12/r2
A21/t1 A22/t2
Heatsink Cooling Fan Heatsink Cooling Fan

Fig 3.6 Main Circuit Configurations of 200 V Class Open Chassis Type
3 -16

P/ + P/ +
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 + + V/T2
T/L3 W/T3
N/ − N/ −
Power
(RCC)
A2/t + P1
P1 Power
(RCC)
(Note)
+24V 5CN 51CN +24V (Note) 52CN
+24 V
Power
0V 0V
Supply

CIMR-MR5j40115 to 40455 CIMR-M5j40115 to 40455
P/ + P/ +
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
+ +
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
3
N/ − N/ −
Power
(RCC)
A2/t + P1
P1 Power
(RCC)
51CN
+24V 5CN +24V 52CN
(Note) (Note)
+24 V
Power 0V 0V
Supply
Note: The +24-V power supply is provided on models for NC systems.

Fig 3.7 Main Circuit Configurations of 400 V Class Inverters with External Heatsink Cool-
ing
3 -17
Wiring

P/ + P/ +
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 + + V/T2
T/L3 W/T3
N/ − N/ −
Power
(RCC)
A2/t + P1 P1 Power
(RCC)
+24V +24V (Note)
+24 V
Power 0V 0V
Supply

P/ + P/ +
3 R/L1
S/L2 + +
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
T/L3
N/ − N/ −
Power
Control Circuit
A1/r Supply
(RCC)
A2/t + P1 P1 Power
Control Circuit
N1 N1 Supply
(RCC)
51CN (Note) 52CN
+24V 5CN +24V
(Note)
+24 V
Power
0V 0V
Supply
A11/r1 A12/r2
A21/t1 Heatsink Cooling Fan A22/t2

P/ + P/ +
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 + + V/T2
T/L3 W/T3
N/ − N/ −
Power
A2/t + (RCC)
P1 P1 Power
Control Circuit
N1 N1 Supply
(RCC)
+24 V
+24V +24V (Note)
Power
Supply
0V 0V
A11/r1 A12/r2
A21/t1 A22/t2
Heatsink Cooling Fan Heatsink Cooling Fan

Fig 3.8 Main Circuit Configurations of 200 V Class Open Chassis Type
3 -18
3.3.4 Main Circuit Connection Diagrams

The following diagrams show the main circuit connections.
Motor
P/ N/ P/ N/ 3-phase Z1 Cooling fan
VS−656MR5
R R/L1 P1 P1 VS−626M5 200 VAC Z2
Z3
3-phase N1 N1
S S/L2
200 VAC U/T1 U IM
T T/L3 V
V/T2
W/T3 W
Single-phase r A1/r
200 VAC t A2/t
(Note)
Converter (VS-656MR5) Inverter (VS-626M5) 3

CIMR-MR5j23P75 to 20375 CIMR-M5j23P75 to 20375
Note: No ground terminals are provided on the 23P7 through 27P5 models.
Fig 3.9 Main Circuit Connections for 200 V Class External Heatsink Cooling Type
Motor
P/ N/ P/ N/
VS−656MR5 3-phase Z1Cooling fan
Z2
R R/L1 P1 P1 VS−626M5 200 VAC Z3
3-phase S N1 N1
S/L2
200 VAC T T/L3 U/T1
U IM
V
V/T2 W
W/T3
Single-phase r A1/r
200 VAC t A2/t

Motor
P/ N/ P/ N/ 3-phase Z1Cooling fan
VS−656MR5
R R/L1 P1 P1 VS−626M5 200 VAC Z2
Z3
3-phase S/L2 N1 N1
S
200 VAC T/L3 U/T1
U IM
T V
V/T2 W
W/T3
Single-phase r A1/r
200 VAC t A2/t
A11/r1 A12/r2
A21/t1 A22/t2

Fig 3.10 Main Circuit Connections for 200 V Class Open Chassis Type
3 -19
Wiring
3.3.4 Main Circuit Connection Diagrams
Motor
VS−656MR5 Z2
R R/L1 P1 P1 VS−626M5 400 VAC Z3
3-phase S/L2 N1 N1
S
400 VAC T/L3 U/T1 U IM
T V
V/T2 W
W/T3
Single-phaser A1/r
200 VAC t A2/t

CIMR-MR5j45P55 to 40455 CIMR-M5j45P55 to 40455
3 Note: No ground terminals are provided on the 45P5 through 47P5 models.
Fig 3.11 Main Circuit Connections for 400 V Class External Heatsink Cooling Type
Motor
P/ N/ P/ N/ 3-phase Z1Cooling fan
VS−656MR5 Z2
R R/L1 P1 P1 VS−626M5 400 VAC Z3
3-phase S S/L2 N1 N1
400 VAC T T/L3 U/T1
U IM
V
V/T2 W
W/T3
Single-phase r A1/r
t A2/t
200 VAC

Motor
VS−656MR5 Z2
R R/L1 P1 P1 VS−626M5 400 VAC Z3
400 VAC T T/L3 U/T1
U IM
V
V/T2 W
W/T3
Single-phase r A1/r
t A2/t
200 VAC
A11/r1 A12/r2
A21/t1 A22/t2

Fig 3.12 Main Circuit Connections for 400 V Class Open Chassis Type
3 -20
3.3.5 Wiring the Main Circuit

This section provides information on the main circuits of the Converter and Inverter and information on
wiring the ground lines.
J Wiring Precautions for Main Circuit Input
Installation of Molded-case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)

Make sure to connect MCCB between the main circuit power supply input and VS-656MR5 input termi-
nals R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3 to protect wiring.
Installation of Ground Fault Interrupter

The output of the Inverter is switched at high speed, which results in high-frequency leakage current. When
connecting a ground fault interrupter to the input terminals of the Converter, select an one designed for
inverters that eliminates the high-frequency leakage current and detects only the leakage current in fre-
quency bands that are harmful to the human body.
D Use a ground fault interrupter designed for inverters for each Converter, with a minimum sensing cur-
rent of 30 mA.
D A standard ground fault interrupter can be used for each Converter provided that it has a minimum
sensing current of 200 mA with a minimum response time of 0.1 s.
3
Installation of Magnetic Contactor
When the main circuit power supply is shut OFF in the sequence, a magnetic contactor (MC) can be used
instead of a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB). However, when a magnetic contactor is switched OFF
at the main circuit power supply input side, regenerative braking does not function and the motor coasts
to a stop. (At this time, protective function activates to display a fault.)
Frequent turning ON and OFF the magnetic contactor for the main circuit power supply input may cause
the Converter and Inverter to malfunction. Turn the magnetic contactor ON and OFF once every 30 min-
utes at most.
Terminal Block Connection Sequence

Main circuit power supply input phases can be connected to any terminal regardless of the order of R/L1,
S/L2 and T/L3 on the terminal block.
Installation of AC Reactor
Make sure to install an AC reactor, which corresponds to the capacity of the individual Converter, to each
Converter for the Converter’s power-supply regeneration.
Do not connect any equipment other than the Converter to the secondary side of the AC reactor. If this
caution is not observed, an overcurrent may occur in the Converter. An AC reactor is effective in improving
the power factor of the power supply side.
Installation of Surge Suppressor

For inductive loads (magnetic contactors, magnetic relays, magnetic valves, solenoids, magnetic brakes,
etc.) connected near the inverter, install a surge suppressor.
IMPORTANT A surge absorber is used to absorb energy accumulated in the coil of an inductive load. Use a surge absorber
with a capacity suitable for the coil. Do not, however, connect surge absorbers to output terminals U, V, W
of the Inverter. If a surge absorber is not used, the generated surge voltage of the coil will affect the control
signal line of the Inverter when the inductive load is turn ON and OFF. As a result, the control signal may
malfunction.
Prohibition of Installation of Phase Advancing Capacitor

Do not connect a phase advancing capacitor or surge suppressor to main circuit power supply input (R/L1,
S/L2, or T/L3). The phase advancing capacitor or surge suppresser may become overheated and damaged
by the harmonic components of the drive unit. Also, the drive unit may malfunction because of overcur-
rent.
Using Input Noise Filters

A noise filter installed on the power supply side eliminates external noise on the power line of the Inverter
and suppresses harmonic noise leaking from the Inverter to the power line. Use a noise filter designed for
an inverter, as shown in example 1. Refer to 14.3.7 Noise Filter for recommended filters.
3 -21
Wiring
3.3.5 Wiring the Main Circuit
D Example 1
Correct Use an exclusive noise filter
Power
Supply MCCB
specified for inverters.
Noise VS- VS-
~
Filter 656MR5 626M5 M
MCCB
Other Control Device
Fig 3.13 Using Input Noise Filter
D Example 2
Power
Incorrect Do not use general-purpose filters
MCCB
Supply
VS-
because they are not effective.
VS-
~ 656MR5 626M5 M
MCCB
General
Noise Other Control Device
Filter
3 Power
MCCB
Incorrect
Supply
General VS- VS-
~ Noise 656MR5 626M5 M
Filter
MCCB
Other Control Device
Fig 3.14 Examples of Incorrect Noise Filter Installation

J Wiring Precautions for Converter Control Power Supply Input
Make sure to connect MCCB with the converter control power supply input terminals A1/r and A2/t to
protect wiring.
J Wiring Precautions for Main Circuit between Converter and Inverter
Connecting the Main Circuit DC Power Supply
Connect converter main circuit DC output terminals P/¨ and N/© to inverter main circuit power supply
input terminals P/¨ and N/© using exclusive-use connection bus bar. Secure bus bar using all the power
terminal screws and tighten to torque value of 4 to 5 N·m.
Connecting the Converter Control Power Supply Output

Connect converter control power supply output terminals P1 and N1 to inverter left-side control power
supply input terminals P1 and N1 using exclusive-use power cable.
J Wiring Precautions for Inverter Main Circuit Output
Connecting the Inverter and Motor
Connect output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 to motor lead wires U, V and W. Connection method is
indicated on the back of the terminal cover. Verify that the motor rotates in the forward direction (CCW:
counterclockwise when viewed from the motor load side) with the forward run command.
Strict Prohibition of Connecting Input Power Supply to Output Terminals

Do not connect power to the U/T1, V/T2, or W/T3 output terminals, or otherwise the internal inverter cir-
cuits will be damaged.
Strict Prohibition of Shorting or Grounding Output Terminals

Do not touch output terminals directly with your fingers or connect output lines to the Inverter’s case. Elec-
trical shock or a ground short may occur, creating an extremely dangerous situation. Never short the output
lines.
Strict Prohibition of Connection of Phase Advancing Capacitor or Noise Filter

Never connect a phase advancing capacitor or LC/RC noise filter to the output circuit, or otherwise the
Inverter may be destroyed or internal components damaged.
3 -22
Strict Prohibition of Installation of Magnetic Starter

Do not connect a phase advancing capacitor or LC/RC noise filter to the output circuit, or otherwise the
Inverter may be damaged or the internal parts of the Inverter may be damaged.
Dealing with Emission Noise

To reduce the emission noise from output side, wire the signal lines together in a grounded metallic con-
duit. Make the wiring distance between the power line and signal line 30 cm (11.8 inches) or longer, and
the emission noise will be reduced.
Power MCCB Metallic

Supply Conduit
VS- VS-
~
656MR5
M
626M5
30 cm (11.8 inches) or longer

Signal Line
Control Device
Fig 3.15 Dealing with Emission Noise
Wiring Distance between Inverter and Motor

The signal and power cables between the inverter and the motor must be separated and the cable extension
must be as short as possible (20 m (65.6 ft) or less). 3
J Grounding
Use the following information to ensure that the ground is sufficient.
D Make sure to ground the ground terminal ( ).
200 V class: Ground to 100Ω or less
400 V class: Ground to 10Ω or less
D Never ground the inverter or the converter in common with welding machines, motors, or other large-
current electrical equipment. Wiring for grounding cable must be separated from the large-current
electrical equipment.
D Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment. Minimize
the length of the ground wire. Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance
between the ground terminal and the ground terminal is too long, the potential on the ground terminal
of the Inverter will become unstable.
D Always ground converters, inverters and motors using a ground terminal even when equipment is
grounded through sill channel or steel plate.
D Ground each Converter and Inverter directly to the ground as shown in figure 3.16 (a). Do not make
a loop as shown in (b). Ground the Inverter and motor as shown in figure 3.17 (a). Do not ground both
the Inverter and motor as shown in (b).
Correct Incorrect
(a) Acceptable (b) Not Acceptable

Fig 3.16 Grounding
Correct Incorrect
(a) Acceptable (b) Not Acceptable

Fig 3.17 Grounding of Motor and Inverter
3 -23
Wiring
3.4.1 Control Signal Connectors and Wires
3.4 Wiring Control Circuit Signals

To reduce the influence of noise on control circuit signals, the control signal lines must be separated from power
lines and wired at the shortest distance (20 m max.). Do not wire the control signal lines together with power
lines in the same conduit or bundle them together, or otherwise the system may malfunction.
3.4.1 Control Signal Connectors and Wires

Table 3.10 outlines the relationship between control signal connectors and wires to be used in combination.
Table 3.11 outlines wires that are applicable to connectors.
Table 3.10 Control Signal Connectors
Connector Type Applica-
Con-
Connector Pin ble Max. Connector
nector Function
Nos. Wire Manufacturer
No. Inverter Side Wiring Side
Size
Control signal
51CN 34 33
connector with
(34P) 32 31 Use a
converter unit 8830E 068
8830E-068-
8822E 034 171D
8822E-034-171D special KEL Corp
Corp.
Control signal 170LD-32
3 52CN 4 3 cable.
connector with 2
(34P) 1
other drive unit
S 10136-
3000VE 36 18
1CN 0.2 Sumitomo 3M
Control signals 10236-52A2JL S ·10336-
(36P) mm2 Ltd.
Control PC 52A0-008
19 1
Board (case)
(VS 626M5)
(VS-626M5) S 10120-
3000VE 20 10
2CN Encoder signal 0.2 Sumitomo 3M
10220-52A2JL S 10320-
(20P) input mm2 Ltd.
52A0-008
11 1
(case)
S 10114-
3000VE 14 7 Use a
3CN Sumitomo 3M
Digital operator 10214-52A2JL S 10314- special
(14P) Ltd.
52A0-008 cable.
8 1
(case)
S 10150-
I/O Card 50 25
3000VE
(VS-626M5) 6CN 0.2 Sumitomo 3M
Control signals 10250-52A2JL S 10350-
(stand-alone (50P) mm2 Ltd.
52A0-008
drives only) 26 1
(case)
YENET1200
Card 3 8
4CN 5 0.25 Honda Tsushin
(VS-626M5) Control signals MR-8RMAG MR-8LFG 2 7
(8P) 1
4
6 mm2 Kogyo Co., Ltd.
(NC systems
only)
S 10120-
Load shaft 3000VE 20 10
8CN 0.2 Sumitomo 3M
encoder signal 10220-52A2JL S 10320-
Encoder (20P) mm2 Ltd.
input 52A0-008
Method 11 1
(case)
Orientation
S 10114-
Card 14 7
Load shaft 3000VE
(VS-626M5) 9CN 0.2 Sumitomo 3M
encoder signal 10214-52A2JL S 10314-
(14P) mm2 Ltd.
output 52A0-008
8 1
(case)
Magnetic S 10114-
Sensor Meth- 3000VE 14 7
10CN 0.2 Sumitomo 3M
od Orientation Control signals 10214-52A2JL S 10314-
(14P) mm2 Ltd.
Card 52A0-008
8 1
(VS-626M5) (case)
3 -24
Connector Type Applica-

Con-
Connector Pin ble Max. Connector
nector Function
Nos. Wire Manufacturer
No. Inverter Side Wiring Side
Size
34 33
Control signal 32 31 Use a
5CN 8831E-034-
connector with 8822E-034-171D special KEL Corp.
(34P) 170LD
other drive unit 4 3 cable.
Control PC 2 1
Board
(VS-656MR5) S 10114-
Communication 3000VE 14 7
1CN cable connector 10214- Sumitomo 3M
S 10314- −
(14P) (for factory test 52A2JL Ltd.
prior to shipment) 52A0-008
8 1
(case)
Note: Connectors for wires are not sold separated. Refer to 14.3.6 Connector Kit.
IMPORTANT Some of the connectors attached with control PC board and option cards are of the same type. Therefore, make
sure to mount the cards to the correct connectors each of which is identified by device symbol. If connection
is wrong, it may cause damage to the inverter.
3
Table 3.11 Applicable Connector Wires
Connector Number Cable Specification Cable External Diameter
1CN (36P) UL2464-SB Vinyl-insulated Multi-conductor 16 mm (0.63 inches) dia. max.
6CN (50P) Cable (AWG24)
2CN, 8CN (20P) Composite KQVV-SW Cable (AWG22 x 3 C + 20P: 12 mm (0.47 inches) dia. max.
AWG26 x 6P)
9CN, 10CN (14P) Yaskawa’s drawing No.: BDP8409123 (with no 14p: 8 mm (0.31 inches) dia. max.
connector)
4CN (8P) JKEV-SB (JCS) Shielded Twisted-pair Cable 11 mm (0.43 inches) dia. max.
(AWG18)
3 -25
Wiring
3.4.2 Terminal Arrangement of Control Signal Connector
3.4.2 Terminal Arrangement of Control Signal Connector

Figures 3.18 and 3.19 show the terminal arrangements of the control signal connectors.
3 -26
51CN 5CN, 52CN

34 +24VIN 33 — 34 — 33 +24VIN
32 /EXT1 31 ESP0 32 ESP0 31 /EXT1
30 /EXT2 29 ALM± 30 ALM± 29 /EXT2
28 ESP1 27 ALMC 28 ALMC 27 ESP1
26 CONFLT 25 CONRDY 26 CONRDY 25 CONFLT
24 CONRST 23 AXRUN 24 AXRUN 23 CONRST
22 +24V 21 +24V 22 +24V 21 +24V
20 +24V 19 +24V 20 +24V 19 +24V
18 +24V 17 +24V 18 +24V 17 +24V
16 +24V 15 +24V 16 +24V 15 +24V
14 0V 13 0V 14 0V 13 0V
12 0V 11 0V 12 0V 11 0V
10 0V 9 0V 10 0V 9 0V
8 0V 7 0V 8 0V 7 0V
6 *S 5 BAT+ 6 BAT+ 5 *S
4 S 3 BAT− 4 BAT− 3 S
2 0V 1 0V 2 0V 1 0V
3
1CN P
+
P
+ 6CN (for stand-alone drives)
36 MNTR2 18 0V N N
50 LM 25 0VCOM
− −
35 MNTR1 17 SS 49 0V 24 0VCOM
5CN 51CN/52CN
34 VCC 16 *PBO 48 0V 23 24VCOM
33 0VCOM 15 PBO 47 SM 22 24VCOM
32 24VCOM 14 *PAO 46 TALM 21 EXTCOM0
CHARGE CHARGE 4CN
31 EXTCOM 13 PAO 8 8
6CN 45 FLTCOM 20 EXTCOM0
30 D12 12 *PCO P1 P1
1CN 44 FLTNC 19 EXTCOM0
29 D11 11 PCO N1 N1 43 FLTNO 18 MGR
28 D10 10 BAT+ 1CN
42 COM1 17 LGR
2CN 8CN
27 D9 9 BAT− 41 FLTL 16 ORT
26 D8 8 ALMC 40 CHWE 15 PPI
25 D7 7 ALM− 3CN
39 ORE 14 CHW
24 D6 6 ALM+ 38 ORG 13 RST
23 D5 5 ESP1 9CN 10CN 37 TLE 12 SSC(SV)
22 D4 4 ESP0 36 TDET 11 TLL(INC)
21 D3 3 /EXT2 35 SDET 10 TLH
20 D2 2 /EXT1 34 AGR 9 REV
19 D1 1 +24VIN 33 ZSPD 8 FWD
32 — 7 EMG
2CN Converter Inverter 31 — 6 RDY
20 — 10 +24V 30 COM2 5 DAS
19 *PB 9 THSB 29 FC3 4 0V
18 PB 8 THSA 28 FC2 3 SCOM
17 *PA 7 SS 27 FC1 2 SS
16 PA 6 +5V 26 FC0 1 +15V
15 *PC 5 +5V
14 PC 4 +5V 4CN (for NC systems)
13 CA2 3 0V
12 CA1 2 0V 3 SH 8 SH
11 CC 1 0V 5 FG
2 S 7 S
4 R
1 *S
S 6 *S
S
Note: Terminal arrangement is as when the connectors on the PC board are viewed from the front of the unit.
Fig 3.18 Terminal Arrangement of Control Signal Connector
3 -27
Wiring
3.4.3 Control Signal Functions
8CN (Option)
20 SS 10 —
P P 19 *SPB 9 CPA
+ +
18 SPB 8 *CPC
N
N
− − 17 *SPA 7 CPC
5CN 51CN/52CN 16 SPA 6 +5V
15 *SPC 5 +5V
14 SPC 4 +5V
CHARGE CHARGE 4CN
6CN 13 *CPB 3 0V
8 8
12 CPB 2 0V
P1 P1 1CN
11 *CPA 1 0V Encoder Method Orientation
N1 N1 Card
1CN
8CN 9CN (Option)
2CN
14 — 7 *SPBO
13 — 6 SPBO
3CN
12 — 5 *SPAO
11 — 4 SPAO
9CN
CN 10CN
10 — 3 *SPCO
3 9 — 2 SPCO
8 — 1 SS
10CN (Option)
Converter Inverter 14 SIG− 7 —
13 SIG+ 6 —
3CN (Option) 12 +15V 5 0V
Magnetic
M ti S
Sensor M
Method
th d
14 — 7 +5V 11 — 4 — Orientation Card
13 — 6 OP1 10 +12V 3 0V
12 — 5 0V 9 — 2 —
11 +5V 4 RX
10 — 3 8 — 1 SS
0V
9 +5V 2 TX
8 O
OP2 1 0V
Note: Terminal arrangement is as when the connectors on the PC board are viewed from the front of the unit.
Fig 3.19 Terminal Arrangements of Control Signal Connectors (Optional)

The following table outlines the functions of the control circuit signals. Use appropriate signals according
to the purpose.
IMPORTANT The12-bit digital reference signals to 1CN-19 through 1CN-30 and the sequence input signals to 6CN-5
through 6CN-18 can be 0 V, 24 V, or external common signals. The wiring of terminals varies with the input
method. Refer to 3.4.4 Sequence Input Signal Circuits for details.
3 -28
J Control Signal Functions

Table 3.12 Control Circuit Signals (1CN to 4CN)
Connector Signal No. Function Signal Level
+24VIN 1 − −
/EXT1 2 − −
/EXT2 3 − −
ESP0 4 − −
ESP1 5 − −
ALM+ 6 − −
ALM− 7 − −
ALMC 8 − −
BAT− 9 − −
BAT+ 10 − −
PAO 13
Encoder phase A signal output
*PAO 14
RS-422A specification
1CN PBO 15
Encoder phase B signal output Line driver
*PBO 16
PCO 11 +5
5V
Encoder phase C signal output
*PCO 12
SS 17 Shield (0V) − 3
0V 18 0V −
D1 to D12 19 to 30 12-bit digital references 1 through 12
EXTCOM 31 12-bit digital signal common 24 VDC
24VCOM 32 12-bit digital signal power supply +24 V Closed current: 5 mA
0VCOM 33 12-bit digital signal power supply 0 V
VCC 34 − −
MNTR1 35 − −
MNTR2 36 − −
+5V 4, 5, 6 +5V power supply for encoder +5V
0V 1, 2, 3 Encoder power supply common Load current: 350 mA or less
PA 16
Encoder phase A signal input
*PA 17
PB 18
Encoder phase B signal input Line receiver
*PB 19
+5 V
PC 14
Encoder phase C signal input
*PC 15
2CN THSA 8
Motor thermistor signal −
THSB 9
SS 7 Shielded wire connection (0V) −
+24V power supply for winding selection
+24V 10
device
+24V
Winding selection device power supply
CC 11
common
CA1 12 +24V
Winding selection status signal
CA2 13 Load current: 10mA or less
+5 V 7, 9, 14 +5 V power supply
+5 V
0V 1, 3, 5 0V
3CN TX 2 Send data (Inverter to Operator)
−
(option) RX 4 Receive data (Operator to Inverter)
OP1 6 Not used. −
OP2 8 Not used. −
S 2 I/O signal for YENET1200 communica- RS-422A specification
*S 1 tion
Line driver/receiver
S 7 I/O signal for YENET1200 communica-
*S 6 tion +5
5V
4CN FG 5 Frame ground −
R 4 I/O signal for YENET1200 communica-
Line driver/receiver
tion (with terminating resistance)
+5 V
SH 3, 8 Shielded wire −
Note: The 4CN connector is for M5N models for NC systems.
3-29
Wiring
Table 3.13 Control Circuit Signals (6CN)

Connector Signal No. Function Signal Level Related Constants
+15V 1 +15V output +15V Load current: 10mA or less
SS 2 Shield (0V) − C1-26 10,
C1-26, 10 C1-38 bit 5
0 to ±10V
SCOM 3 Analog speed reference input C1-11, 12
(Input impedance: 50kΩ)
0V 4 Analog speed reference 0V −
Digital/analog speed reference
DAS 5 C1-36 bit 7
selection
RDY Operation ready Selected when C1-37 bit 2=0
6
EMG2 Emergency stop 2 Selected when C1-37 bit 2=1
EMG 7 Emergency stop −
FWD 8 Forward run −
REV 9 Reverse run −
Selected when C1-36 bit 2=0
TLH 10 Torque limit H
C1-26, C1-38 bit 2
TLL Torque limit L Selected when C1-36 bit 1, 0=00
11
INC Incremental Selected when C1-36 bit 1, 0=10
SSC Soft start cancel Selected when C1-36 bit 3=0
3
12
SV Servo mode 24VDC Selected when C1-36 bit 3=1
RST 13 Fault reset −
Current when closed: 5mA
CHW 14 Winding selection −
PPI 15 P control/PI control selection Selected when C1-36 bit 4=0
Selected when C1-40 bit 3=0
ORT Orientation
16 C1-39 bit 0
NCORT NC orientation Selected when C1-40 bit 3=1
LGR 17 L gear selection
C1 27 28
C1-27, 28, 29
MGR 18 M gear selection
EXT- Sequence input signal power sup-
19 to 21 −
COM0 ply common
Sequence input signal power sup-
6CN 24VCOM 22, 23 −
ply 24V
Sequence input signal power sup-
0VCOM 24, 25 −
ply 0V
FC0 26 Fault code 0
FC1 27 Fault code 1 Open-collector
p output
p
FC2 28 Fault code 2 Exclusive-use
Exclusive use for 24VDC −
FC3 29 Fault code 3 Load current: 50mA or less
COM2 30 Fault code signal common
ZSPD 33 Zero-speed C1-19
AGR 34 Speed agree C1-20, C1-38 bit 6
SDET 35 Speed detection C1-21, C1-22, C1-40 bit 2
TDET 36 Torque detection C1-23
TLE 37 Torque limit Open-collector
p output
p −
ORG 38 Load origin Exclusive-use
Exclusive use for 24VDC −
ORE 39 Orientation completion Load current: 50mA or less C2-09, 10 or C3-09, 10
CHWE 40 Winding selection completion −
FLTL 41 Fault (OFF at fault) −
TALM 46 Minor fault −
COM1 42 Sequence output signal common −
FLTNO 43 Relay contact output
Fault contact output Exclusive-use for 24VDC
FLTNC 44 Closed between 43 and 45 at fault Load current: 1A or less −
Open between 44 and 45 at fault Minimum permissible load: 10 mA
FLTCOM 45
(as reference value)
SM 47 Speedometer output 0 to +10V Load current: 2mA or less C1-16, 54
0V 48 0V for speedometer − −
LM 50 Load ratio meter output 0 to +10V Load current: 2mA or less C1-17, 54, 18, C1-40 bit 4
C1 38 bit 1,
C1-38 1 0
0V 49 0V for load ratio meter −
C1-38 bit 7
Note: The 5CN connector is for M5A models for stand-alone drive.
3-30
Table 3.14 Control Circuit Signals (8CN, 9CN, 10CN)

Connector Signal No. Function Signal Level
+5V 4, 5, 6 +5V power supply for encoder +5V
0V 1, 2, 3 Encoder power supply 0 V Load current: 350mA or less
CPA 9
−
*CPA 11
RS 422A specification
RS-422A
CPB 12
− Line receiver
*CPB 13
+5 V
CPC 7
8CN −
*CPC 8
(option)
SPA 16
Encoder phase A signal input
*SPA 17
SPB 18
Encoder phase B signal input Line receiver
*SPB 19
+5 V
SPC 14
Encoder phase C signal input
*SPC 15
SS 20 Shield (0V) −
SPAO
*SPAO
4
5
Encoder phase A signal output 3
SPBO 6
9CN Encoder phase B signal output Line driver
*SPBO 7
(option) +5 V
SPCO 2
Encoder phase C signal output
*SPCO 3
SIG+ 13 Magnetic sensor signal + −
SIG− 14 Magnetic sensor signal − −
10CN +15V 12 +15V power supply for magnetic sensor +15V Load current: 100mA or less
(option) +12V 10 +12V power supply for magnetic sensor +12V Load current: 50mA or less
0V 3, 5 Magnetic sensor power supply 0V −
Table 3.15 Control Circuit Signals (51CN, 52CN, 5CN)
Connector Signal No. (51CN) No. (52CN, 5CN) Function

0V 1, 2 1, 2 0V
BAT− 3 4
−
BAT+ 5 6
S 4 3
−
*S 6 5
0V 7 to 14 7 to 14 0V
+24V *1 15 to 22 15 to 22 +24V power supply
AXRUN 23 24 Inverter (servo) running
51CN
CONRST 24 23 Fault reset
52CN
CONRDY 25 26 Converter ready
5CN
CONFLT 26 25 Converter fault
ALM± *2 29 30
Inverter (servo) fault
ALMC *2 27 28
ESP0 *2 31 32 Inverter emergency stop
ESP1 28 27 −
/EXT2 30 29 −
/EXT1 32 31 −
+24VIN *2 34 33 +24V power supply input
* 1. The 24 V power supply is output only for M5N models for NC systems.
* 2. These signals are used only for M5N models for NC systems.
3 -31
Wiring
3.4.4 Sequence Input Signal Circuit (for Stand-alone Drive)
3.4.4 Sequence Input Signal Circuit (for Stand-alone Drive)

Design the input signals in consideration of the following conditions.
D The 12-bit digital reference signals into the Inverter’s 1CN connectors and the sequence input signals
into 6CN connectors can be 0 V, 24 V, or external common signals. The wiring of terminals varies with
the input method as shown below.
D To select the external common method, prepare a 24-V (20 to 26 V) power supply for the input signal.
D The 1CN common and 6CN common terminals are insulated. Therefore, it is possible to used the com-
mon terminals individually.
D If a relay contact is used, the minimum contact capacity must be 5 mA at 30 V.
D There will be a signal delay of approximately 5 ms due to the input filter.
0 V Common
EXTCOM
24VCOM
0VCOM
3.3kΩ
3 390Ω
+24 V Common
EXTCOM
24VCOM
0VCOM
3.3kΩ
390Ω
External Common
+24 V (or 0 V)
EXTCOM
24VCOM
0VCOM
3.3kΩ
390Ω
0 V (or +24 V)
Pin Number
Signal Name
1CN 6CN
EXTCOM 31 19, 20, 21
24VCOM 32 22, 23
0VCOM 33 24, 25
Fig 3.20 Input Method Selections
3 -32
3.4.5 Sequence Output Signal Circuit (for Stand-alone Drive)

Design the output signals in consideration of the following conditions.
D The output method allows either a +24 V or 0 V common.

D Signal outputs are insulated with photocouplers. Prepare a +24 V power supply for the output signal.
D The output current capacity is 50 mA at 24 V.
D To turn ON and OFF an inductive load, such as an external relay, connect a surge absorber in parallel
with the load. The maximum permissible voltage of the output circuit is 26 V. Do not impose a voltage
exceeding the maximum permissible voltage, or otherwise the photocoupler of the output circuit may
be damaged.
D If the load is capacitive, connect a protective resistor to the load in series to restrict the current, or other-
wise an excessive current will flow when the photocoupler is driven, and as a result, the photocoupler
may be damaged.
D The following diagram is a sequence output signal circuit.
Fig 3.21 Output Interface Circuit
3.4.6 Precautions for Control Signal Wiring

For proper wiring between devices, pay attention to the following points in the design stage.
D Design the wiring for control signal lines (1, 2, 4CN) in such a way that they will be separated form
the main circuit wiring (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) or other power lines.
IMPORTANT If the power lines are provided along with the signal lines (motor encoder signal lines), a malfunction may
be caused by the affect of noise generated from the power lines.
D The length of the control signal lines (including motor encoder signal lines) must be less than 20 m
(65.6 ft).
IMPORTANT Excessively long motor encoder signal lines reduce the encoder power supply voltage because of voltage drop
in the signal lines which may cause the inverter to malfunction.
D When shielded twisted-pair cables are used for control signal lines, terminate them as shown below.
Shielded Sheath Armor
To inverter shielded
sheath terminal Never connect.
Insulate these parts
with insulating tape.
Fig 3.22 Shielded Cable Termination
3 -33
Wiring
3.4.6 Precautions for Control Signal Wiring
D Use twisted shielded wires for motor encoder signal lines and connect both ends as shown below.
Shielded Sheath Armor
To encoder shielded
To inverter shielded sheath terminal
sheath terminal
Insulate these parts

with insulating tape.
Fig 3.23 Shielded Wire Termination (Shielded at Both Ends)
3 -34
3.5 Wiring Inspection
3.5 Wiring Inspection

After completing installation and wiring, check for the following items. Never do a control circuit buzzer
check.
D Confirm that the capacities and models of the Motor, Inverter, and Converter and the specifications
of the machine are compatible. Check the nameplates on the Motor, Inverter, and Converter.
D Confirm that all devices are wired according to the connection diagram with no mistakes.
D Confirm that the following screws, bolts, and connectors are securely tightened or connected.
The main circuit screw terminals of the Motor, Inverter, and Converter.
The screw terminals of the motor fan power supply and the electromagnetic contactor for winding
selection.
The mounting bolts of the Motor, Inverter, and Converter.
D Confirm that the Motor, Inverter, and Converter are all securely grounded.
D Confirm that the following signal connectors are connected securely.
The signal connectors of the Inverter, Converter, motor encoder, and magnetic sensor.
D Confirm that the conductive parts are free of any scraps of wire or metal fragments.
D Confirm that the ambient conditions of the Motor and machinery are ready for the operation of the sys-
tem.
Confirm that there are no obstacles around rotating parts.
Confirm that the emergency stop and collision prevention functions operate normally.
3
3 -35
4
Control Signals
This chapter provides detailed information on each control signal.
4.1 Sequence Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -2 4

4.1.1 Connecting Sequence Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -2
4.1.2 Selecting Sequence Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -2
4.1.3 Status Display of Sequence Input Signals . . . . . . . 4 -3
4.1.4 Details on Sequence Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -3
4.2 Analog Speed Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -9

4.3 Using a 12-bit Digital Speed Reference . . . 4 -10
4.4 Sequence Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -12
4.4.1 Connecting Sequence Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . 4 -12
4.4.2 Setting Sequence Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -12
4.4.3 Status Display of Sequence Output Signals . . . . . 4 -12
4.4.4 Details on Sequence Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -13
4.5 Analog Monitor Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -18

4.6 Encoder Pulse Input Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -19
4.7 Encoder Pulse Output Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -20
4 -1
Control Signals
4.1.1 Connecting Sequence Input Signals
4.1 Sequence Input Signals

This section provides information on the connections, functions, displays, and meaning of the sequence input
signals.
4.1.1 Connecting Sequence Input Signals

The connections of sequence input signals vary between stand-alone drives and NC systems as described
below.
J M5A for Stand-alone Drives

Connect sequence input signals to the 6CN connector of the I/O card.
The sequence input signals can be input to the 6CN connector as 0 V, 24 V, or external common input sig-
nals. Refer to 3.4.4 Sequence Input Signal Circuits for details.
J M5N for NC Systems

The Inverter performs serial transmission of sequence input signals with NC machines over YENET1200
communications. Refer to the manual for the NC machine for sequence input signals and input addresses.
4.1.2 Selecting Sequence Input Signals
Some functions of sequence input signals are selected by settings constants. Set the constants as shown
in the following table for the desired functions.
4 Table 4.1 Sequence Input Signals
No. 6CN Signal Function Related Constants
Pin No.
1 5 DAS* Speed reference digital/analog selection −
2 6 RDY Operation ready RDY selected at C1-37 bit 2
= 0.
EMG2 Emergency stop 2 EMG2 selected at C1-37 bit
2 = 1.
3 7 EMG Emergency stop −
4 8 FWD Forward run −
5 9 REV Reverse run −
6 10 TLH Torque limit H TLH selected at C1-36 bit 2
= 0.
7 11 TLL Torque limit L TLL selected at C1-36 bit 1,
0 = 00.
INC Incremental INC selected at C1-36 bit 1,
0 = 10.
8 12 SSC Soft start cancel SSC selected at C1-36 bit 3
= 0.
SV Servo mode SV selected at C1-36 bit 3 =
1.
9 13 RST* Error reset −
10 14 CHW Winding selection −
11 15 PPI P control/PI control selection PPI selected at C1-36 bit 4 =
0.
LM10* Load factor meter 10x selection signal LM10 selected at C1-36 bit
4=1
12 16 ORT Orientation −
13 17 LGR L gear selection −
14 18 MGR M gear selection −
* The M5N for NC systems does not use the RST signal.
4 -2
4.1.3 Status Display of Sequence Input Signals

The ON/OFF status of input signals can be checked with the U10-09 and U1-19 operating status displays.
As explained below, the LED indicators of the Digital Operator show the status of each signal. Refer to
Chapter 5. Operating the Digital Operator for details.
U1-09 RDY EMG FWD REV THL

Input signal TLL SSC RST CHW PPI
status
ORT LGR MGR DAS CHWA
U1-19 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5
12-bit digital
D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
reference
signal status D11 D12
Notes: 1. The LED lights to indicate that the corresponding input signal is ON.
2. CHWA indicates the status of the auxiliary bits (2CN-12 and 2CN-13) of the electromag-
netic contractor for winding selection.
Fig 4.1 Display of Input Signal Status
4.1.4 Details on Sequence Input Signals

This section provides information on each signal of sequence input. The description is for a stand-alone
drive (M5A). Refer to the manual for the NC system (M5N) for sequence input signals and I/O addresses.
J RDY (Operation Ready Signal)

4
RDY Function Selection: 6CN-6 will be the RDY signal if bit 2 of the C1-37 selection signals (SEL2)
is turned OFF.
C1−37
Bit 2
The RDY signal functions when 6CN-6 turns ON.
D When the RDY signal us turned OFF during operation, the gate will be blocked instantly and the motor
current will be shut off.
D While the RDY signal is OFF, the motor will not start unless the FWD and REV signals are turned OFF
together.
D Always keep the RDY signal ON if the it is not being used. If a 0 V common or 24 V common input
is selected, connect pin 6 to pin 20. If the external common input is selected, turn the RDY signal ON
externally.
J EMG2 (Emergency Stop Signal 2)
EMG2 Function Selection: 6CN-6 will be the EMG2 signal if bit 2 of the C1-37 selection signals (SEL2)
is turned ON.
C1−37
Bit 2
The EMG2 signal functions when 6CN-6 turns OFF.
D The function of EMG2 is the same as the function of EMG (emergency stop signal). Refer to the de-
scription of EMG for details.
D If EMG2 is used, there will be two emergency stop signals, EMG and EMG2.
D The emergency stop operation will be performed if either EMG or EMG2 turns OFF.
D To enable operation after clearing the emergency stop operation, turn ON both EMG and EMG2.
J FWD/REV (Forward Signal and Reverse Signal)

The FWD signal will function when 6CN-8 turns ON.
The REV signal will function when 6CN-9 turns ON.
D When the FWD signal is turned ON while the RDY and EMG signals are ON and the speed reference
is at a positive voltage, the motor will turn counterclockwise (motor viewed from the shaft end). When
the REV signal is turned ON, the motor will turn clockwise.
The rotation of the motor will be determined by the speed reference and operation signal in combina-
tion, as shown below.
4 -3
Control Signals
Speed Reference + −
Operation signals [FWD] CCW (Forward) CW (Reverse)
[REV] CW (Reverse) CCW (Forward)
D When the FWD or REV signal is turned OFF while the motor is in operation, the motor will stop due
to regenerative braking. When the motor speed reaches zero, the gate will be blocked and the motor
D The acceleration and deceleration time between a stopped state and 100% rotation (C1-26) can be set
with C1-10, the soft start time constant (TSFS) between 0.1 and 180.0 s. The acceleration and decelera-
tion time may be, however, longer than the soft start set time due to the load inertial moment.
D Turn ON the FWD or REV signal at least 15 ms after the EMG and RDY signals are turned ON. The
FWD or REV signal will be unacceptable if it is turned ON before the EMG and RDY signals are turned
ON.
[EMG] ON
[RDY] ON
[FWD] or [REV] ON
15 ms min.
The motor will stop if the FWD and REV signals are turned ON simultaneously by mistake. Be aware
4
D
that the motor will start operating immediately after either of the signals is turned OFF.
D When the FWD or REV signal is turned ON, the motor will rotate according to the speed reference.
Set the speed reference in advance.
Speed reference
[FWD] or [REV] ON
D If a fault occurs while the motor is in operation, the gate will be blocked immediately and the motor
D Keep the FWD and REV signals turned OFF when the motor is ON. The motor will not operate while
the FWD and REV signals are ON.
J EMG (Emergency Stop Signal)
The EMG signal functions when 6CN-7 turns OFF.
D The main circuit capacitor will be charged after the EMG signal is turned ON. The motor will be ready
to operate a maximum of 2.5 s after the EMG signal is turned ON. Do not attempt to charge the capaci-
tor repeatedly within a short period of time, or otherwise the charging circuit will deteriorate quickly.
Allow a sufficient interval to charge the capacitor again.
D When the EMG signal is turned OFF, the motor will stop promptly due to regenerating braking and
the current will be shut off. If the motor does not stop, the current will be shut off automatically 10 s
after the EMG signal is turned OFF. At that time, the protective function will operate and “AL-21”
(emergency stop failure) will be displayed.
D C1-10 (soft start time setting) will be disabled when an emergency stop failure occurs.
D If the EMG signal is turned OFF, the motor will not operate when the EMG signal turns ON again un-
less the FWD, REV, and ORT signals are turned OFF.
D While the motor is decelerated in emergency stop operation, the motor will coast to a stop with no re-
generation breaking if the magnetic contactor on the Converter input shuts off the main circuit power
supply. At that time, the main circuit low-voltage protective function will operate and a fault will be
indicated.
D To prevent the motor from coasting to a stop when shutting off the main circuit power supply in emer-
gency stop operation, use the OFF-delay circuit to delay the timing of shutting off the main circuit pow-
er supply.
D Always turn ON the EMG signal if it is not used. If the 0 V common or 24 V common input method
is selected, connect 6CN-7 to 6CN-19. If the external common input method is selected, always turn
the EMG signal ON externally.
4 -4
J TLH/TLL (Torque Control Signal H/L)

The TLH signal functions when 6CN-10 turns ON.
The TLL signal functions when 6CN-11 turns ON.
D The TLH and TLL signals are used to temporarily control the torque of the motor in operation.
D When the TLH or TLL signal is turned ON, the torque will be controlled and the TLE torque control
signal will be output.
D The torque control level with the TLH signal input will be set between 5% and 120% of the 30-minute
rating in C1-24 (TLEXT), the external control torque limit level constant.
D The TLL operation level will be 1/2 of the TLH operation level.
D The TLL signal will take precedence over the TLH signal if both TLH and TLL signals are turned ON
simultaneously.
120%
Torque control level
0%
TLH or TLL ON
D The TLL control function will be enabled while the emergency stop is operating.
D When the TLH or TLL signal is not used, turn 6CN-10 and 6CN-11 OFF.
J INC (Incremental Signal)
INC Function Selection: 6CN-11 will be the INC signal if bit 0 of the C1-36 selection signals (SEL1) is
turned OFF and bit 1 is turned ON.
4
C1−36
Bit 10
The INC signal functions when 6CN-11 turns ON.
D Used for incremental operation under orientation control.
D The INC signal will be enabled if it is input earlier than or simultaneously with the ORT signal.
D If the INC signal is input when the system is turned ON or during absolute positioning, an INC signal
fault (AL-65 or AL-75) will result.
D The INC signal will start incremental operation from the stop position when the ORG signal input turns
ON. If positional precision of the system is required, execute absolute positioning first.
J SSC (Soft Start Cancel Signal)
SSC Function Selection: 6CN-12 will be the SSC signal if bit 03 of the C1-36 selection signals (SEL1)
is turned OFF.
C1−36
Bit 3
The SSC signal functions when 6CN-12 turns ON.
D The SSC signal cancels the soft start function (C1-10) so that the speed standard will catch up with
the speed reference for inching.
D When the SSC signal is turned ON, the motor will be accelerated or decelerated within the shortest
period in current-limited acceleration or deceleration regardless of the acceleration or deceleration
time set in the C1-10 constant.
D Turn pin 12 OFF when SSC is not being used.
4 -5
Control Signals
J SV (Servo Mode Signal)

SV Function Selection: 6CN-12 will be the SV signal if bit 03 of the C1-36 selection signals (SEL1)
is turned ON.
C1−36
Bit 3
The servo mode for a solid tap or similar device will be switched to when 6CN-12 turns ON.
D In the servo mode, the speed loop gain and other control constants for servo mode will be used.
D The following control constants will be enabled in servo mode.
Speed control proportional gain (C1-05 and C1-07)
Speed control integral time constant (C1-06 and C1-08)
Servo mode magnetic flux level (C1-31 and C1-33)
Servo mode base speed ratio (C1-32 and C1-34)
J PPI (P/PI Control Selection Signal)
PPI Function Selection: 6CN-15 will be the PPI signal if bit 04 of the C1-36 selection signals (SEL1)
is turned OFF.
C1−36
Bit 4
P control functions when 6CN-15 turns ON.
PI control functions when 6CN-15 turns OFF.
D The PPI signal is used to select the P or PI control of the speed controller.
4 D When the PPI signal is turned ON, the speed controller will be in P control regardless of the operating
status of the system.
D Turn pin 15 OFF when P control is not to be performed.
J LM10 (Load Factor Meter ×10 Selection Signal)
LM10 Function Selection: 6CN-15 will be the LM10 signal if bit 04 of the C1-36 selection signals
(SEL1) is turned ON.
C1−36
Bit 4
The LM10 signal functions when 6CN-15 turns ON.
(Not used for NC system (M5N). )
D The LM10 signal is used to improve the signal-noise ratio of the system with light loads by increasing
the sensitivity of the load factor meter by 10 times.
J DAS (Speed Reference Digital/Analog Selection Signal)
Analog input will be selected when 6CN-5 is turned OFF.
Digital input will be selected when 6CN-5 is turned ON.
D The DAS signal is used to select an analog input (10 V/100%) or digital input for the speed reference.
D The analog speed reference is selected when the DAS signal is turned OFF, and the digital speed refer-
ence is selected when the DAS signal is turned ON.
D The DAS signal can be turned ON or OFF only when the system is not operating.
D The following four types of digital speed reference can be selected.
12-bit binary (factory setting)
3-digit BCD
2-digit BCD
Internal speed setting
D The digital speed reference is selected with bits 7 and 6 of selection signal C1-37.
Refer to 4.3 Using a 12-bit Digital Speed Reference.
J RST (Fault Reset Signal)
The RST signal functions when 6CN-13 turns OFF.
D The RST signal is used to reset the system after the protective circuit operates for overcurrent or over-
load protection and the probable cause is eliminated.
4 -6
D The RST signal is enabled only after the protective circuit operates.
D The system cannot be reset while the FWD , REV, or ORT signal is ON.
D The RESET switch of the Digital Operator has the same function as the RST signal.
D The system is reset on the rising edge of the RST signal. Therefore, turn the RST signal ON and then
OFF.
D Faults take precedence in the sequence of the protective circuit. The following timing chart is an exam-
ple of resetting.
Overload protection (OL)
[FWD] ON
[RST] ON ON ON
RUN
Fault indication AL-05
Fault signal
Protective circuit Reset
in operation
J CHW (Winding Selection Signal)
Low speed winding will be selected when 6CN-14 is turned ON.
High speed winding will be selected when 6CN-14 is turned OFF.
The CHW signal is a reference signal for motor winding selection control.
4
D
D The high-speed winding will be selected when the CHW signal is turned OFF. The low-speed winding
will be selected when the CHW signal is turned ON.
D Winding selection is possible while the system is in operation.
D When the CHW signal is turned ON for winding selection, the gate will be blocked until the actual
winding is switched over. If this status continues for the preset time, a winding selection fault (AL-20)
will result and the system will stop.
ON ON ON
[CHW]
High speed Low speed
Winding
Gate blocked (current interrupted)
D If the winding does not coincide with the CHW reference when the system is turned ON, the winding
will be switched so that is coincides with the reference.
J ORT (Orientation Signal)
The ORT signal functions when 6CN-16 turns ON.
D The ORT signal is a reference signal for electrical orientation.
D When the ORT signal is turned ON, the load shaft will be promptly moved to the preset position.
D Turn the ORT signal OFF after completing tool or workpiece replacement for positioning.
D The system will not restart unless the ORT signal is turned OFF if an emergency stop is performed
during orientation.
D Keep the ORT signal OFF when the system is turned ON, or otherwise the system will not operate.
D Turn ON the ORT signal at least 15 ms after the EMG or RDY signal is turned ON. The ORT signal
will not be accepted if it is turned ON before the EMG or RDY signal is turned ON.
[EMG] ON
[RDY] ON
[ORT] ON
15 ms min.
D Use the motor encoder signal for positioning if the optional orientation card is not used.
D Turn 6CN-16 OFF if the ORT signal is not used.
4 -7
Control Signals
J MGR/LGR (M Gear/L Gear Selection Signal)

The MGR signal will be selected when 6CN-18 is turned ON.
The LGR signal will be selected when 6CN-17 is turned ON.
D The MGR and LGR signals are used to change parameters, such as the gear ratio and gain, to ensure
the optimum control of the load according to the gear selection of the load shaft.
D Use the gear selection signals as shown below.
MGR LGR Description
OFF OFF H gear selected
ON --- M gear selected
OFF ON L gear selected
4 -8
4.2 Analog Speed Reference
4.2 Analog Speed Reference

This section proves detailed information on the analog speed reference signal for stand-alone drives M5A.
J SCOM (Analog Speed Reference Input)

Connector number: 6CN
Pin number: 3
D The rated input voltage is ±10 VDC. Set the motor speed at the rated input voltage (i.e., a 100% speed
reference) in C1-26 (S100), the rated speed setting constant.
D If the motor speed at the rated input voltage does not reach the maximum speed, adjust the motor speed
in C1-12 (SADJ), the motor speed adjustment constant.
D The maximum permissible input voltage is ±12 VDC. The voltage is, however, limited to a maximum
of 105% or 110% reference in the Controller. Therefore, the speed of the motor will reach 105% or
110% of the rated speed. The speed limit level is selected with bit 5 of selection signal C1-38 (SEL3).
The level is set to 105% when bit 5 is turned OFF and 110% when bit 5 is turned ON.
D The SCOM signal has an input impedance of 50 kΩ.
D The speed together with the rotating direction is determined by the SCOM signal and operation signal
as shown below.
105% Rated speed Forward 105%

[REV] [FWD]
−10.5V 10.5 V
−12 V 0 12 V
[SCOM]
4
[FWD] [REV]
105% Reverse 105%
Speed Reference + −
Operation signal [FWD] CCW (Forward) CW (Reverse)
[REV] CW (Reverse) CCW (Forward)
D The SCOM signal will be enabled and the motor will rotate when the FWD or REV signal is turned
ON.
D The motor may not come to a stop with the SCOM signal set to 0 V while the FWD or REV signal is
being input. To stop the motor, turn OFF both the FWD and REV signals. The motor current will flow
while the FWD or REV signal is ON.
D Use a shielded cable to wire the SCROM signal to improve noise immunity.
D The SCOM signal can be manually set to the reference voltage (+15 V) of the Controller provided that
the current flow is 10 mA or less.
VS−626M5
6CN
1 +15 V
Setting resistor 3
2 3 [SCOM]
2 kΩ
1 W min. 1 4
0V
4 -9
Control Signals
4.3 Using a 12-bit Digital Speed Reference

This section provides information on using a 12-bit digital speed reference input (for stand-alone drive systems
M5A only).
J D1 through D12 (12-bit Digital References 1 through 12)

Pin numbers: 19 through 30
12-bit Digital Reference Signal Function Selection: 1CN-19 to 1CN-30 will be the 12-bit Digital Refer-
ence if bit 07 of the C1-36 selection signals (SEL1) is turned OFF.
C1−36
Bit 7
D Bit 7 is used for internal speed or digital speed settings.
D It is possible to select 12-bit binary, 2-digit BCD, 3-digit BCD, or internal speed setting for digital
speed references. Speed references are factory-set to 12-bit binary.
D The setting method can be selected using bits 6 and 7 of selection signal C1-37 (SEL2).
C1−37
Bit 76
Selecting the Speed Setting
4
D
6CN-5, 19 C1-37 (SEL2) Speed Selection
DAS Bit 7 Bit 6
OFF --- --- Analog speed
ON OFF OFF 2-digit BCD
OFF ON Binary
ON OFF 3-digit BCD
ON ON Internal speed
D The DAS signal can be switched only when the system is not in operation.
D If the binary, BCD, or internal speed setting method is selected, the forward or reverse rotation of the
motor is selected with the external FWD or REV relay signal.
Internal Speed Setting

Number of speed settings: 8
Speed set value: Input into C1-41 through C1-48 the percentages based on the rated speed set for C1-26
(S100). Set range: 0.00 to 100.00
Control Constant Signal Name 1CN Input Pin Number
C1-41 SPD1 Internal speed setting 1 D1 19
D If two or more speed selection signals (D1 through D8) are turned ON at the same time, the smaller
selection signal number will be enabled. (For example, if D2 and D5 are turned ON simultaneously,
D2 will be enabled.)
D If all speed selection signals are OFF, the speed references are treated as 0.
D No speed reference values in C1-41 through C1-48 can be changed while the system is in operation.
4 -10
4.3 Using a 12-bit Digital Speed Reference
Digital Speed Settings

Signal 1CN Pin Number 12-bit Binary 3-digit BCD 2-digit BCD
D1 19 1 1 ---
D2 20 2 2 ---
D3 21 4 4 ---
D4 22 8 8 ---
D5 23 16 10 1
D6 24 32 20 2
D7 25 64 40 4
D8 26 128 80 8
D9 27 256 100 10
D10 28 512 200 20
D11 29 1024 400 40
D12 30 2048 800 80
D All signals will be ON with the rated speed reference set in C1-26 if the 12-bit binary setting is selected.
D If the 3- or 2-digit BCD setting is selected, a rated speed reference of 999 or 99 will be set in C1-26
respectively.
The input signal circuit for digital speed references is the same as the sequence input signal circuit explained
in 3.4.4 Sequence Input Signal Circuit (for Stand-alone Drive).
4
4 -11
Control Signals
4.4.1 Connecting Sequence Output Signals
4.4 Sequence Output Signals

This section provides information on the connections, functions, displays, and meanings of the sequence output
signals.
4.4.1 Connecting Sequence Output Signals

The connection of sequence output signals varies between stand-alone drives and NC systems as described
below.
J M5A for Independent Drives

Connect sequence output signals to the 6CN connector of the I/O card. Refer to 3.4.5 Sequence Output
Signal Circuits for details.
J M5N for NC Systems

The Inverter performs serial transmission of sequence output signals with NC machines over YENET1200
communications. Refer to the manual of the NC machine for sequence output signals and output addresses.
4.4.2 Setting Sequence Output Signals
Level changes in the following sequence output signals are possible with constant settings. For details,
refer to 4.4.4 Details on Sequence Output Signals.
Table 4.2 Constants of Sequence Output Signals

4 6CN
Signal
No. Pin Function Related Constants
(M5)
No.
1 33 ZSPD Zero-speed C1-19 (Zero-speed detection level)
C1-20 (Speed agree detection width)
2 34 AGR Speed agree
C1-38 Bit 6 (AGR output condition selection)
C1-21 (Speed detection signal level)
3 35 SDET Speed detection
C1-22 (Speed detection signal detection width)
C1-23 (Torque detection signal operation level
4 36 TDET Torque detection
C1-40 Bit 2 (TDET output method selection)
5 37 TLE Torque limit −
6 38 ORG Load shaft origin −
Orientation C2-09 or C3-09 (Positioning completion detection width)
7 39 ORE
completion C2-10 or C3-10 (Positioning completion cancel width)
Winding selection
8 40 CHWE −
completion
9 43, 44 FLT Fault signal −

10 46 TALM Minor fault signal −
4.4.3 Status Display of Sequence Output Signals

The ON/OFF status of output signals can be checked with the U1-10 operation status display. The LED
indicators on the Digital Operator will light as shown below to indicate signal status. Refer to Section 5
Operating the Digital Operator for operating procedures.
UI-10 ZSPD AGR SDET TDET TLE

Output signal ORG ORE CHWE FLT TALM
status
FC0 FC1 FC2 FC3 FLTL
Note: The LED indicator lights to indicate that the corresponding input signal is ON.
Fig 4.2 Display of Output Signal Status
4-12
4.4.4 Details on Sequence Output Signals

This section provides information on each of sequence output signal. Pin numbers are given for indepen-
dent drive operation (M5A). Refer to the manual for the NC machine for sequence output signals and out-
put addresses.
J ZSPD (Zero-speed Signal)

Pin numbers:
33
42
D The ZPSD signal will turn ON when the motor speed drops to the set speed or less. Once the ZPSD
signal turns ON, it will be kept on hold for 50 ms.
[ZSPD] ON
6000 min−1 Reverse Forward 6000 min−1
Zero-speed detection level (C1-19)

D The C1-19 (ZSLVL) can be set to a zero-speed detection level between 3 and 60 min−1.
D The ZSPD signal is output regardless of the status of the FWD or REV output. Therefore, the ZSPD
signal can be used as an interlock signal for hazard prevention.
4
J AGR (Speed Agree Signal)
Pin numbers:
34
42
D The AGR signal will turn ON when the motor speed reaches the range set by the SCOM signal. The
AGR signal will not, however, turn ON while the gate is blocked or the motor winding is selected.
D Once the AGR signal turns ON, it will be kept on hold for 50 ms.
D The AGR signal can be used in response to the S reference for NC machines in program operation to
go to the next step.
D The C1-20 (AGRBD) can be set to a speed agree signal detection width between ±10% and ±50%.
Operation Example of Speed Agree Signal
Speed reference vs. motor speed
C1−20 = 15%
15%
AGR is OFF
4% AGR is ON
0
25% 100% speed reference
4 -13
Control Signals
J SDET (Speed Detection Signal)

Pin numbers:
35
42
D The SDET signal will turn ON when the motor speed reaches the preset value or less.
D The speed detection level is set between 0% and 100% in the C1-21 (SDLVL) control constant.
Speed
Detection Time
level
(C1−21)
ON OFF ON
D Set the hysteresis width of the SDET signal in the C1-22 (SDHYS) control constant.
D The SDET operates regardless of the operation signal.
J TDET (Torque Detection Signal)
4 Connector number: 6CN
Pin numbers:
36
42
D The TDET signal will turn ON when the torque reference reaches the preset value or less.
D Once TDET turns OFF, the status is held for 50 ms.
D The torque detection level is set between 5% and 120% of the 30-minute rating for the C1-23 (TDLVL)
time constant. There is an hysteresis of ±10% of the set value for the operation point.
D Bit 2 of selection signals C1-40 (SEL5) can be turned ON to prevent TDET from turning OFF even
if the torque references exceeds the set value during acceleration and deceleration.
D The TDET signal can be used to check the operation of the torque limit or load.
J TLE (Torque Control Signal)
Pin numbers:
37
42
D The TLE signal turns ON when the TLL or TLH torque control signal turns ON.
D The TLE signal can be used to check the TLL or TLH signal.
4-14
J CHWE (Winding Selection Completion Signal)

Pin numbers:
40
42
D CHWE signals completion of motor winding selection.

D The CHWE signal is usually ON when the motor is in operation. When the CHW signal is ON, the
CHWE signal will turn OFF until the winding is switched. The CHWE signal will turn ON again on
completion of the winding selection.
D If the CHWE signal is not output within a preset time after the CHW signal is input, the AL-20 fault
(winding selection fault) will result and the system will stop the motor.
D While the winding is selected, the AGR signal will turn OFF if the winding selection is implemented
while the motor is rotating at constant speed.
ON
[CHW]
High speed Low speed
Winding
ON ON
[CHWE]
ON ON
4
[AGR]
J ORE (Orientation Completion Signal)

Pin number:
39
42
D The ORE signal will turn ON when the ORT signal input turns ON and when the load shaft is close
to the specified stop position.
D While the ORE signal is ON, the deviation of the position will be compensated with countertorque is
generated to offset external force. Make tool or workpiece changes while the ORE signal is ON.
D The ORE signal will turn OFF if the external force is high and the deviation of the position is excessive.
In that case, arrange a sequence to result an orientation fault.
J ORG (Load Shaft Origin) Signal
Pin numbers:
38
42
D A single pulse is output per load shaft rotation by using the magnetic sensor signal.
D The ORG signal will turn ON when the load shaft is rotating at the rate of 1000 min−1 or less.
4 -15
Control Signals
J FLT (Fault Bit Signal)

Pin numbers:
43
44
45
D The motor current will be shut off instantly when the protective circuit operates for overcurrent or over-
load protection and the motor will coast to a stop. The FLT signal will be output when the current is
shut off.
D The FLT relay is of SPDT contact construction and operates together with the protective circuit.
D Turn OFF the FWD, REV or ORT signal while the FLT signal is output and then display the fault at
the host system.
D The fault number is displayed when the FLTL is output. Refer to the fault number.
D For the relationship between the FLT and RST signals, refer to the RST signal in 4.1.4 Details on Se-
quence Input Signals.
J FC0 to FC3 (Fault Code Signals 0 to 3)
Pin numbers:
26
4
27
28
29
30
D A fault code signal is output to provide the details of the operation of the protective function.
D Refer to tables 12.1 and 12.2 for the details of fault codes.
4 -16
J TALM (Minor Fault Signal)

Pin numbers:
46
30
D The TALM signal turns ON when a motor overheat alarm 1, heatsink overheat alarm 1, or control card
temperature alarm 1 is detected. The system will continue operating.
D The FLTL signal will turn ON if any of the following conditions continues while the TALM signal is
ON, the current will be shut off, and the system will stop.
Motor overheat alarm 1 continues one minute (AL-40 will change to AL-41)
Heatsink overheat alarm continues one minute (AL-43 will change to AL-44)
Control card temperature exceeds 85°C (185°F) (AL-46 will change to AL-47)
The TALM signal will be output if there is a minor fault in an optional function, such as an orientation
fault.
J FLTL (Fault Signal)
Pin numbers:
41
4
30
D The FLTL signal will turn OFF if a fault occurs. The FLTL signal is ON while the system is in normal
operation.
D The output conditions for the FLTL signal are the same as those for the FLT signal.
D The motor current will be shut off instantly when the protective circuit operates for overcurrent or over-
load protection and the motor will coast to a stop. The FLTL signal will be output when the current
is shut off.
D Turn OFF the FWD, REV and ORT signal OFF while the FLT signal is being output, and then display
the fault at the host system.
D The fault number is displayed when the FLTL is output. Refer to the fault number.
D For the relationship between the FLT and RST signals, refer to the RST signal in 4.1.4 Details on Se-
quence Input Signals.
4 -17
Control Signals
4.5 Analog Monitor Signals

The following conditions and specifications apply to analog output signals (for stand-alone drive systems M5A
only).
J SM (Speed Meter Signal)

Pin number: 47
D The motor speed can be monitored with an external speed meter connected.
D The SM signal is a DC voltage signal that is output in proportion to the speed regardless of the direction
of rotation.
D Use a voltmeter as the speed meter with the following specifications.
Item Specification
Item Voltmeter
Operation principle Moving coil
Rating 10 V full scale
Internal resistance 10 kΩ
Grade 2.5 or over
D The rated SM signal output (10 V) will turn ON when the motor is rotating at the speed set in C1-26
(S100), the rated speed set constant.
4 D The SM signal level can be adjusted with C1-16 (SMADJ), the control constant.
D The C1-16 (SMADJ) control constant is for speed adjustment. The actual motor speed will not be af-
fected by changing the set value of C1-16.
D The SM signal precision is less than 3% of the rated value when the motor is in reverse operation.
J LM (Load Rate Signal)
Pin number: 50
D The load rate signal indicates the load rate based on the rated output.
D The meter used must have the same specifications as the one for the speed meter.
D The load rate signal level can be adjusted with C1-17 (LMADJ) for control and C1-18 (LMFS) for full-
scale setting.
INFO Use 6CN pin 48 and 6CN pin 49 for the 0 V on the meter.
4 -18
4.6 Encoder Pulse Input Circuit
4.6 Encoder Pulse Input Circuit

Phase A, B, and C (origin) signals [PA, *PA, PB, *PB, PC, *PC] are input into the 2CN connector from the 1024
P/R motor encoder.
An asterisk indicates a reversed signal. The input signals have the following specifications.
J Signal Configuration
90° phase-difference, two-phase pulse (A and B), and marker pulse (C)
J Input Circuit Configuration

The input circuit is a line receiver with RS-422-A specifications.
2CN
Inverter Encoder
+5 V 4, 5, 6
(300 mA max) +5 V
1, 2, 3
0 V 16 PA
Phase A C R P Phase A
17 *PA
18 PB
4
Phase B C R P Phase B
19 *PB
14 PC
Phase C C R P Phase C
15 *PC
Output line driver
Line receiver 7 equivalent to
equivalent to
SN75174
SN75175 SS
P indicates shielded
twisted-pair wires.
Fig 4.3 Encoder Pulse Input Circuit
J Input Phase
Phase A Phase A
(PA) (PA)
90° 90°
Phase B Phase B
(PB) (PB)
Phase C Phase C
(PC) (PC)
(a) Forward (b) Reverse
Fig 4.4 Input Phase
4 -19
Control Signals
4.7 Encoder Pulse Output Circuit

Phase A, B, and C (origin) signals are output from the motor encoder.
An asterisk indicates a reversed signal.
The output signals have the following specifications and can be used for position feedback.
J Signal Configuration
90° phase-difference, two-phase pulse (A and B), and marker pulse (C)
J Output Circuit Configuration
The output circuit is a line receiver with RS-422A specifications. Use a line receiver with specifications
matching the RS-422A specifications for signal exchange as shown in the following connection example.
1 CN
Inverter Receiver circuit (prepared by user)
13 PAO
Phase A P RT CT Phase A
14 *PAO
15 PBO
Phase B P RT CT Phase B
4 16 *PBO
11 PCO
Phase C P RT CT Phase C
12 *PCO
RT: 51 to 200Ω
17 CT: 47 to 200PF
Output line driver
SN75174 Use a line receiver matching
EIA RS-422A standards,
such as the SN75175.
P
indicates shielded twisted-pair wires.
Fig 4.5 Encoder Pulse Output Circuit
J Output Phase
Phase A Phase A
(PAO) (PAO)
90° 90°
Phase B Phase B
(PBO) (PBO)
Phase C Phase C
(PCO) (PCO)
(a) Forward (b) Reverse
Fig 4.6 Output Phase
4 -20
5
Operating the Digital Operator
This chapter explains the functions, operating methods, details on control

constants for the Digital Operator.
5.1 Function of the Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . 5 -2

5.2 Display Mode Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5
5.3 Key Operations and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -6 5
5.3.1 Indication at Power-ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -6
5.3.2 Switching Display Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -6
5.3.3 Operation Status Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -7
5.3.4 Control Constant Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -7
5.3.5 Digital Operator Operation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -8
5.3.6 Fault Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -10
5.3.7 Fault Record Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -11
5 -1
5.1 Function of the Digital Operator

The Digital Operator enables the following:
J Display of Control Signal Status

Status of control signals of each unit is displayed by monitoring the status of operation. For the display
items, see Chapter 11 Operating Status Displays.
J Display and Setup of Control Constants
Control constants must be set up for normal operation in compliance with the specifications.
Chapter 10 Control Constants lists the control constants.
J Display of Protective Functions
If an error occurs during operation, protective functions are displayed. 12.2 Converter Faults and 12.3 In-
verter Faults list the protective functions. These are not displayed when operation is normal.
J Functions Using the Digital Operator
Stand-alone operation without sequence input signals or speed reference is possible by using the Digital
Operator. This function is effective for test run of inverter/converter connected only to motor. For the de-
tails of the operation, see Par. 5.3 (5) “Digital Operator Operation Mode.”
5 -2
5.1 Function of the Digital Operator
Fig. 5.1 shows the display section and operation keys of the Digital Operator, and Fig. 5.2 shows the LED dis-
play status of the RUN and STOP keys. Table 5.1 shows the displayed characters and the corresponding alpha-
bets and numbers, and Fig. 5.3 shows the display of bit selection signal.
Mode Display LED

Digital Operator Running Indication
Lights in the Digital Operator operation mode.
Rotation Direction Indication
FWD: Lights when forward run command is
input.
REV: Lights when reverse run command is
input.
Remote Mode Indication

SEQ: Lights when the motor rotates in the re-
verse direction.
REF: — — —
DRIVE FWD REV

DRIVE FWD REV REMOTE
REMOTE
SEQ
SEQ REF
REF
Display
Displays monitored values of speed reference
and function set values.
Run Command Key Digital Operator
JVOP-132
These are run command keys when the drive is oper-
ated by the Digital Operator. These keys are effective
only in operation by Digital Operator.
Display Selection Key
DRIVE/PRGM: Emergency stop
5
When this key is depressed, the op- Depress this key to select display items.
eration speed is reduced and stopped.
Then current is interrupted. LOCAL DRIVE Read/Write Key
DSPL
REMOTE PRGM Depress this key to display set values of
JOG: Jog run: constants. Depress this key again to write
When this key is held down, jogging DATA
is possible. JOG
ENTER set values.
FWD/REV: Forward and reverse rotation switch Numeral Change Key
FWD Use these keys to change values such as set
When this key is depressed, direction
of rotation is changed. REV RESET values and constant Nos.
∧: Increment key
RUN: Run command
JOGRUN STOP
∨: Decrement key
When RUN is depressed, the red LED on
the left part of the key lights.
Digit Selection Key
Use this key to select a position in a set val-
STOP: Stop command
When STOP is depressed, the red LED on ue to be changed. The selected position
the left part of the key lights. blinks. (Use this key to reset after and error
occurs.)
Fig 5.1 Display Unit and Operation Keys of the Digital Operator
RUN and STOP LEDs light, blink, and go OFF depending on the status of operation.
Motor Speed
[FWD]or [REV]
FWD Speed Reference
REV RESET
Main Circuit Power Supply
JOGRUN STOP
RUN
LED
STOP
LED
ON Blink OFF
Fig 5.2 LED Display of RUN and STOP Keys
5 -3
Table 5.1 Indication of Numbers and Letters by 7-segment LED

Numbers Letters
0 A N −
1 B O −
2 C P
3 D Q −
4 E R
5 F S −
6 G − T −
7 H − U
8 I − V −
9 J − W −
. G K − X −
− L Y −
M − Z −
Note: “—” is not displayed.
5 1: ON
0: OFF
Selection signal 0 (OFF) indicates “ ”

and 1 (ON) indicates “ .”
Bit 76 54 32 10
Fig 5.3 Display of Bit Selection Signal
5 -4
5.2 Display Mode Configuration
5.2 Display Mode Configuration

The following figure shows the displays of the Digital Operator. Whenever the DSPL (display selection) key
is pressed, the display mode will change.
Control power ON
All LEDs light (for 1.5 s).*
PROM version No. is displayed (for 0.5 s).

Alarm is ON.
U1-01 (motor speed) data is displayed.
Uj-jj The operating status is displayed.
5
Cj-jj The control constants are displayed.
C1-37 (bits 1 and 0) turned ON.
The Digital Operator operation

d1-jj reference is displayed.
Alarm is ON.
AL-jj The alarm number is displayed.
jALjj The alarm log is displayed.
* “88888” will be display if the model is the M5N for NC systems until communications with
the NC machine are established.
Fig 5.4 Display Order of Digital Operator
5 -5
5.3.1 Indication at Power-ON
5.3 Key Operations and Display

This paragraph describes how to operate the Digital Operator keys and display.
5.3.1 Indication at Power-ON

Digital Operator display at control power supply ON is shown below.
Description Digital Operator Display Remarks
S Turn ON control power sup-

ply.
S All LEDs light. Displayed for 1.5 sec.

   
S PROM number is displayed. Displayed for 0.5 sec.

The lower 5 digits of PROM No. are displayed.
The example uses PROM No. “VSM200040.”
S U1-01 (motor speed) data is Because the motor does not rotate when power
displayed. supply is turned ON, “0” is displayed.
S The fault No. is displayed. AL-42 indicates motor thermistor is disconnected

(Displayed when a protective ( ) when motor encoder signal 2CN is disconnected.
function is activated.)
5.3.2 Switching Display Functions

Depress [DSPL] key on the Digital Operator to change the mode of display.
5 Description
Key
Digital Operator Display Remarks
Sequence
S Motor speed (U1-01) data is

displayed.
S Motor speed data No. is dis- DSPL Control signal status of each unit can
played. (Operation status be monitored.
display has been selected.)
S Control constants display is DSPL Control constants are displayed/set.

selected.
S Digital Operator run com- Use when operating by Digital Oper-

mand display is selected.
(Displayed when bits 0 and
DSPL
( ) ator.
1 of control constant C1-37

are set ON.)
S The fault No. display is se-

lected. (Displayed when a
DSPL
( )
Contents of currently occurring
fault are displayed.
protective function is acti-
vated.) AL-42 indicates motor thermistor
disconnection is detected.
S Fault record display is se- DSPL Contents of past faults are displayed.
lected. 1AL30 indicates the last fault is en-
coder signal disconnection.
S Returns to operation status DSPL

display.
5 -6
5.3.3 Operation Status Display Mode

To check data in operation status display mode, do as follows. The following shows the example where
U1-09 (sequence input signal status) is to be changed.
Key
Sequence
S U1-01 is displayed.
S Move blinking cursor to the Depress [>] key once more to return
data No. RESET the blinking cursor.
S Select U1-09.
S Display U1-09 data con- DATA The display example is the status
tents. ENTER when [RDY] and [EMG] signals are
ON.
S Return to operation status DSPL
No. display
For explanations of operation status display, refer to Chapter 11 Operating Status Displays.
5.3.4 Control Constant Display Mode

To check data or set/change a constant in control constant display mode, do as follow. The following shows
the example where C1-10 (soft-start time) is to be changed.
Description
Key
Sequence
Digital Operator Display Remarks 5
S C1-01 is displayed.
S Move blinking cursor to the Depress [>] key once more to return
data No. RESET the blinking cursor.
S Select C1-10.
S Display C1-10 data con- DATA

tents. ENTER 
S Select data line to be

changed. RESET 
S Change set value. (1→5)


S Write-in set value. DATA Displayed for 0.5 sec.*

ENTER
S Press DATA/ENTER Key Returns to previous display before

until “End” is displayed.  write-in.
S Return to control constant DSPL

No. display.
Note: When data outside the input range are set, “End” will not appear on the display and all data lines
will continue blinking even when the [DATA/ENTER] is held down. To correct this condition,
depress [DSPL] key returning to the data number display and correct the settings.
Refer to Chapter 10 Control Constants for contents of control constants.
5 -7
5.3.5 Digital Operator Operation Mode
IMPORTANT The following are constants that cannot be changed during operation:
C1-25 to 59, C2-09 to 27, C3-09 to 25: Cannot be changed during operation. Change when
stopped.
C1-01 to 24, C2-01 to 08, C3-01 to 08: Can be changed during operation or when stopped.
5.3.5 Digital Operator Operation Mode
In Digital Operator operation mode, operation is enabled by commands from the Digital Operator. The
following table shows the operation. Change the lower 2 bits of C1-37 from “ ” to “ ” to turn ON the
operation mode.
Key
Sequence
S C1-37 is selected.
S Display C1-37 data con- DATA

tents. ENTER
S Select the digit of bit 1

(second place from the RESET
right).
S Change set value. (Turn

ON lower two bits.) RESET
5 S Write-in set value. DATA Displayed for 0.5 sec.

ENTER
S Press DATA/ENTER Key Returns to previous display

until “End” is displayed. before write-in.
S Return to control DSPL Effective for Digital Operator

constants display. operation mode.
The following table shows the reference list in Digital Operator operation. Operation control signals (se-
quence input) and speed references displayed among reference display are handled similar to constant set-
up.
Table 5.2 Parameters for Digital Operator Operations

Constants No. Name Unit Contents
Bit 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TLH
TLL
Operation signal SSC
Binary
(Sequence input) −−−
CHW
PPI
ORT
LGR
MGR
−−−
Speed reference % Displayed in % for rated speed setting (C1-26)
5 -8
Set the speed reference in Digital Operator operation to d1-02.
Key
Sequence
S Select d1-01. DSPL
S Select d1-02.
S Display d1-02 data con- DATA

tents. ENTER 
S Set speed reference (25%). Speed reference is displayed as a per-

RESET  centage of rated speed settings
(C1-26). For rated speed of 6000
min−1, 25% reference will become
1500 min−1 reference.
S Write-in set value. DATA Displayed for 0.5 sec.

ENTER
S Press DATA/ENTER Key Returns to previous display before

until “End” is displayed.  write-in.
The following table shows the keys used in the Digital Operator operation mode. Rotating direction is se-
lected by [FWD/REV] key and run/stop by [RUN] or [STOP] key.
Table 5.3 Key Operations in Digital Operator Operation Mode

5
Key Name Function
DRIVE
PRGM
Emergency stop key When the key is depressed, current is shut off after deceleration to stop.
Jog run can be performed when the key is held down. [Runs at 5% ref-
JOG Jog run key
erence of rated speed setting (C1-26).]
FWD FWD/REV run is switched when the key is depressed. (FWD/REV

REV FWD/REV run key
LED lights alternately.)
Depress the key to start operation. (Red LED on the left lights during
JOGRUN Run command key
run.)
Depress the key to stop operation. (Red LED on the left lights during
STOP
JOG Stop command key
stop.)
To return to operation mode using a regular external run command, change the lower 2 bits of C1-37 from
“ ” to “ .”
5 -9
5.3.6 Fault Display Mode
5.3.6 Fault Display Mode

If a protective function is activated because of a fault, the fault code is displayed. Up to six faults are re-
corded to view the order of a series of faults.
Display Example
Time
Fault Reset
01 occurred 31 occurred d2 occurred

(Overcur- (Motor Overspeed) (CPU built-in A/D error)
rent)
D Displays the first fault No.
D Displays the second fault No.
D Displays the third fault No.
5 IMPORTANT Notes on resetting faults

S To reset a fault by the Digital Operator after removing the cause, press [RESET] key in fault display
mode. In other modes, [RESET] key cannot reset the fault.
S Before resetting, turn OFF the run command signals (FWD, REV, ORT) that are externally input.
The reset operation will not be possible if a run command signal is ON.
5 -10
5.3.7 Fault Record Display Mode

Up to six faults can be displayed in order from most recent to oldest.
Fault No.
Fault Occurrence No. (1 to 6)
The larger the number, the older the fault data.
Display Example
Time
42 occurred 30 occurred E4 occurred E0 occurred E1 occurred 01 occurred

(6AL) (5AL) (4AL) (3AL) (2AL) (1AL)
D Displays the last fault No.
D Displays the second most recent fault No.
5
D Displays the third most recent fault No.
D Displays the fourth most recent fault No.
D Displays the fifth most recent fault No.
D Displays the sixth most recent fault No.
IMPORTANT S Fault record data are not erased by fault reset or turning OFF power supply. (The data will not affect
the operation.)
S To erase fault record data, turn ON bit 0 of C1-57 (right end) and turn OFF the control power supply.
When power is turned ON again, data will be erased and bit 0 of C1-57 will automatically be turned
OFF.
5 -11
6
Trial Operation
This chapter explains the setup for trial operation, and gives examples of
Digital Operator operations and trial operation.
6.1 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -4
6.2 Trial Operation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -5
6.2.1 Checking the Power Supply Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -5
6.2.2 Setting the YENET1200 Node Address . . . . . . . . . 6 -5
6.2.3 Turning ON the Control Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . 6 -5
6.2.4 Turning ON the Main Circuit Power Supply . . . . . . 6 -5
6.2.5 Checking the Motor Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6
6.2.6 Starting Trial Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6 6
6.3 Converter and Inverter LED Displays . . . . . 6 -7
6.3.1 Display Details Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -7
6.3.2 Display when the Converter Control Power Supply Is
Turned ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -7
6.3.3 Display when an Error Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -8
6.4 Constant Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -9
6.4.1 User Constant Functions Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -9
6.4.2 Soft Start Time Setting (TSFS: C1-10) . . . . . . . . . . 6 -10
6.4.3 Load Factor Meter Full Scale (LMFS: C1-18) . . . . 6 -10
6.4.4 Zero Speed Detection Level (ZSLVL: C1-19) . . . . 6 -10
6.4.5 Speed Agree Width (AGRBD: C1-20) . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -10
6.4.6 Speed Detection Level and Detection Width
(SDLVL: C1-21, SDHYS: C1-22) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -11
6.4.7 Torque Detection Signal Operation Level
(TDLVL: C1-23) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -11
6.4.8 External Control Torque Limit Level
(TLEXT: C1-24) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -11
6.4.9 Motor Code Selection (MTR: C1-25) . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -11
6.4.10 Rated Speed (S100: C1-26) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -13
6.4.11 Gear Ratios (RHGR: C1-27, RMGR: C1-28,
RLGR: C1-29) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -13
(ΦSVH: C1-31, RBSH: C1-32,
ΦSVL: C1-33, RSBL: C1-34) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -13
6 -1
Trial Operation
6.4.13 Positioning Completion Detection Width

(ZFIN: C2-09 and C3-09)
and Positioning Completion Cancel Width
(ZCAN: C2-10 and C3-10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -13
6.4.14 Orientation Speed (SORT : C2-11 and C3-11) . . 6 -14
6.4.15 BCD Stop Position Reference Resolution
(PBCD: C2-12 and C3-12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -15
6.5 Speed Control Mode Adjustment Procedure 6 -16
6 -2
WARNING
D Turn ON the power supply only after closing the upper and lower covers. Do not open the covers
while current is flowing.
D The Digital Operator stop button can be disabled by a function setting; you must install a sepa-
rate emergency stop switch.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury.
CAUTION
D Never touch the heatsink because the temperature is very high.
Failure to observe this caution can result in harmful burns to the body.
D Verify the safe working range of the Motor and machine before operation.
Failure to observe this caution can result in personal injury.
D Do not check signals during operation.
The machine or the Unit may be damaged.
D Do not change the settings of the inverter unnecessarily. All the constants of the Inverter have
been preset at the factory.
The machine or the Unit may be damaged.
6 -3
Trial Operation
6.1 Procedure
Perform trial operation according to the following flowchart.
Item Details Refer-
ence
Page
Installation and Mounting Install the Inverter and Converter according to the installation conditions. 1 -5
S Check that the installation conditions are satisfied.
Wiring Connect the power supply and peripheral devices. 2 -3
S Select peripheral devices that meet the specifications, and wire them firmly.
S Be sure to check that the main circuit power supply input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) and control
power supply input terminals (A1/r and A/2t) are wired firmly.
S Check that the Motor output terminals (U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3) and the Motor are connected firmly.
S Check that the ground terminal is connected firmly.
S Check that the wiring between the Converter and Inverter (main circuit DC (P/+ and N/−), control power
supply (P1 and N1), and control signal (5CN and 51CN)) is connected firmly.
S If using a Unit mounted inside of a panel (11 kW min.), check that the power supply terminals (A1j/rj
and A2j/rj) for the cooling fan are connected firmly.
S Check that the control circuit signal and Control Unit are wired firmly and be sure that all control circuit
signals are OFF.
S If using an Orientation Card, check that the Card is wired firmly.
S If using a magnetic contactor for switching windings, check that the contactor is wired firmly.
Check Power Supply Check that the power supply voltage is correct before turning ON the power supply. 5 -5
Voltage S Main circuit power supply voltage
200 V class: 3-phase 200 to 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz
400 V class: 3-phase 400 to 460 VAC, 50/60 Hz
S Control power supply voltage
1-phase 200 to 230 V, 50/60 Hz
Set YENET1200 Node If using an NC Drive (M5N), set the Inverter YENET1200 node address correctly using rotary switch 5 -5
Address SW1.
Turn ON Control Power Turn ON the control power supply, and check that there are no abnormalities with the Inverter and 5 -5
6 Supply Converter.
S If the 7-segment LED display is normal when the power supply is turned ON, it will read as follows:
Converter LED display: “ ”
Inverter LED display: “ ”
S If an error occurs, details of the error will be displayed on the LED display (or on the Digital Operator
data display). Refer to Chapter 12 Troubleshooting, and perform the appropriate remedy.
Turn ON Main Circuit Turn ON the main circuit power supply, and check that the 7-segment LED display on the Converter 5 -5
Power Supply has changed to “ ”.
S If the Converter LED display continues to display “ ”, the main circuit input voltage is too low, or
the phase has been interrupted. Check the input power supply voltage.
Check Motor Cooling Fan When the main circuit power supply is turned ON, the Motor cooling fan will start to rotate. Check that 5 -6
the direction of the Motor air flow is correct as shown in Fig 6.1.
Check Motor Code Check that the Motor code selection (C1-25) is set correctly. (Check the Motor model and Motor code 5 -11
using the factory settings table enclosed with the Inverter.)
S If changing the Motor code (C1-25) set value, be sure to turn OFF the control power supply for three
seconds and then turn it ON again to enable the changed settings.
Perform Trial Operation Send the RUN signal to start trial operation. (If using a Digital Operator for the trial operation, refer to 5 -5
5.3.5 Digital Operator Operation Mode.)
S When the RUN signal is sent, check that the 7-segment LED display on the Inverter and Converter
changes to “ ”.
S Check that the direction of Motor rotation is correct.
S Check that there is no abnormal vibration or noise coming from the Motor.
6 -4
6.2 Trial Operation Procedure
6.2 Trial Operation Procedure

This section explains in detail the procedure shown in the flowchart on the preceding page for the trial operation.
6.2.1 Checking the Power Supply Voltage

Turn OFF the MCCB on the Converter power supply, and check the power supply input voltage supplied
to the Converter on the primary side of the MCCB. Use a voltmeter or rotation tester that can measure input
voltage for the measurement. The input voltage tolerance range is shown in the following table.
Table 6.1 Power Supply Voltage Tolerance Range

Converter Nominal Voltage/Frequency Voltage Fluctuation Toleration
Range
200 V Series 200 V/50 to 60 Hz 170 to 242 V
220 V/50 to 60 Hz
230 V/60 Hz 170 to 253 V
400 V Series 380 V 340 to 484 V
400 V/50 to 60 Hz
440 V/50 to 60 Hz
460 V/60 Hz 340 to 506 V
Note: The Inverter can operate within the voltage fluctuation range shown in the table above, but
make the following settings for optimum characteristics. 200-V series: 200 to 240 V, and
400-V series: 400 to 480 V. If the voltage falls below 200 V or 400 V, lower outputs may
not be possible in the high-speed range as specified. Therefore, if the input voltage can be
converted to within these ranges using transformer tap conversion or other method,opti-
mum operation according to the characteristics can be achieved.
6.2.2 Setting the YENET1200 Node Address
Before turning ON the control power supply, set the YENET1200 node address using rotary switch SW1
on the Inverter Unit. The node address must agree with the NC Unit node address parameter settings.
6.2.3 Turning ON the Control Power Supply 6

When the control power supply is turned ON, “ ” will be displayed on the 7-segment LED display on
the Converter, and “ ” will be displayed on the 7-segment LED display on the Inverter. If the display
differs from this, refer to Chapter 12 Troubleshooting for details.
IMPORTANT Turn ON the control power supply before (or at the same time as) turning ON the main control circuit power
supply. Also, turn OFF the main power supply before (or at the same time as) turning OFF the control power
supply. Failure to observe this precaution can result in the Converter and Inverter malfunctioning.
6.2.4 Turning ON the Main Circuit Power Supply

When the main circuit power supply is turned ON, the 7-segment LED display on the Converter will
change to “ ”. At the same time, the CHARGE indicators on both the Inverter and Converter will light
red. At this time, if an error is displayed and the above display does not appear, refer to 12.3 Inverter Fault
Table for details.
If the 7-segment LED display continues to display “ ”, the main circuit input voltage is too low or the
phase has been interrupted. Check the input power supply voltage.
6 -5
Trial Operation
6.2.5 Checking the Motor Cooling Fan
6.2.5 Checking the Motor Cooling Fan

When the main circuit power supply is turned ON, the Motor cooling fan will start to rotate. Check that
the direction of the Motor cooling flow is as shown in the Fig.6.1 . With the standard specifications configu-
ration, the cooling flow enters from the load side, and is vented on the side away from the load.
(a) Flange-mounted Motor (b) Foot-mounted Motor

Fig 6.1 Direction of Motor Cooling Flow
6.2.6 Starting Trial Operation
When the checks after the power supply has been turned ON have been completed, send a RUN signal to
start the trial operation. When the RUN signal is sent, the 7-segment LED display on the Inverter and Con-
verter will change to “ ”. Gradually increase the speed reference from 0% to start the Motor.
At this time, check whether the direction of Motor rotation is correct. If the rotation direction is forward
(FWD) and the speed reference is positive, rotation should be counterclockwise seen from the load end
of the Motor shaft. If the rotation direction is reversed or if the Motor vibrates but does not rotate even when
6 a RUN signal is sent, the phase sequence of the power supply cable and the encoder signal wire is incorrect.
Turn OFF the power supply, check that the CHARGE indicator and the 7-segment LED displays are no
longer lit, and then check the wiring.
If the Motor rotation direction is normal, change the speed reference or switch the forward and reverse
rotation references, and check that Motor acceleration and deceleration is smooth in both the forwards and
reverse directions. At the same time, check that there is no abnormal vibration or sound coming from the
Motor. (A sound of several kHz occurring periodically from the Motor is caused by the control system,
and is not an error.)
Operation Reference + −
RUN Signal FWD CCW CW
REV CW CCW
CCW
CW Fig 6.2 Direction of Motor Rotation
IMPORTANT Operating Precautions

S Check that the Motor is stopped before starting an operation. If the Motor is started while it is coasting,
the protective functions, such as main circuit overvoltage (AL-11) and overcurrent (AL-01), may op-
erate.
S Do not change the wiring or insert or remove connectors while the power supply is turned ON.
6 -6
6.3 Converter and Inverter LED Displays
6.3 Converter and Inverter LED Displays

This section explains the Converter and Inverter LED displays.
6.3.1 Display Details Tables

Details on the 7-segment LED displays on the Inverter and Converter are shown in the following tables.
Table 6.2 Seven-segment LED Display Details

J Converter
Display Explanation
Indicates that the main circuit power supply is turned OFF, or the Unit is
operating below specifications.
Indicates that the Inverter is not operating.
Indicates that the Inverter is operating.
Indicates an error. Alternately displays the error number and the error
details. (This example shows that the error, which is the 2nd to occur, is an
(Error number) overcurrent. For other errors, refer to Table 12.1.)
If only one error has occurred, only the error details are displayed.
(Error details)
• • Indicates that the WDT is working correctly (Exchange the control card).
J Inverter
Display Explanation
Indicates that the Inverter is not operating (baseblock condition).
Indicates that the Inverter is operating.
Indicates an error. Alternately displays the error number and the error
(Error number) details. (This example shows that the error, which is the 2nd to occur, is a
broken Motor thermistor wire. For other errors, refer to Table 12.2.)
(Error details)
If only one error has occurred, only the error details are displayed. 6
• • Indicates that the WDT is working correctly (Exchange the control card).
Note: The M5N (for NC systems) does not have a 7-segment display for the Inverter.
6.3.2 Display when the Converter Control Power Supply Is Turned ON
When the control power supply is turned ON, the 2-digit 7-segment LED display will display the software
version of the Converter control card (with software version 0j20 or later).
Example: Software version is 0020.
Control power supply is

turned ON
When the control power supply is turned ON, 88

is displayed for 1 s.
The leftmost 2 digits of the software version are

displayed for 2 s.
The rightmost 2 digits of the software version are dis-

played for 2 s.
This symbol is displayed to indicate that startup has

been completed normally.
6 -7
Trial Operation
6.3.3 Display when an Error Occurs
6.3.3 Display when an Error Occurs

If multiple errors are detected in the Inverter and Converter, the details for a maximum of four Converter
errors and six Inverter errors will be saved. Consequently, the order in which the errors occurred can be
viewed. (The display switches automatically.)
Example: Overcurrent (error number 01) and main circuit overvoltage (error number 11) have occurred
in the Inverter.
Displays the error that occurred first for 1 s.
Displays overcurrent error for 2 s.
Indicates that the error was the second to occur.

(Displayed for 1 s.)
Displays main circuit overvoltage error for 2 s.
6 -8
6.4 Constant Settings

This section explains the user constant functions and settings.
6.4.1 User Constant Functions Table

A table of user constant functions is shown below. Change the constant set values depending on the operat-
ing specifications. Refer to 5.3.4 Control Constant Display Mode for setting methods.
Check that the following constant set values match the operating specifications.
D Inverter settings
D Machine specification settings
D Sequence input signal settings
Table 6.3 User Constant Functions
No. Item Details Related Constants M5A M5N
1 Inverter settings
g Inverter Capacity Selection C1-56 ON ON
Motor Code Selection C1-25 ON ON
Orientation Control Method Selection C1-39 bit 0 ON ON
YENET1200 Card Encoder Selection C1-58 bit 0 OFF ON
RUN Mode Selection C1-37 bits 1 and 0 ON ON
2 Machine specification
p Rated Speed C1-26 ON ON
settings
tti
Gear Ratio Settings C1-27 to 29 ON ON
3 Sequence input signal Sequence Input Signal Selections C1-36 bits 1 and 0 (TLL/INC) ON ON
settings C1-36 bit 3 (SSC/SV)
C1-36 bit 4 (PPI/LM10)
C1-37 bit 2 (RDY/EMG2)
C1-40 bit 3 (ORT/NCORT)
Torque Limit Signal C1-24 and C1-38, bit 2 ON ON
12-bit Digital Reference Signal Selection C1-36 bit 7 (Speed/position reference) ON OFF
4 Sequence
q
settings
tti
output
p signal
g Zero-speed Detection Level (ZSPD)
Speed-agree Signal (AGR)
C1-19
C1-20 and C1-38 bit 6
ON
ON
ON
ON
6
Speed Detection Signal (SDET) C1-21 and C1-22 ON ON
Torque Detection Signal (TDET) C1-23 and C1-40 bit 2 ON ON
5 Speed
p reference settings
g Soft Start Time Setting C1-10 ON ON
Analog Speed Reference Adjustments C1-11, C1-12, and C1-38 bit 5 ON OFF
Digital Speed Reference Settings C1-37 bits 7 and 6, and C1-41 to 48 ON OFF
6 Analog g output
p signal
g Speedometer Signal Adjustments C1-16 and C1-54 ON OFF
settings
tti
Load Factor Meter Signal Adjustments C1-17, C1-55, C1-18, C1-38 bits 1 and 0, ON OFF
C1-38 bit 7, and C1-40 bit 4
7 Speed
p control system
y Speed Control Gain Adjustments C1-01 to 04 ON ON
adjustments
dj t t
Motor Flux Lower Limit Level C1-30 ON ON
Torque Reference Filter Time Constant C1-09 ON ON
8 Servo mode settings
g Analog Speed Reference Gain in Servo Mode C1-38 bit 3, C1-40 bit 5, C1-49, and C1-50 ON OFF
Servo Mode Flux and Base Speed Ratio C1-31 to 34 ON ON
Speed System Adjustment in Servo Mode C1-05 to 08 ON ON
9 Other settings
g Zero-speed Braking Time C1-35 ON ON
Excessive Speed Deviation Protection Operation C1-38 bit 4, and C1-40 bits 1 and 0 ON ON
Adjustments
Load Fault Detection Selection C1-40 bit 7 ON ON
Fault Record Clear Selection C1-57 bit 0 ON ON
M5A: Stand-alone drive (analog speed reference settings); M5N: NC system (YENET1200 serial communica-
tions)
ON: Constant valid; OFF: Constant not valid (Not used.)
6 -9
Trial Operation
6.4.2 Soft Start Time Setting (TSFS: C1-10)
6.4.2 Soft Start Time Setting (TSFS: C1-10)

The Inverter speed base is the time set to be taken from 0 min−1. to the rated speed (C1-26), or from the
rated speed setting to 0 rotations/min. The reference/time relationship is shown in the following diagram.
The soft start time can be set between 0.1 and 180.0 s.
The acceleration and deceleration times may be longer than the soft start time setting due to load inertia.
(%) Speed reference

100
Speed reference and base
Rated speed (C1-26)
Speed base
0 TSFS TSFS
Time (s)
Fig 6.3 Soft Start Time Setting
6.4.3 Load Factor Meter Full Scale (LMFS: C1-18)
The load factor meter displays the output ratio (in %) over the Motor rated output while the Motor is operat-
ing. Set the full scale value (i.e., the percentage value over the Motor continuous rating) of the load factor
meter using control constant C1-18. The setting can be between 120% and 500%.
6.4.4 Zero Speed Detection Level (ZSLVL: C1-19)

Use this constant to set the detection level for the zero speed signal. The standard setting is 30 min−1. The
setting can be between 3 and 60 min−1. As shown in the following diagram, the operation point has an hys-
terisis of ±2 min−1.
ON (contact closed)
Lit when ZSPD is ON
Signal output
6
OFF (contact open)
0
Motor speed
(U1-10 display) −2 +2
C1−19
Fig 6.4 Zero Speed Signal Detection Level and Operation Display
6.4.5 Speed Agree Width (AGRBD: C1-20)
Use this constant to set the operation level of the speed agree signal (AGR) (ON when the speed agrees).
The speed agree width can be set between 10% and 50%. The standard setting is 15%.
50
Speed deviation (%)
Setting width
Lit when AGR is ON Standard setting
15
10
Operating
1.2 Operating
area
(U1-10 display) area

0.24
Speed reference (%) 100
Note: The speed deviation shows the % value when

S100 (C1-26) is taken to be 100%.
Fig 6.5 Speed Agree Width Settings and Operation Display
6 -10
6.4.6 Speed Detection Level and Detection Width (SDLVL: C1-21, SDHYS: C1-22)
When the Motor speed is below the set value, the output signal (SDET) turns ON. At this time, the U1-10
operating status display on the Digital Operator is as shown below. The speed detection signal level
(C1-21) can be set between 0% and 100%, and the speed detection signal detection width (C1-22) can be
set between 0% and 10%. (The percentage of the rated speed (C1-26) is displayed.)
C1−22
Lit when SDET is ON ON
Signal output
OFF
0 N
(U1-10 display) C1−21 Motor speed
Fig 6.6 Speed Detection Signal Level and Operating Status Display
6.4.7 Torque Detection Signal Operation Level (TDLVL: C1-23)
This constant is the set value for the torque detection signal (TDET) operation level. (The signal turns ON
when the torque is below the set value.) When TDET is ON, the U1-10 operating status display on the Digi-
tal Operator is as shown below. The torque detection signal operation level can be set between 5% and
120%, taking 30 minutes rated torque to be 100%. As shown in the following diagram, the operation point
has an hysterisis of ±10%.
Lit when TDET is ON Signal output ON
−10 +10
OFF
0 (%)
(U1-10 display) C1−23 Torque reference
Fig 6.7 Torque Detection Signal Operation Level and Operation Display 6
6.4.8 External Control Torque Limit Level (TLEXT: C1-24)
This control constant is used when limiting the torque externally. The limit can be set between 5% and
120%, taking the rated torque for 30 minutes as 100%.
6.4.9 Motor Code Selection (MTR: C1-25)

The Motor code sets the level of Motor control constants stored in the Inverter memory. The Motor codes
are shown in the table 6.4. When changing the Motor code settings, check that the new value matches the
Inverter Unit capacity. If the selected Motor code and the Inverter capacity do not agree, error code AL-E0
(Motor Code Selection Error) will be displayed. Also, if no Motor code has been registered, error code
AL-E1 (Motor Code Not Registered) will be displayed.
If the motor being used is not listed in the following table, please contact your Yaskawa representative for
motor code information.
6 -11
Trial Operation
6.4.9 Motor Code Selection (MTR: C1-25)
IMPORTANT Precautions when Changing the Motor Code

After changing the Motor code, be sure to turn OFF the control power supply. Next, check that the Digital
Operator display is no longer lit, and then turn ON the power supply again. This operation will enable the new
Motor code.
Table 6.4 Motor Codes for Standard Spindle Motors

Voltage Motor Inverter Inverter Motor Model Motor Motor Max. 30 min./ Load Fac-
Class Capacity Capacity Code Speed Continuous tor Meter
Selection (C1-25) (min−1) Rated Out- Max. Value
(C1-56) put (kW) (%)
200 V Standard 23P7 04 UAASKA-04FZj 001 8,000 3.7/2.2 202
25P5 05 UAASKA-06FZj 002 8,000 5.5/3.7 178
27P5 06 UAASKA-08FZj 003 8,000 7.5/5.5 164
2011 07 UAASKA-11FZj 004 6,000 11/7.5 176
2015 08 UAASKA-15FZj 005 6,000 15/11 164
2018 09 UAASKA-19FZj 006 6,000 18.5/15 148
2022 0A UAASKA-22FZj 007 6,000 22/18.5 143
2030 0B UAASKJ-30FZj 008 4,500 30/22 164
2037 0C UAASKJ-37FZj 009 4,500 37/30 148
Winding 25P5 05 UAASKB-06FZj 062 6,000 (1,500) 5.5/3.7 178
selection
27P5 06 UAASKB-08FZj 063 6,000 (1,500) 7.5/5.5 164
2011 07 UAASKB-11FZj 064 6,000 (1,500) 11/7.5 176
2015 08 UAASKB-15FZj 065 4,800 (1,000) 15/11 164
2018 09 UAASKB-19FZj 066 4,800 (1,000) 18.5/15 148
2022 0A UAASKB-22FZj 067 4,800 (1,000) 22/18.5 143
6 400 V Standard
2030
45P5
0B
25
UAASKB-30FZj
UAASKA-06FZjOOE
068
102
4,800 (1,000)
8,000
30/20
5.5/3.7
180
178
47P5 26 UAASKA-08FZjOOE 103 8,000 7.5/5.5 164
4011 27 UAASKA-11FZjOOE 104 6,000 11/7.5 176
4015 28 UAASKA-15FZjOOE 105 6,000 15/11 164
4018 29 UAASKA-19FZjOOE 106 6,000 18.5/15 148
4022 2A UAASKA-22FZjOOE 107 6,000 22/18.5 143
4030 2B UAASKJ-30FZjOOE 108 4,500 30/22 164
4037 2C UAASKJ-37FZjOOE 109 4,500 37/30 148
4045 2D UAASKJ-45FZjOOE 10A 4,500 45/37 146
Winding 45P5 25 UAASKB-06FZjOOE 162 6,000 (1,500) 5.5/3.7 178
selection
47P5 26 UAASKB-08FZjOOE 163 6,000 (1,500) 7.5/5.5 164
4011 27 UAASKB-11FZjOOE 164 6,000 (1,500) 11/7.5 176
4015 28 UAASKB-15FZjOOE 165 4,800 (1,000) 15/11 164
4018 29 UAASKB-19FZjOOE 166 4,800 (1,000) 18.5/15 148
4022 2A UAASKB-22FZjOOE 167 4,800 (1,000) 22/18.5 143
4030 2B UAASKB-30FZjOOE 168 4,800 (1,000) 30/20 180
Note: Values in parentheses are the maximum speed (min−1) of the low-speed windings.
The maximum value of the load factor meter = (30-min rated output x 120%)/(continuous rated output) (%)
6 -12
6.4.10 Rated Speed (S100: C1-26)

Set the rated speed to match the machine specifications. The Motor will operate at this rated speed when
the speed reference value input is 100%. The rated speed can be set between 100 min−1 and the maximum
Motor speed.
6.4.11 Gear Ratios (RHGR: C1-27, RMGR: C1-28, RLGR: C1-29)

Use these constants to set the gear ratio of the Motor shaft and the load shaft according to the machine
specifications. The gear ratio (= load shaft speed/Motor speed) can be set to between 0.0400 and 2.5000.
The set value affects the characteristics during orientation control, so set the accuracy to four decimal
places.

(ΦSVH: C1-31, RBSH: C1-32, ΦSVL: C1-33, RSBL: C1-34)
Use these control constants when increasing the rated torque control range, such as for a solid tap. As
shown in the following diagram, set the flux level (C1-31 and C1-33) and the base speed ratio (C1-32 and
C1-34) in relation to each other.
(%)
100
Normal operation
Flux Servo mode
C1−31
C1−33
0
Base speed
Base speed x C1-32

C1-34
Fig 6.8 Servo Mode Flux Level
6.4.13 Positioning Completion Detection Width (ZFIN: C2-09 and C3-09) and Posi- 6
tioning Completion Cancel Width (ZCAN: C2-10 and C3-10)
Make sure the Motor is stopped before setting the Positioning Completion Detection Width and Position-
ing Completion Cancel Width. The orientation completion signal turns ON when the deviation between
the stop position reference and the stop position is below the completion detection width for 60 ms or lon-
ger. Also, after the completion signal has been output once, if the deviation is greater than the completion
cancel width, the completion signal will immediately turn OFF.
The encoder orientation control for both the completion detection width and completion cancel width can
be set between 0 (0_) and 200 (17.6_), and the magnetic sensor orientation control for both the completion
detection width and completion cancel width can be set between 0.0 and 20.0_, but the completion cancel
width cannot be set to a smaller value than the completion detection width. Also if after setting the comple-
tion cancel width, the completion detection width is set to a greater value than the completion cancel width,
the completion cancel width will automatically be set to the same value as the completion detection width.
Cancel width P1≤P2

Detection width
Completion signal
−200 −P2 −P1 0 +P1 +P2 +200
Stop reference (+20°)
(−20°) position
Setting width
Note: Values in parentheses are when using magnetic sensor orientation control.
Fig 6.9 Completion Signal Detection Position
6 -13
Trial Operation
6.4.14 Orientation Speed (SORT : C2-11 and C3-11)
6.4.14 Orientation Speed (SORT : C2-11 and C3-11)

Make sure the Motor has stopped before setting the orientation speed.
The orientation speed settings are determined by the moment of inertia (including the Motor shaft), and
the torque. Consequently, calculate the load shaft moment of inertia and the load shaft torque when using
the H gear for each machine separately, and then determine the orientation speed by referring to the dia-
gram below. This speed is the upper limit, so the orientation speed can be set to a lower value than this one.
(kgf S m2) (kg S m2)

30 min−1 60 min−1
40 10
100 min−1
150 min−1
Formula 200 min−1

J = 60 × T (Kp: Position loop gain 10)
2π Kp−N
300 min−1
11
400 min−1
GD2 600 min−1
4 1
Load shaft moment of inertia
6
0.4 0.1
Note: Convert the load shaft torque us-

ing the gear ratio (load shaft/Motor
0.2 shaft) of the Motor continuous rated
torque.
0.1
0.04 0.01
10 100 1000 (N S m)
Load torque (Ts)
Fig 6.10 Orientation Speed Settings
6 -14
6.4.15 BCD Stop Position Reference Resolution (PBCD: C2-12 and C3-12)
Make sure the Motor has stopped before setting the BCD stop position reference resolution.
The BCD stop position reference resolution can be set between 0.5_ and 180.0_, but the stop position refer-
ence must be within ±360_. For example, when the set value = 90_, the resolution will be 90_ with a stop
position reference of 1, 180_ with a stop position reference of 2, 0_ with a stop position reference of 4,
and 90_ with a stop position reference of 5.
+360°
−10 −5
0 5 10
When C2-12 or C3-12 = 90
−360°
Fig 6.11 Stop Position Reference and Stop Position
6 -15
Trial Operation
6.5 Speed Control Mode Adjustment Procedure

First check that the Motor is operating normally, and then adjust the speed control mode according to the adjust-
ment procedure shown below. Also, if replacing the Motor or Inverter, be sure to perform the adjustments
shown below.
Adjustment Item and Procedure Details
Initial Settings
Turn ON the power supply. S Check the settings according to the factory settings table.
RUN Operation (0 V Common)
Make initial settings. 7 EMG

6
RDY
Stop
Turn ON emergency stop (EMG)
and operation standby (RDY). 8
FWD
Enter the rated speed reference. RUN

24
0VCOM
19
EXTCOM
Trun ON forward rotation (PWD). 22
24VCOM
3
SCOM
Digital 4
Is speed 0V
10 V / 100%
reference analog
or digital? Check input signal.
S Input signal status (U1-09)
Analog
After acceleration is completed,
check the motor speed using U1-01.
RDY, EMG, and FWD are lit.

Does
6 motor speed NO Motor speed adjustment value (C1-12)
agree with the ref- (P.U.)
erence? 1.1
YES NO
Speed
Higher than reference? 1.0
0.9
YES
Adjust C1-12 (SADJ) to
smaller than current value. 0
0.9 1.0 1.1 (C1−12)
C1-12 = Reference speed/Actual motor speed
Adjust C1-12 (SADJ) to
smaller than current value. Example: When reference speed = 6,000 min−1 and actual speed =
6,060 min−1., C1-12 = 6,000/6,060 = 0.99
(1)
(Continued on next page.)
6 -16
6.5 Speed Control Mode Adjustment Procedure

(1) Speedometer signal adjustment value (C1-16)
(P.U.)
Speed ometer signal

1.5
Is speedometer NO
display correct? (See
note.) 1.0
Is meter display NO
YES 0.9
greater than motor
speed?
YES
0
Adjust C1-16 (SMADJ) to
0.9 1.0 1.5 (C1−16)
smaller than current value. C1-16 = Actual measured motor speed/Speedometer
display value
Example: When motor speed = 6,000 min−1 and speedometer display
Adjust C1-16 (SMADJ) to value = 5,940 min−1, C1-16 = 6,000/5,940 = 1.01
greater than current value.
Load factor meter display maximum value (120% of rated torque
for 30 min.)
Turn ON and OFF the forward rotation signal
(FWD) to accelerate and decelerate the Motor. Load factor meter display maximum value
Capacity LM Capacity LM
Is load 3.7/2.2 202% 18.5/15 148%

factor display during NO 5.5/3.7 178% 22/18.5 143%
accel/decel correct? 7.5/5.5 164% 30/22 164%
11/7.5 176% 37/30 148%
(See note.) 45/37 146%
15/11 164%
Turn OFF the FWD signal
YES to stop the Motor. Signal output for load factor meter adjustment
120% rated torque
Load factor me-
for 30 min. signal*
Display C1-17 data using ter signal LM
the Digital Operator.
0V
Press the DATA/ENTER

DATA >
ENTER RESET
DSPL 6
Key and the RESET Key at
the same time.
Turn OFF the FWD signal to

stop the Motor. Load factor meter signal adjustment value (C1-17)
(P.U.)
NO
Load factor meter signal
Is the load factor 1.5

display too large?
YES 1.0
Adjust C1-17 (LMADJ) to 0.9
smaller than current value.
0
Adjust C1-17 (LMADJ) to 0.9 1.0 1.5 (C1−17)
greater than current value.
C1-17 = (120% of rated torque for 30 min.)/Load factor meter display
value
Press the DSPL Key to Example: When load factor meter display value = 150% at
reset the values. 7.5 kW/5.5 kW, C1-17 = 164/150 = 1.09
Press the UP Direction Key.
Adjustment completed
* When CI-38 bit 7 is ON, a 100% continuous rating signal is output.

Note: Analog monitor signal (speedometer and load factor meter) adjustment is not necessary when using the NC system (M5N).
6-17
7
Wide Constant Power Control Using Winding
Selection
This chapter explains the features, connections, operations, switching meth-

ods, and precautions for wide constant power control using winding selec-
tion.
7.1 Features of the Winding Selection Wide

Constant Power Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -2
7.2 Winding Selection Motor Standard
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -3
7.3 Motor Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -4
7.4 Winding Selection Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -5
7.5 Winding Selection Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -6 7
7.5.1 M Code Winding Selection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -6
7.5.2 Automatic Winding Selection methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -8
7.6 Winding Selection Control Precautions . . . . . 7 -11
7 -1
Wide Constant Power Control Using Winding Selection
7.1 Features of the Winding Selection Wide Constant Power

Drive
The AC main shaft Motor winding selection function is provided as an effective method of increasing the
constant power control range of the machine-tool main shaft drive. The features of the function are shown be-
low.
J Wide Constant Power Control Range

A constant power range of 1:12 can be obtained using the Motor drive without using a gearbox.
J Small Controller Capacity
When expanding the constant power control range using the AC main shaft drive, the Motor current must
also be expanded in the low-speed area, and the controller capacity must also be increased. When using
winding selection, a constant power control of 1:12 can be obtained using a standard controller capacity,
simply by changing the Motor winding connections.
J Good Control Stability
Winding selection enables optimum control by dividing the constant power control range into low-speed
coils and high-speed coils. Consequently, stable control can be obtained by increasing the loop gain as
well.
J Special Magnetic Contactor for Winding Selection
The magnetic contactor is a compact model developed for winding selection. The contactor has a mechani-
cal life of 5 million operations minimum.
7 -2
7.2 Winding Selection Motor Standard Connections
7.2 Winding Selection Motor Standard Connections

As shown in the following diagram, this system requires winding selection signals in addition to speed refer-
ence signals such as FWD and REV. In winding selection, a special magnetic contactor is used that can operate
directly from the Inverter.
3MCCB
3-phase 200 VAC*1 Motor

Special bus bar
Magnetic contactor Z1 Cooling fan
for winding selection Z2
P1N1 power P/ N/ Z3
P/ N/ supply cable r1 17
1MCCB 1MC L
VS−656MR5 P1 P1 t1 18
R R/L1 VS−626M5 U
N1 N1 U/T1 2 IM
3-phase
S/L2 V/T2 4 V
200 VAC*1 S 5CN 51CN W/T3 6 W
T T/L3 2CN X
9
+24 V 10 13 Y
CC 11 11
r1 14 Z
7
2MCCB t1 CA1 12 15
2MC
CA2 13 16
r A1/r
1-phase
200 VAC t A2/t
Flat cable
52CN
Ground to 100 Ω or less.
Ground to 100 Ω or less. 2CN
Not used
1CN +5V 4,5,6 1
0V 1,2,3 2
Not used 3CN PA 16 3
*PA 17 P 4
Digital PB 18 5
Operator *PB P 6
19 PG
MCCB: Wiring circuit breaker (optional) PC 14 7
MC: Magnetic contactor
*PC 15 P 8
L: AC reactor
9
6CN
*3 19,20,21 EXTCOM0*2 THSA 8 11 TS
22,23 24VCOM THSB 9 P 12
24-V external 0VCOM SS 7 10
24,25
power supply
6 RDY
7 EMG 1CN
8 FWD PAO 13
9 REV *PAO 14 P
10 TLH PBO 15
11 TLL(INC) *PBO 16 P Motor encoder
12 SSC(SV) PCO 11 signal output
13 RST *PCO 12 P
14 CHW SS 17
5 DAS
15 PPI
7
16 ORT 12-bit digital
17 LGR EXTCOM*2 31 *3
reference
18 MGR 24VCOM 32 24-V external
0VCOM 33 power supply BCD
BIN
3-digit 2-digit
3 SCOM D1 19
1 − 1
Speed reference 4 0V D2 20
2 − 2
2 SS D3 21
4 − 4
D4 22 −
8 8
33 ZSPD D5 23
10 1 16
34 AGR D6 24
20 2 32
35 SDET D7 25
40 4 64
36 TDET D8 26
80 8 128
37 TLE D9 27
100 10 256
38 ORG D10 28
200 20 512
39 ORE D11 29 400 40 1024
40 CHWE D12 30 800 80 2048
42 COM1
43 6CN
44 FLT SM 47
45
SM
*1 In the 400-V class, 3-phase 400 VAC is used. 0V 48
26 FC0
*2 6CN EXTCOM0 and 1CN EXTCOM are isolated inter- 27 FC1
nally. LM 50
28 FC2
*3 Sequence input common is the external common con- 29 FC3 LM
0V 49
tact. 41 FLTL
46 TALM
P indicates shielded twisted-pair cable. 30 COM2
I/O card
Fig 7.1 Standard Connections Diagram (for 200 V Class Winding Selection Motor)
7 -3
7.3 Motor Characteristics

Motors with switchable windings with a 1:12 constant power range have a 1:4 constant power range for both
the low-speed and high-speed windings, as shown in the following diagram.
This can be written as SML/SBL = SMH/SBH = 4. Also, the base speed ratio and maximum speed ratio are set
to SBH/SBL = SMH/SML = 3 to optimize the motor characteristics.
Consequently, the rated output will occur for both the low-speed and high-speed windings between SBH and
SML, so winding selection is performed within this speed range.
(If the same output occurs in both the low-speed and high-speed coils between SBH and SML, the load factor
meter signal may be off by approximately ±10%.)
IMPORTANT Low-speed Winding Application Precautions

The characteristics cannot be assured if the low-speed winding speed range exceeds SML, so avoid excessive
use.
(P.U)
Low-speed winding output
1.0
SBL SML
0
0.083 0.33 (P.U)
Speed
SB Rated output range SM

(P.U)
1.0
High-speed winding output
SBH SMH
0
0.25 1.0
Low-speed coil range
High-speed winding range
7 Winding selection range

Fig 7.2 Motor Output Characteristics
7 -4
7.4 Winding Selection Operation
7.4 Winding Selection Operation

The timing chart for switching from low-speed to high-speed windings is shown in the following diagram.
Approx. 170 ms
Winding selection signal (CHW) ON OFF
Gate block Gate block
Magnetic contactor for winding

selection
Winding 2CN
10-11
OFF ON
Auxiliary 2CN
contact 12-13
Winding selection completion signal ON OFF ON
(CHWE)
Control constant Low-speed constant High-speed constant
100 ms
Approx. 30 ms
Motor current
Preparing to switch Switching Reset after switching
Reference Completed
Note: The auxiliary contact (2CN terminals 12-13) of the magnetic contactor for winding selec-
tion can be checked using control signal U1-09. When the auxiliary contact is ON, CHWA
of U1-09 is lit.
Fig 7.3 Winding Selection Timing Chart
7 -5
7.5.1 M Code Winding Selection Method
7.5 Winding Selection Methods

When performing winding selection, design the reference circuits referring to the following three methods, to
make sufficient use of the motor characteristics.
7.5.1 M Code Winding Selection Method

For the main shaft drive of the machine-tool, view the winding selection as an electric gear, and use the
numeric control M codes (M41: Low-speed winding, M42: High-speed winding) as shown in the flow-
chart and timing chart below.
Start
M42 NO
Low speed to
high speed
YES M41 NO
High speed to
low speed
NO
S reference ≥ K X SCHW
YES
YES NO
S reference < K X SCHW
Speed reference = SCHW
YES
S reference
Speed reference =
NO K
Does speed agree (AGR)?
YES
NO
Winding selection Does speed agree (AGR)?
(CHW turns OFF.)
YES
7 Winding selection
NO (CHW turns ON.)
Switching completed
(CHWE)?
YES
NO
Switching completed
(CHWE)?
S reference
Speed reference =
K YES
1.0
Speed reference
End M42
* 1. Operations within the dotted lines are Inverter internal signal processes.
* 2. M41: Low-speed winding selection
M42: High-speed winding selection
S reference: Main shaft rotation speed reference (main shaft) M41
SCHW
SCHW: Winding selection speed (Motor)
(In the diagram, SBH ≥ SCHW ≤ SML)
K: Gearbox ratio (When main shaft is traveling at 4,000 min−1,
if the Motor is operating at 5,000 min−1, K = 0.8.) 0 S reference 1.0
Speed reference: Motor speed reference.
The relationship between the speed reference and S reference for M41
and M42 is shown in the diagram on the right.
Fig 7.4 Flowchart
7 -6
M41 S500 M42 S2000 M41 S500

M41
M42
[AGR] OFF
ON
[CHW] OFF
ON
[CHWE] OFF
ON
2000 min−1
SCHW
Speed 500 min−1 500 min−1
reference
0
Speed
0
Fig 7.5 Timing Chart
7 -7
7.5.2 Automatic Winding Selection methods
This section explains the automatic winding selection methods. There are two methods.
J Using the Inverter Speed Detection Signal
The flowchart and timing chart for performing automatic winding selection judging from the actual motor
speed alone using the Inverter speed detection signal (SDET) are shown below.
Start
Motor speed ≥ NO
SCHW + nS
YES NO
Motor speed ≤
(SDET) OFF SCHW − nS
YES
NO (SDET) ON
Low-speed winding?
YES NO
High-speed winding?
Select high-speed coil.
(CHW Turns OFF.)
YES
Select low-speed winding

(CHW Turns ON.)
Winding selection NO
completed
(CHWE)?
YES Winding selection NO
7 completed
(CHWE)?
YES
End
* 1. Operations within the dotted lines are Inverter internal signal processes.
* 2. SCHW: Winding selection speed (Motor) (Set using control constant C1-21 (SDLVL).)
∆S: Switching speed hysterisis width (Set using control constant C1-22 (SDHYS).)
Set SCHW and ∆S as shown below.
Within the diagram,
SCHW − ∆S ≧ SBH
SCHW + ∆S ≦ SBH
S CHW OFF
C1−21= × 100(%)
S100 (C1-26) [SDET]
ΔS × 100(%)
C1−22= ON
S100 (C1-26)
−nS SCHW +nS
(Where ∆S = 100 to 200 min−1)
(C1-21)
Refer to Chapter 5 Operating the Digital Operator for details on the setting methods.
Fig 7.6 Flowchart
7 -8
S2000 S500
S500
OFF
[SDET] ON
OFF
[CHW] ON
OFF
[CHWE] ON
2000 min−1
500 min−1 500 min−1

Speed reference 0
nS
SCHW
Speed 0 nS

J Using Speed Reference and the Inverter Speed Detection Signal
This method performs winding selection by judging whether the speed reference and actual motor speed
are within the high-speed winding selection range or the low-speed winding selection range, using the
speed reference and the Inverter speed detection signal (SDET). (Refer to the table below.) Compared with
the changing method that uses only the speed detection signal, signal processing is increased, but the fre-
quency of magnetic contactor changing can be reduced. The flowchart and timing chart are shown below.
Start
NO
Speed reference ≥
SCHW + nS
YES NO
Speed reference ≤
SCHW − nS
NO
Is SDET OFF?
YES
YES
7
NO
Is SDET ON?
Select high-speed winding.
(CHW turns OFF.)
YES
Select low-speed winding.

(CHW turns ON.)
Winding selction NO
completed (CHWE)?
YES NO
Winding selection
completed (CHWE)?
YES
End
* Operations within the dotted lines are Inverter internal signal processes.
Fig 7.8 Flowchart
7 -9
Set the host controller speed reference judgment level SCHW and the hysterisis level ∆S to the same values
as the Inverter speed detection signal level C1-21 (SDLVL) and the speed detection signal detection width
C1-22 (SDHYS).
Table 7.1 Winding Selection Conditions
Speed Speed Reference
≧ SCHW − ∆S ≦ SCHW − ∆S
Speed ≧ SCHW − ∆S (SDET High-speed winding selected Winding selection not performed
OFF)
Speed ≦ SCHW − ∆S (SDET ON) Winding selection not performed Low-speed winding selected
M05 M03
S2000 (Stopped) S500
(FWD rotation)
[FWD] OFF
ON
OFF
[SDET] ON
[CHW] OFF
ON
[CHWE] OFF
ON
2000 min−1
500 min−1 500 min−1

Speed reference 0
nS
SCHW
Speed 0 nS
7 -10
7.6 Winding Selection Control Precautions
7.6 Winding Selection Control Precautions

Refer to the following precautions when designing winding selection control.
D If the signal wire breaks or the magnetic contactor for winding selection malfunctions, the Motor will
stop, and the operation program will not proceed. At this time, perform an overtime check after the
set time, notify the operators immediately, and stop the winding selection operation by judging it to
be defective (AL-20).
D For automatic changing using motor speed detection, winding selection will be performed whenever
the changing speed SCHW is passed, so the frequency of magnetic contactor operations will be high.
D If using the main shaft drive on the lathe, automatic winding selection will be performed when chang-
ing speed is reached even during cutting. As shown in the following diagram, during rough cutting,
considerable roughness will occur during changing, but as the cutting approaches completion, the dif-
ference will be lost. As this data also makes clear, there are several characteristics in actual use, but
if accuracy in particular is essential, check the accuracy of the cut surface.
Notch
width
2 mm
(0.079
inches) 10µ 200µ
Notch
width
3 mm
(0.12
inches) 10µ 200µ
Notch
width
4 mm
(0.16 10µ 200µ
inches)
Notch
width
5 mm
(0.2 10µ 200µ
inches)
Cutting surface accuracy
* Test conditions
Cut object: S45C (φ100 round bar)
Cutting tool: Ultra-hard cutting tool
Cutting speed: 150 m/min
Cutting feed: 0.2 mm (0.0079 inches)/revolution
Fig 7.10 Surface Accuracy Data During End Face Cutting Using a Lathe
7
7 -11
8
Orientation Control Using an Encoder
This chapter explains methods of control using the Encoder Orientation

Card.
8.1 Device Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -2

8.2 Standard Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . 8 -3
8.3 Orientation Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -5
8.3.1 Standard Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -5
8.3.2 Load Shaft Encoder Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -5
8.4 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -6
8.4.1 Encoder Orientation Card (ETC62613X) . . . . . . . . 8 -6
8.4.2 Load Shaft Mounted Encoder
(NE-1024-2MDF-068) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -6
8.5 Load Shaft Encoder Connector Terminal

Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -7
8.6 Important Points for Encoder Mounting and
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8 8
8.7 Stop Position Reference Signals . . . . . . . . . 8 -9
8.7.1 Stop Position Reference Signal Connections . . . . 8 -9
8.7.2 Stop Position Reference Signal Status Display . . 8 -9
8.7.3 Details of the Stop Position Reference Signal . . . . 8 -9
8.8 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -11

8.8.1 Absolute Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -11
8.8.2 Incremental Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -12
8.8.3 Precautions on Orientation Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -13
8.9 Encoder Orientation Control Mode

Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -14
8 -1
8.1 Device Configuration

Orientation control with an Encoder is used for positioning based on dividing 1 rotation into 4,096 steps (i.e.,
a resolution of 0.088_), 12-bit binary, or 3-digit BCD stop angle references using the load shaft (machine-tool
main shaft, etc.) Encoder, and the Encoder Orientation Card. Positioning can be performed using the motor en-
coder signal if the load shaft and motor shaft are coupled 1:1 and there is no play.
NC panel VS−626M5
Orientation signal
gear selection
6CN
Orientation
AC main
Motor encoder signal shaft motor
Stop position 1CN 2CN
reference
No Encoder
Orientation Card
Motor encoder signal
required
1:1
Transmission
mechanism
Main shaft
(gear,belt,etc)
Tool
Fig 8.1 Main Shaft Orientation Device Configuration for Motor Encoder Method
NC panel VS−626M5
Orientation signal
gear selection
6CN
8
Orientation AC main
Stop position 1CN 2CN Motor encoder signal shaft motor
reference
Encoder Orientation (Timing belt)

Card 1:1
Load shaft encoder 9CN 8CN
signal Load
shaft
encoder
Transmission
Main shaft mechanism
(gears, belt, etc.)
Tool
Fig 8.2 Main Shaft Orientation Device Configuration for Spindle Shaft Encoder Method
8 -2
8.2 Standard Connection Diagram
8.2 Standard Connection Diagram

Figure 8.2 shows the standard connections to use a motor encoder signal with the load shaft and motor shaft
linked in a 1:1 configuration. Figure 8.3 shows the standard connections to use the load shaft encoder signal.
In both cases, the example shows an stand-alone drive (CIMR-M5Ajjjj).
3MCCB
Special bus bar

Motor
P/ N/
1MCCB 1MC L P1N1 power P/ N/ Z1 Cooling fan
VS−656MR5 3-phase Z2
supply cable 200
R R/L1 P1 P1 VS−626M5 Z3
VAC*1
200
VAC*1 T T/L3 5CN 51CN U IM
U/T1
V
V/T2
W
2MCCB 2MC W/T3
1-phase r A1/r
300 VAC t A2/t Flat cable
52CN
Not used 2CN
+5V 4,5,6 1
0V 1,2,3 2
1CN 3CN
PA 16 3
Digital Op- :PA 17 P 4
Not used erator (op- PB 18 5
tional) :PB 19 P 6
PG
PC 14 7
MCCB: Wiring circuit breaker :PC 15 P 8
MC: Magnetic contactor 9
6CN
L: AC reactor
*3 19,20,21 EXTCOM0*2 THSA 8 11 TS
24-V external 22,23 24VCOM THSB 9 P 12
power supply 24,25 0VCOM SS 7 10
6 RDY 1CN
7 EMG
8 FWD PAO 13
9 REV :PAO 14 P
10 TLH PBO 15
11 TLL(INC) :PBO 16 P
Motor encoder signal output
12 SSC(SV) PCO 11
13 RST :PCO 12 P
14 CHW SS 17
5 DAS
15 PPI
16 ORT 12-bit digital refer- Stop position
EXTCOM*2 31 *3
ence reference
17 LGR
24VCOM 32 24-V external
18 MGR BCD BCD
0VCOM 33 power supply BIN BIN
3-digit 2-digit 3-digit
3 SCOM D1 19 1  1 1 1
Speed reference 4 0V D2 20 2  2 2 2
2 SS D3 21 4  4 4 4
D4 22 8  8 8 8
33 ZSPD
34 AGR
35 SDET
D5 23
D6 24
D7 25
10
20
40
1
2
4
16
32
64
10
20
40
16
32
64
8
36 TDET D8 26 80 8 128 80 128
37 TLE D9 27 100 10 256 100 256
38 ORG D10 28 200 20 512 200 512
39 ORE D11 29 400 40 1024 400 1024
40 CHWE D12 30 800 80 2048 Sign Sign
42 COM1
6CN
43
44 FLT SM 47
45 SM
0V 48
26 FC0
27 FC1 LM 50
28 FC2 LM
29 FC3 0V 49
41 FLTL
46 TALM
30 COM2
I/O card P indicates shielded twisted-pair cable.
*1 In the 400-V class, 3-phase 400 VAC is used.
*2 6CN EXTCOM0 and 1CN EXTCOM are isolated internally.
*3 Sequence input common is the external common contact.
Fig 8.3 Standard Connection Diagram for 200-V Class User-set Position Stop Control
Using a Motor Encoder
8 -3
3MCCB
Special bus bar

Motor
P/ N/
1MCCB 1MC L P1N1 power
P/ N/ 3-phase Z1 Cooling fan
VS−656MR5 200 VAC*1 Z2
R R/L1 supply cable VS−626M5
P1 P1 Z3
200 VAC*1
T T/L3 5CN 51CN U IM
U/T1
V
V/T2
W/T3 W
2MCCB 2MC Load shaft
r A1/r Gearbox
1-phase
Flat cable
300 VAC t A2/t
52CN
Not used 2CN
Ground to 100 Ω or less. Motor shaft
+5V 4,5,6 1
0V 1,2,3 2
1CN 3CN 3
PA 16
Digital Op- :PA 17 P 4
erator (op- PB 18 5
Not used
tional) :PB 19 P 6
PG
MCCB: Wiring circuit breaker PC 14 7
MC: Magnetic contactor :PC 15 P 8
L: AC reactor 9
6CN
*3 19,20,21 EXTCOM0*2 THSA 8 11 TS
22,23 24VCOM THSB 9 P 12
24-V external SS 10
24,25 0VCOM 7
power supply
6 RDY 1CN
7 EMG
8 FWD PAO 13
9 REV :PAO 14 P
10 TLH PBO 15
PCO 11 Motor encoder signal output
12 SSC(SV)
13 RST :PCO 12 P
14 CHW SS 17
5 DAS
15 PPI
16 ORT *2 12-bit digital ref- Stop position
EXTCOM 31 *3
17 LGR erence reference
18 MGR 0VCOM 33 BCD BCD
power supply BIN BIN
3 SCOM D1 19 1  1 1 1
2 SS D3 21 4  4 4 4
D4 22 8  8 8 8
33 ZSPD D5 23 10 1 16 10 16
34 AGR D6 24 20 2 32 20 32
35 SDET D7 25 40 4 64 40 64
36 TDET D8 26 80 8 128 80 128
37 TLE D9 27 100 10 256 100 256
38 ORG D10 28 200 20 512 200 512
39 ORE D11 29 400 40 1024 400 1024
40 CHWE D12 30 800 80 2048 Sign Sign
42 COM1
8 43
44 FLT
6CN
SM 47
45 SM
0V 48
26 FC0
27 FC1 LM 50
28 FC2 LM
29 FC3 0V 49
41 FLTL
46 TALM
30 COM2
I/O card
*2 6CN EXTCOM0 and 1CN EXTCOM are isolated internally. Encoder Orientation Card
*3 Sequence input common is the external common contact. (optional) Load shaft encoder
8CN
+5V 4,5,6 H +5V
P indicates shielded twisted-pair cable. 9CN
0V 1,2,3 K 0V
4 SPOA A PA
P SPA 16
5 :SPOA :SPA 17 P N :PA
6 SPOB C PB
Load shaft encoder signal P SPB 18
7 :SPOB P R :PB
output 2 SPOC :SPB 19
SPC 14 B PC
P 3 :SPOC P P :PC
1 SS :SPC 15
SS 20 E FG
Fig 8.4 Standard Connection Diagram for 200-V Class User-set Position Stop Control
Using a Load Shaft Encoder
8 -4
8.3 Orientation Specifications

This section explains the specifications for devices required for encoder orientation.
8.3.1 Standard Specifications
The following table shows the standard specifications for encoder orientation.
Table 8.1 Standard Specifications
Item Load Shaft Encoder Motor Encoder
Positioning Method Absolute or incremental
Positioning Detection Method Main shaft angle detection using a load shaft or motor encoder phase-A, -B, and -C pulses
Stop Position (See *1.) Positioning to the position set internally or via external reference, using the load shaft origin (see
*2) as standard. Angle resolution is 0.088_ (= 360_/4096)
Stop Position Repeat Accuracy (See *1.) ±0.2_ Max.
Resistance Torque (See *1.) Continuous rated torque/±0.1_ displacement (See *3.)
Orientation Card Code number: ETC62613X Not used
Encoder Model NE-1024-2MDF-068 (Load shaft mounted) UTMSI-10AAG (Built-in motor encoder)
* 1. Excludes functional deviation, such as backlash and eccentricity.
* 2. The origin is obtained using the number of offset pulses set in constant memory from the rising edge of the Encoder phase-C
pulse during forward rotation.
* 3. The continuous rated torque may not be output depending on the gain setting. Also, displacement may be larger for rapid load
variations.
8.3.2 Load Shaft Encoder Specifications
The load shaft encoder specifications are shown in the following table.
Table 8.2 Load Shaft Encoder Specifications
Item Details
Model NE-1024-2MDF-068-11 NE-1024-2MDF-068-12 UTMSI-10AAG
Maximum Speed (min−1) (See note.) 6,000 8,000 10,000
Power Supply 5 VDC ±5%, 350 mA
Number of Pulses Phases A and B: 1,024 pulses/rotation
Phase C: 1 pulse/rotation
Output Symmetrical output using a line driver for all phases in common
AM26LS31 SN75158
Maximum Response Frequency 200 kHz Phases A and B: 188 kHz
Phase C: 183 kHz
(11,000 min−1)
Accumulative Pitch Error Within 20% of phase-A and phase-B signal cycle Within 50% of phase-A and
Pitch Error Within 10% of phase-A and phase-B signal cycle

phase-B signal cycle
Within 12.5% of phase-A and
8
phase-B signal cycle
Input Shaft Inertia 170 x 10−3 kgfScmSs2 max. 58.7 x 10−3 kgfScmSs2
Input Shaft Torque 1 kgfScm max. ---
Input Shaft Tolerance Load Thrust: 5 kg (11 lb) max (stopped), 10 kg (22 lb) max. (operating) ---
Radial: 10 kg (22 lb) max (stopped), 20 kg (44.1 lb) max. (operat-
ing)
Construction IP = 54 (connectors facing downwards) Main shaft mounted
Output Connectors Main Unit: 97F3102E20-29P Main Unit: MLR-12 model
Cable: MS3106A20-295 Cable: MLP-12 model
Manufactured by DDK Manufactured by Nihon Crimp
(KK)
Weight 1 kg (2.2lb) 0.33 kg (0.728 lb) (Encoder
disk)
Operating Temperature Range 0 to 60°C (32 to 140°F)
Humidity 85% max. (with no condensation) 10% to 95% (with no condensa-
tion)
8 -5
8.4.1 Encoder Orientation Card (ETC62613X)
8.4 Dimensions
The dimensions of the Orientation Card and Encoder are shown in the following diagrams.
8.4.1 Encoder Orientation Card (ETC62613X)
123
8CN
91
9CN
(Unit = mm)
Fig 8.5 Dimensions of Encoder Orientation Card
8.4.2 Load Shaft Mounted Encoder (NE-1024-2MDF-068)
20
+0.014
2 1.15 0
15.86−0.017
−0.006
−0.009
50.86 −0.025
−0.11
+0.012
50 68 ± 0.5
0
68 ± 0.5
56 ± 0.2
16
14.3
28
φ
φ
φ
+0.05
30
Four 5.5-dia.
56±0.2 3 5
mounting
holes
68±0.5 33±0.5 102±1 Key position
(Unit = mm)
97F3102E20−29P
* 1. Mount to prevent backlash, as this may cause inaccurate positioning.
* 2. A Shaft Load Encoder without a flange is also available.
8 * 3. Ask your Yaskawa representative for Load Shaft Encoders for built-in motors.
Fig 8.6 Dimensions of Load Shaft Mounted Encoder
8 -6
8.5 Load Shaft Encoder Connector Terminal Arrangement
8.5 Load Shaft Encoder Connector Terminal Arrangement

The connector terminal arrangement for the Load Shaft Encoder is shown in the following diagram.
Encoder: MS3102A20-29P
Cables: MS3106A20-29S (Straight plug, solid shell)
MS3106B20-29S (Straight plug, 2-piece shell)
MS-3108B20-29S (L−plug, 2-piece)
MS3057-12A (Cable Clamp)
A B C D E F G H I
PA PC PB --- FG --- --- 5V ---
K L M N P R S T ---
0V --- --- *PA *PC *PB --- --- ---
Notes: 1. The asterisk (*) for signals *PA, *PB, and *PC indicates reverse rotation signals.
2. The connectors are manufactured by Nihon Koku Denshi Kogyo (KK).
Fig 8.7 Load Shaft Encoder Connector Terminal Arrangement
8 -7
8.6 Important Points for Encoder Mounting and Wiring

Pay attention to the following points when mounting and wiring the Encoder.
D Make sure the signal cable between the Orientation Card and the Load Shaft Encoder is 20 m maxi-
mum.
D Yaskawa has prepared signal cables to the specifications shown in the following table. Purchase signal
cables in the standard length required for your applications.
Table 8.3 Signal Cable Specifications
Model Number Yaskawa Number BDP8409123 Yaskawa Number DE8400093
Manufacturer Hitachi Cable, Ltd. Fujikura Densen (KK)
Outline of Specifications Composite KQVV-SW KVV-SB
AWG22 x 3C AWG26 x 10P
AWG26 x 6P
Internal Configuration and Lead Colors B1 to B6 are twisted-pair wires. All wires are twisted-pair wires.
A1: Red
A2: Black
A3: Yellow-green 1: Blue and white
B1: Blue and white-blue 2: Yellow and white
B2: Yellow and white-yellow 3: Green and white
B3: Green and white-green 4: Red and white
B4: Orange and white-orange 5: Purple and white
B5: Purple and white-purple 6: Blue and brown
B6: Gray and white-gray 7: Yellow and brown
8: Green and brown
9: Red and brown
10: Purple and brown
Standard Specifications Standard lengths: 5 m, 10 m, and 20 m
No terminal processing (Connectors are not supplied.)
Note: The composite KQVV-SW (BDP8409123) is the standard product for the internal configuration and lead colors.
D Multiple volt signals pass through the signal cable, so arrange the wiring by separating the signal cables
from power cables.
D If rotation is clockwise as seen from the end of the Encoder shaft during forward rotation of the load
shaft, reverse phase A and phase B as shown in the following diagram.
8CN
8 SPA 16
P
A
N
PA
* SPA 17 * PA
18 C
SPB PB
19 P R
* SPB * PB
Fig 8.8 Reversing Signal Wiring
8 -8
8.7 Stop Position Reference Signals
8.7 Stop Position Reference Signals

This section explains the stop position reference signal connections, status displays, and signal details.
8.7.1 Stop Position Reference Signal Connections
Connections for the stop position reference signal differ for stand-alone drive use and NC system use, as
shown below.
J Stand-alone Drives (M5A)

Connect the stop position reference signal to connector 1CN on the Inverter. Any of the following inputs
can be used for the signal circuit common: 0 V common, 24 V common, or external common. For details,
refer to 3.4.4 Sequence Input Signal Circuits.
J NC Systems (M5N)
The Inverter performs serial communications for the stop position reference signal using NC Unit and YE-
NET1200 communications. For the NC Unit stop position reference address, refer to the NC Unit user’s
manual.
8.7.2 Stop Position Reference Signal Status Display
The ON/OFF status of the stop position reference signal can be checked using control signal U1-19. As
shown in the following diagram, the display details are displayed using the LED display on the Digital
Operator. (For operation details, refer to Chapter 5 Operating the Digital Operator.)
UI-19 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5
12-bit digital reference D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
signal status
D11 D12
Note: When the input signal is ON, the indicator is lit.
Fig 8.9 Stop Position Reference Signal Status Display.
8.7.3 Details of the Stop Position Reference Signal

This section explains the stop position reference signals.
J D1 to D12 (Stop Position Reference Signals)
C1−36
Bit 7
Operation is performed when pins 19 to 30 on connector 1CN are turned ON. Pins 19 to 30 correspond
to signals D1 to D12.
D Signals D1 to D12 are stop position reference signals when performing user-set position stop control 8
using a motor encoder or load shaft encoder.
D Stop position references are sent externally, taking the load shaft origin to be 0.
D The position reference can be selected using 12-bit binary or 3-digit BCD.
Absolute Binary Data 12 bits 0_ to 359.9_
(000 to FFF Hex)
BCD Sign: 1 bit −θ to θ
Data 3 digits (11 bits) (−799 to 799 decimal)
Incremental Binary Sign: 1 bit −2,047 to 2,047 pulses
Data: 11 digits (−000 to 7FF Hex)
BCD Sign: 1 bit −θ to θ
Data: 3 digits (11 bits) (−799 to 799 decimal)
D When the sign bit is ON, the sign is negative, and when the sign bit is OFF, the sign is positive.
D θ is determined by adding the 3-digit BCD data and the BCD stop position reference resolution C2-12
(PBCD) of the control constant. The following equation must be satisfied: θ < 360_
D The relationship between the reference signals and the number of pulses is shown in the following
table.
8 -9
8.7.3 Details of the Stop Position Reference Signal
Signal Pin Number Binary BCD

Without Sign With Sign With Sign
D1 19 1 1 1
D2 20 2 2 2
D3 21 4 4 4
D4 22 8 8 8
D5 23 16 16 10
D6 24 32 32 20
D7 25 64 64 40
D8 26 128 128 80
D9 27 256 256 100
D10 28 512 512 200
D11 29 1024 1024 400
D12 30 2048 Sign Sign
D When using signed binary data, the meaning of the signal will depend on the sign (+ or −).
If the sign is positive, the total number of bit pulses input is added:
0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
: : : :
256+ 64 + 8 + 1 = 329
If the sign is negative, the negative of sum of the number of bit pulses input is used:
− (256 + 64 + 3 + 1) = −329
D For incremental operations, binary references cannot be above 180_. For BCD references, references
above 180_ are possible depending on the setting of the BCD stop position reference resolution C2-12
(PBCD) to a maximum of ±360_.
INFO The input signal circuit for the stop position reference for the Encoder orientation is the same as that shown
in 3.4.4 Sequence Input Signal Circuits.
8-10
8.8 Functions
8.8 Functions
This section explains in detail the Encoder orientation control code functions.
IMPORTANT Orientation Control Application Precautions

In the following cases, be sure to adjust the tuneup and parameters before using the orientation function.
S When using the orientation function for the first time after mounting the M5 to the machine
S When replacing the Motor or Encoder
S When changing the wiring between devices
For details on the tuneup, refer to the adjustment procedure.
There are two types of user-set positioning operations. This section explains them both.
D Absolute positioning
D Incremental positioning
8.8.1 Absolute Positioning
Absolute positioning is used when performing positioning to the specified stop position based on the load
shaft origin. Consequently, if the specified stop position is 0_, the shaft will stop at the load shaft origin,
and if the specified stop position is 90_, the shaft will advance 90_ clockwise before stopping.
When the orientation signal is input while the motor is rotating (or while the motor is stopped), the load
shaft immediately decelerates (or accelerates) to the orientation speed that has been set. After attaining the
set speed, the Encoder phase-C signal is checked, and then the shaft stops at the position specified by the
servo loop, and an orientation completion signal (ORE) is output at the same time.
After orientation has been completed, the servo loop will still continue to operate unless the orientation
completion signal is turned OFF, so even if external force is applied to the load shaft, the shaft will not slip
easily from the positioning point.
The timing chart for the absolute positioning operation is shown in the following diagram.
Operation signal (FWD or REV) ON

Orientation signal (ORT) ON
Orientation completion signal ON
(ORE)
Orientation speed
Operation time
Speed
( Reference)
0
8
( Actual speed)
(a) Stopping at Specified Position when Motor is Rotating
Operation signal (FWD or REV)

Orientation signal (ORT) ON

(ORE)
Operation time
Speed
( Reference)
( Actual speed) 0
(b) Stopping at Specified Position when Motor is Stopped
Fig 8.10 Absolute Positioning Operation
8 -11
8.8.2 Incremental Positioning
8.8.2 Incremental Positioning

Incremental positioning is used when positioning to a new stop position that adds to the current stop posi-
tion a specified amount of travel (i.e., angle).
If an incremental signal is input and an orientation signal is input again after absolute positioning has been
completed, the shaft stops at the new stop position according to the servo loop, and a completion signal
is output at the same time.
In this mode, the shaft advances by the specified rotation travel amount only whenever an orientation sig-
nal is input.
The timing chart for the incremental positioning operation is shown in the following diagram.

Orientation signal (ORT) ON ON ON
Incremental signal (INC) ABS INC ON

Orientation completion signal ON ON ON
(ORE)
Speed
( Reference)
( Actual speed)
0
Absolute stop position

0
Incremental operation
Position
( Reference)
( Actual speed)
0
Fig 8.11 Incremental Positioning
When performing incremental positioning, make sure that the position does not slip while the orientation
signal is turned OFF. If the position slips, stop position accuracy will be lost.
8 -12
8.8 Functions
8.8.3 Precautions on Orientation Control

Design the sequence considering the following points when using the orientation function.
D The system will not restart unless the ORT signal is turned OFF if an emergency stop is performed
during orientation.
D Keep the ORT signal OFF when the system is turned ON, or otherwise the system will not operate.
D Turn ON the ORT signal at least 15 ms after the EMG or RDY signal is turned ON. The ORT signal
will not be accepted if it is turned ON before the EMG or RDY signal is turned ON.
[EMG] ON
[RDY] ON
[ORT] ON
15 ms min.
D In the orientation control, after the Encoder phase−C signal is checked, the shaft stops at the specified
position, and an orientation completion signal (ORE) is output. The detected position of the origin
signal is cleared when the motor speed exceeds 50 min−1 after the shaft has stopped. (it is also cleared
if the motor is rotated by external force.) If the ORT signal is input when the detected position of the
origin signal is cleared, the motor will rotate to detect the origin signal.
D If the ORT signal is input when the detected position of the origin signal is being held, the motor does
not rotate because the origin signal does not have to be detected. Therefore, if the ORT signal to the
current position is input, an orientation completion signal (ORE) is immediately output without rotat-
ing the motor.
D Assume the motor may rotate after the ORT signal is input because it is impossible to check if the origin
signal is detected externally. Therefore, design the sequence for checking that an orientation comple-
tion signal (ORE) has turned ON after the ORT signal is input.
D The positioning rotation direction is described below.
Before the origin signal is detected: the set value in the Positioning rotation direction constant (C2-22,
bit 1 and 0)
When the origin signal is being held: If the ORT signal is input again, the rotation direction is automati-
cally detected, and shortcut control is carried out. The rotation direction cannot be specified.
8 -13
8.9 Encoder Orientation Control Mode Adjustment Procedure

Adjust the encoder orientation according to the following flowchart. Be sure to perform the following adjust-
ments if the Motor, Inverter, or Encoder are replaced.
Turn ON the power supply. Initial Settings: Change Constants Using Digital Operator
S Turn OFF the orientation selection (bit 0) of selection signal 4 (C1-39).
S Turn OFF the tuneup operation selection (bit 4) of orientation selection
Make the initial settings. signal 1 (C2-22).
Gear Ratio Constants

S C1-27: Gearbox ratio (H)
Is gear ratio set- NO
S C1-28: Gearbox ratio (M)
ting correct? 0.0400 to 2.500
S C1-29: Gearbox ratio (L)
YES
Adjust controller gear
ratio constant.
Input Signal Check
Interface input status (U1-09)
Select H gear.
Turn ON orientation signal (ORT).

Orientation signal (ORT) is lit
Tuneup Operation
Tuneup incomplete error (AL-60)
is displayed.
Orientation signal
Press the STOP and RESET Do not hold the key STOP Key and
Keys and release them together. down. RESET Key
FWD
Rotate Load shaft speed 0
motor forwards and NO REV
reverse. Does load
shaft stop at ori- Note: During tuneup, the orientation completion signal (ORE) is not
gin? output.
YES Perform error diagnosis
and correct error.
Load Shaft Origin
Select control constant display
for load shaft origin (C2-01). Orientation signal
8 Origin data 0 P1
(When 0 < P1 < P3 < P2)
P2 P3
Set the origin data, and press
the ENTER Key.
ENTER Key
FWD
Shaft stops at new origin. Load shaft speed 0
REV
P2
Load P3
Does shaft NO shaft
stop at correct posi- position P1
tion?
0
YES
(1)
8 -14
8.9 Encoder Orientation Control Mode Adjustment Procedure

(1) If a malfunction occurs during tuneup, reset the system, and then per-
form the tuneup operation again.
Turn OFF orientation signal (ORT). Tuneup completed
Turn ON tuneup operation selection (Bit 4 of C2-22 turned ON).
Tuneup completed.
(Bit 4 of C2-22 turned ON.) Adjust Control Constants
Adjust Virtual Stop Position Offset (C2-13)
Adjust control constants accord- S Perform adjustment so that final run-on is not delayed, and there is no
ing to machine specifications. overshooting.
Offset small
Turn ON orientation signal (ORT). Offset large
Stop position
Time
NO S If the load inertia changes, the characteristics will also change. Check
Is stopping smooth? the characteristics for the H, M, and L gears individually.
YES H Gear Selection

Adjust virtual stop Adjust Proportional Gain (C2-02)
position offset (C2-13).
S If the ORE signal is not output close to the stop position, the gain will
Is position increase.
YES
accuracy insuffi-
S Even if the ORE signal is output, if the shaft load is unsteady, the gain
cient, or is there
will be reduced.
hunting? Adjust position control
NO proportional gain (C2-02).
Check M Gear Selection
Turn OFF orientation signal (ORT).
Select M gear.
Lit when M gear is selected
Turn ON orientation signal (ORT). Adjust Proportional Gain (C2-03)

increase.
S Even if the ORE signal is output, if the shaft load is unsteady, the gain
Is position will be reduced.
accuracy insuffi- YES
cient, or is there Note: If there is no L gear selection in the machine specifications, omit
hunting? the following L gear adjustment procedure.
Adjust position control
Check L Gear Selection
8
Turn OFF orientation signal (ORT). Interface input status (U1-09)
Select L gear.
Lit when L gear is selected

Adjust Proportional Gain (C2-04)
increase.
Is position S Even if the ORE signal is output, if the shaft load is unsteady, the gain
will be reduced.
cient, or is there
proportional gain (C2-04).
NO
Adjustment completed.
8 -15
9
Magnetic Sensor Orientation Control
This chapter explains control methods using a Magnetic Sensor Orientation

Card.
9.1 Device Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -2

9.2 Standard Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -3
9.3 Orientation Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -4
9.3.1 Standard Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -4
9.3.2 Magnet Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -4
9.3.3 Magnetic Sensor Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -5
9.4 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -6
9.4.1 Magnetic Sensor Orientation Card (ETC62614X) 9 -6
9.4.2 Magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -6
9.4.3 Magnetic Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -7
9.5 Connections between Devices . . . . . . . . . . 9 -8

9.5.1 Magnetic Sensor Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -8
9.5.2 Stop Position References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -8
9.6 Control Signal Connector Terminal

Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -9
9
9.7 Magnet and Magnetic Sensor Mountings . 9 -10
9.8 Mounting Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -11
9.9 Stop Position Reference Signal Details . . 9 -13
9.10 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -14
9.10.1 Fixed Position Stopping Operation Using
the Magnetic Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -14
9.10.2 User-set Position Stop Control Using
Incremental Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -15
9.11 Magnetic Sensor Orientation Control Mode

Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -16
9 -1
9.1 Device Configuration

This configuration performs positioning to a fixed angle by detecting the position using a Magnetic Sensor
mounted on a fixed part and a Magnet mounted to the rotating part of the load shaft. For this method of control,
the following devices are required in addition to signals and speed references for forward and reverse rotation:
Orientation signals and a Magnet for positioning references, a Magnetic Sensor, and a Magnetic Sensor
Orientation Card.
In addition, after performing positioning using the Magnetic Sensor, user-set position stop control can be per-
formed using an incremental operation. For this operation, stop position references are required.
NC panel VS−626M5
Orientation signal 6CN

gear selection
Orientation Motor encoder AC main
Stop position 1CN 2CN signal shaft motor
reference
10CN
Magnetic Sensor
orientation card
Magnetic Sensor
Magnet
Transmission mechanism
(gears, belt, etc.)
Main shaft
Tool
Fig 9.1 Main Shaft Orientation Device Configuration for Magnetic Sensor Method
9 -2
9.2 Standard Connections
9.2 Standard Connections

An example for an stand-alone drive (CIMR-M5Ajjjj) is shown in the following diagram.
3MCCB
Special bus bar

Motor
P/ N/ P1N1 power 3-phase Z1 Cooling fan

P/ N/ 200 VAC*1 Z2
VS−656MR5 supply cable
1MCCB 1MC L P1 P1 Z3
VS−626M5
R R/L1 N1 N1
3-phase S S/L2 5CN 51CN U IM
200 U/T1
T T/L3 V
VAC*1 V/T2 W
W/T3
2MCCB 2MC
1-phase r A1/r Flat cable
300 VAC A2/t 52CN
t Ground to 100 Ω or less.
Not used 2CN
+5V 4,5,6 1
Ground to 100 Ω or less. 0V 1,2,3 2
PA 16 3
1CN 3CN 4
Digital Op- :PA 17 P
Not used PB 18 5
erator (op-
tional) :PB 19 P 6
MCCB: Wiring circuit breaker PG
PC 14 7
MC: Magnetic contactor :PC 15 P 8
L: AC reactor 9
6CN
*3 19,20,21 EXTCOM0*2 THSA 8 11 TS
22,23 24VCOM THSB 9 P 12
24-V external 24,25 0VCOM SS 7 10
power supply 6 RDY
1CN
7 EMG
8 FWD PAO 13
9 REV :PAO 14 P
10 TLH PBO 15
PCO 11 Motor encoder signal output
12 SSC(SV)
13 RST :PCO 12 P
14 CHW SS 17
5 DAS
15 PPI
16 ORT 12-bit digital refer- Stop position
EXTCOM*2 31 *3
17 LGR ence reference
18 MGR BCD BCD
0VCOM 33 power supply BIN BIN
3 SCOM D1 19 1 1
1  1
2 SS D3 21 4 4
 4 4
D4 22 8  8 8 8
33 ZSPD D5 23 10 1 16 10 16
34 AGR D6 24 20 2 32 20 32
35 SDET D7 25 64
40 4 40 64
36 TDET D8 26 8 128
80 80 128
37 TLE D9 27 100 10 256 100 256
38 ORG D10 28 200 20 512 200 512
39 ORE D11 29 400 40 1024 400 1024
40 CHWE D12 30 800 80 2048 Sign Sign
42 COM1
43 6CN
FLT SM 47
44
9
45 SM
0V 48
26 FC0
27 FC1 LM 50
28 FC2 LM
29 FC3 0V 49
41 FLTL
46 TALM For Magnetic Sensor
30 COM2 Amplifier (FS-1378C)
I/O card
Magnetic Sensor Orienta- 10CN
tion Card (optional) 13 A
14 P D
Positioning signal
*2 6CN EXTCOM0 and 1CN EXTCOM are isolated internally. (for control) E
*3 Sequence input common is the external common contact. F
+15V 12 C
SG 3 P B
P indicates shielded twisted-pair cable. SS 1 G
Fig 9.2 Standard Connections for 200 V Class User-set Position Stop Control and Mag-
netic Sensor Positioning
9 -3

This section explains the specifications for devices required for Magnetic Sensor orientation.

The following table shows the standard specifications for Magnetic Sensor orientation.

Item Details
Position Detection Method Position change detection by magnetic flux using a Magnet and a Magnetic Sensor.
Stop Position*1 Stops in the position where the center of the Magnetic Sensor head and the Magnet are aligned.
Can be adjusted within the range ±2_ using control constants.
Stop Position Repeat Accuracy*1 ±0.2_ max.
Resistance Torque*1 Continuous rated torque/±0.1_ displacement*2
Orientation Card Code number: ETC62614X
Magnet Model: MG-1378BS or MG-1444S
Magnetic Sensor Model: FS-1378C or FS-200A
* 1. When the Magnet is mounted on the circumference of the φ120 load shaft. Excludes deviation due to mechanical deviation
and external magnetic fields.
* 2. Output may not reach continuous rated torque depending on the gain setting.
9.3.2 Magnet Specifications

The Magnet specifications are shown in the following table.
Table 9.2 Magnet Specifications

Item Details
MG-1378BS MG-1444S
Detection Range (mm) ±15 ±7
Speed Tolerance (rotations/min.) 6,700 10,000
(Mounted on a 200-diameter circumference)
Weight (g) 33 15
Manufacturer (KK) Makome Research Center
9 -4
9.3.3 Magnetic Sensor Specifications

The specifications for the Magnetic Sensor are shown in the following table.
Table 9.3 Magnetic Sensor Specifications

Item Details
FS-1378C FS-200A
Power Supply Voltage 15 VDC ±5% 12 VDC ±10%
Consumption Current 100 mA max. 50 mA max.
Position Signal for Control Output Output
Level ±4 V min. ±8 V min.

Offset ±0.2 V max. Displacement ±0.2 V max. Displacement
Output Impedance 1.5 kΩ 0 0
1.5 kΩ
Position Signal for Monitor Output ---

Range 30_ min.*1
(+24 V max.)
Offset ±0.5 V max. Displacement
0
Ambient Operating Tempera- −10 to 50_C

ture
Output Terminals Supplied with round connectors Supplied with 5-m 6-mm-diameter, 4-core cabtire
Manufacturer: Tajimi Musen Denki (KK) cable
A: Position signal + Wiring:
B: SG Red: 12 V
Black: SG
C: 15 V Green: + output
D: Position signal − White: − output
E: Range signal −*2
F: Range signal +*2
Manufacturer (KK) Makome Research Center
* 1. When Magnet is mounted on 120-mm-diameter load shaft rotating part.

* 2. The range signals on terminals E and F can be used for monitoring.
9 -5
9.4.1 Magnetic Sensor Orientation Card (ETC62614X)
9.4 Dimensions
The dimensions for the Orientation Card, Magnet, and Magnetic Sensor are shown in the following diagrams.
9.4.1 Magnetic Sensor Orientation Card (ETC62614X)
123
91
10CN
(Unit: mm)
Note: The Magnetic Sensor Orientation Card can be shipped after being mounted to the Unit at
the factory.
Fig 9.3 Dimensions of Magnetic Sensor Orientation Card
9.4.2 Magnet
J MG-1378BS
Differential standard
hole, dia: 1.0
Four, 4.3-dia mounting holes Stainless steel cover 0.5 t
SPC 2.0 t
MG−1378−BS
30
22
N
12
S MACOME CORP
15 15 5 2.5
50
(Unit: mm)
Fig 9.4 Dimensions of MG-1378BS Magnet
9 J MG-1444S
2-φ4.3
N S
10
Stainless steel cover 0.5 t

7
2
Name 30
plate 40 Base plate
50 (Unit: mm)
Fig 9.5 Dimensions of MG-1444S Magnet
9 -6
9.4 Dimensions
9.4.3 Magnetic Sensor
J FS-1378C
FSH-1378C Magnetic
Magnet direction ofSensor Head 25
FSD-1378C TRC116-21A 10-7M Recep-
travel Detector 2−φ5.4 13
tacle
6-core LCKV cable 1
1 1-groove 4.5 2.7 500 mm
(Tajimimusen)
pin
A
1
6
φ
36
18
50
60
5
40
φ
φ
φ12 18
22 16 4
SPC 0.5 t
10 37.5 37.5 10 TRC116-12A 10-7F Plug
Mounting cutaway (Tajimimusen)
95 Detail at A
2−M4 STP-7 Waterproof Ground
(Rappu)
φ20
(Unit: mm)
28
Fig 9.6 Dimensions of FS-1378C Magnetic Sensor
J FS-200A
4.2 mounting hole
4-core cabtire cable
MACOME Diameter: 6 mm
27
35
Length: 5 m
MAGNETIC FLUX
SENSOR FS−200A
11.5 42
22.5 1 50 4.2 x 5 oblong mounting hole
52.3
(Unit: mm)
Fig 9.7 Dimensions of FS-200A Magnetic Sensor
9 -7
9.5.1 Magnetic Sensor Signal
9.5 Connections between Devices

This section explains the connections between the devices used for Magnetic Sensor orientation control.
9.5.1 Magnetic Sensor Signal
J Using the FS-1378C
Orientation card
10CN
(See note 1.) FSD-1378C
13
+ A Magnetic FSH-1378C
Position signal P
− 14
D Sensor
(See note 2.)
C Amplifier
12
+15 V P Sensor
3
SG B Head
1
SG
Metal connector
(supplied)
Notes:1. Use a model 2P 0.3-mm2 twisted-paired vinyl cable with copper shielding. Make sure the wiring distance is 20 m maxi-
mum.
2. P indicates twisted-pair cable.
Fig 9.8 Connection between Devices for FS-1378C
J Using the FS-200A
10CN
Orientation Card 13 Green
+
Position signal − 14 White FS-200A
+ 12 V 10 Red Magnetic
SG 3 Black Sensor
Fig 9.9 Connection between Devices for FS-200A
9.5.2 Stop Position References

Stop position references stop the motor at a user-set position using Magnetic Sensor orientation.
Binary Controller
1 1CN
19
D1 (P01)
2 20 D2 (P02)
4 21
D3 (P03)
8 22 D4 (P04)
9 16
32
23
24
D5 (P05)
D6 (P06)
64 25 D7 (P07)
128 26 D8 (P08)
256 27
D9 (P09)
512 28
D10 (P10)
1024 29
D11 (P11)
2048 30
D12 (P12)
31
COM
Note: For the connector terminal arrangement, refer to 3.4 Wiring Control Circuit Signals.
Fig 9.10 Connection between Devices
9 -8
9.6 Control Signal Connector Terminal Arrangement
9.6 Control Signal Connector Terminal Arrangement

The terminal arrangement of the control signal connectors is shown below.
J 10CN Orientation Card

14 SIG− 7 ---
13 SIG+ 6 ---
12 +15 V 5 0V
11 --- 4 ---
10 +12 V 3 0V
9 --- 2 ---
8 --- 1 SS
PCB connector: 10214-52A2JL

Cable connector: 10114-3000VE
10314-52A0-008 (case)
Notes:1. The terminal arrangement is viewed from the PCB connector.
2. Connectors are manufactured by Sumitomo 3M Corporation.
J FS-1378C Magnetic Sensor
F A
E G B
C
D
TRC116-21A10-7M Magnetic Sensor Connectors

TRC116-12A10-7F Cable Connectors
Notes:1. The pin arrangement is viewed from the sensor connector.
2. The cable connectors are included in the Magnetic Sensor.
3. Connectors are manufactured by Tajimi Musen Denki (KK).
Fig 9.11 Connector Terminal Arrangement
9 -9
9.7 Magnet and Magnetic Sensor Mountings

The Magnet is mounted directly to the load shaft as shown in the following diagram. The Magnetic Sensor is
mounted to a part of the load shaft that does not rotate, but must be mounted so that the positioning of the center
of the Magnet agrees exactly with the center of the Magnetic Sensor.
J Mounting Diagram
Mounting panel FSH-1378C

(panel width 8 mm max.)
Magnetic Sensor
L
MG-1378BS Magnet nS2
L
δ
nS1
R
(a) MG-1378BS/FS-1378C
FS-200A Magnetic Sensor

Magnetic Sensor
mounting panel
MG-1444S Magnet L
L
δ
nS1
nS2
R
(b) MG-1444S/FS-200A
Fig 9.12 Magnet and Magnetic Sensor Mounting Diagram 1
J Mounting Dimensions
The mounting dimensions for the above diagram are shown in the following table.
Sign Name MG-1378BS/FS-1378C MG-1444S/FS-200A
R Radius of rotating part 60 to 70 mm 60 to 70 mm
mounted to the Magnet*1
L Gap (between center of 6 mm (6 to 8 mm) 5 mm (3 to 7 mm)
Magnet and Magnetic
Sensor)*2
∆L Gap (between tip of Mag- 1 to 2 mm 1 to 2 mm
net and Magnetic Sen-
sor)*2
9 ∆S1 and ∆S2 Magnet and center of 0.5 mm max. 0.5 mm max.
Magnetic Sensor are no
longer aligned.*3
δ Angle of misalignment 0.2_ max. 0.2_ max.
from base surface.*3
* 1. When specifying the radius of the rotating part mounted to the Magnet, consider the maxi-
mum speed tolerance of the Magnet.
* 2. The value of L is the recommended value. Adjust the gap to satisfy the value of ∆L.
* 3. When the mechanical central shaft (e.g., the spindle nose key in the machining center) has
been matched, make sure that the center misalignment of the Magnet and Magnetic Sensor,
as well as the standard of accuracy of the emitter mounting, have been satisfied. Make sure
the base surface is parallel to the tangent at the point where it crosses the circumference of
the rotating part mounted to the Magnet and the Magnet centerline.
Fig 9.13 Magnet and Magnetic Sensor Mounting Diagram 2
9 -10
9.8 Mounting Precautions
9.8 Mounting Precautions

Pay attention to the following precautions when mounting the Magnet and Magnetic Sensor.
J Mount the Magnet to the Load Shaft

The position control loop is configured using the detection magnetic field of the Magnet. Mount the Mag-
net on the load shaft (e.g., the main shaft of the machine-tool). If using a belt gear transmission mechanism
between the shaft to which the Magnet is mounted and the load shaft, there is a risk that the stop position
will be out of alignment due to the load shaft belt slipping or gear backlash.
J Do Not Install a Magnetic Body Near the Magnet
Use non-magnetic materials for the rotator to which the Magnet is mounted. Also make sure that there are
no iron particles sticking to the Magnet. The presence of a magnetic body near the Magnet may warp the
magnetic field, resulting in incorrect position detection and preventing the shaft from stopping in the cor-
rect stop position. Do not place devices that emit magnetic fields (solenoids, magnetos, etc.) near the Mag-
net and Magnetic Sensor, as the presence of another magnetic field near the Magnet may warp the magnetic
field, resulting in incorrect position detection and preventing the shaft from stopping in the correct stop
position.
J Take Care When Handling the Magnet and Magnetic Sensor
When mounting the Magnet and Magnetic Sensor, do not damage them. The Magnet rotates at high speed,
so damage can result in unexpected accidents. Also, the Magnetic Sensor is a high-precision device, so
if external force is applied resulting in internal distortion, detection accuracy will be reduced.
J Do Not Subject the Magnetic Sensor Amplifier or Connector Cables to Oil or
Water
Do not allow oil or water to come into contact with the Magnetic Sensor amplifier or connector cables.
If water or oil comes into frequent contact with the sensor head in particular, perform waterproof counter-
measures on the bushings using additional materials, as shown in figure 9.14. If dirty oil or water permeates
the Magnetic Sensor or connector cables, there is a risk that insulation will be reduced, resulting in abnor-
mal signal detection and abnormal control operations.
Magnetic Sensor
Silicon adhesive
Fig 9.14 Magnetic Sensor Bushing Waterproofing Method

J The Wiring Distance: 20 m. Max.
Make sure that the wiring distance between the Magnetic Sensor Amplifier and the Orientation Card is
20 m maximum. The Magnetic Sensor detection signal is low-voltage, so if the wiring is too long, the sen-
sor will be easily affected by differential voltages and noise voltages, resulting in inaccurate positioning.
J Be Careful of Polarity
When mounting the Magnet and Magnetic Sensor, pay attention to the polarity, and mount the devices cor-
rectly as shown in the Fig 9.15. Even if the devices are mounted with the polarity mistakenly reversed, the
9
Orientation Card will still respond to signals, so control will be possible.
9 -11
Load shaft
Magnetic Sensor
head pin groove
Magnet detection
standard hole
(a) MG-1378BS/FS-1378C
Load shaft
FS-200 printed on
the back
(b) MG-1444S/FS-200
Fig 9.15 Magnet and Magnetic Sensor Mounting Directions
9 -12
9.9 Stop Position Reference Signal Details
9.9 Stop Position Reference Signal Details

The stop position reference input signal circuit, which controls the direction of the Magnetic Sensor orientation,
is the same as for the sequence input signal.
J D1 to D12 (Stop Position Reference Signal)

C1−36
Bit 7
The circuit operates when pins 19 to 30 of 1CN are turned ON.
D Use these stop position reference signals when performing user-set position stop control (incremental
operation) using Magnetic Sensor orientation.
D Stop position references are sent externally, taking the load shaft external home position to be 0.
D Select the position references as either 12-bit binary or 3-digit BCD.
Incremental Binary Sign: 1 bit −2047
2047 pulses to 2047 pulses
Data: 11 bits (−000 to 7FF hexadecimal)
BCD Sign: 1 bit −θ
θ to +θ
Data: 3 digits (11 bits) (−799 to 799 decimal)
D When the sign bit is ON, the sign is negative, and when the sign bit is OFF, the sign is positive.
D θ is determined using the sum of the 3-digit BCD data and the BCD stop position reference resolution
C3-12 (PBCD). The following equation must be satisfied, θ < 360_.
D The relationship between the reference signals and the number of pulses is shown in the following
table.
Signal 1CN Pin Number Binary BCD
With Sign With Sign
D1 19 1 1
D2 20 2 2
D3 21 4 4
D4 22 8 8
D5 23 16 10
D6 24 32 20
D7 25 64 40
D8 26 128 80
D9 27 256 100
D10 28 512 200
D11 29 1024 400
D12 30 Sign Sign
D If using signed binary, the meaning of the signal will depend on the sign (+ or −). If the sign is positive,
the total number of bit pulses input is added:
0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 9
: : : :
256+ 64 + 8 + 1 = 329
If the sign is negative, the negative of sum of the number of bit pulses input is used:
− (256 + 64 + 3 + 1) = −329
D Binary references cannot be made above 180_. For BCD references, references above 180_ are pos-
sible, depending on the setting in BCD stop position reference resolution C2-12 (PBCD), to a maximum
of ±360_.
9 -13
9.10.1 Fixed Position Stopping Operation Using the Magnetic Sensor
9.10 Functions
This section explains in detail the Magnetic Sensor orientation control mode functions.
IMPORTANT Orientation Control Application Precautions

In the following cases, be sure to adjust the tuneup and parameters before using the orientation function.
S When using the orientation function for the first time after mounting the inverter to the machine
S When replacing the Motor or Encoder
S When changing the wiring between devices
For details on the tuneup, refer to the adjustment procedure.
This section explains the Magnetic Sensor system fixed position stopping operation and user-set position
stopping operation.
9.10.1 Fixed Position Stopping Operation Using the Magnetic Sensor
When the orientation signal is input while the motor is rotating (or while the motor is stopped), the load
shaft immediately decelerates (or accelerates) to the orientation speed that has been set.
After attaining the set speed, the motor rotates until the Magnet and the center of the Magnetic Sensor are
aligned according to the servo loop, which uses the motor encoder signal from the point that the load shaft
Magnet passes the stop position, and stops at the fixed position using the Magnetic Sensor signal. The ori-
entation completion signal (ORE) is output at the same time.
After orientation has been completed, the servo loop will still continue to operate unless the orientation
completion signal is turned OFF, so even if external force is applied to the load shaft, the shaft will not slip
easily from the positioning point.
The timing chart for the positioning operation is shown in the following diagram.
Operation signal
(FWD or REV) ON
Orientation signal ON
(ORT)
(ORE)
Orientation speed
Operation time
Speed
( Reference)
0
( Actual speed)
Position signal (for control)

(Magnetic Sensor output)
(a) Stopping at Specified Position when Motor is Rotating
Operation signal
(FWD or REV)
ON
9 Orientation signal
(ORT) ON
Orientation completion signal
(ORE)
Operation time
Speed
( Reference)
( Actual speed) 0

(b) Stopping at Specified Position when Motor is Stopped

Note: If there is no slip in the gear mechanism and the parameters have been set correctly, the
motor will stop smoothly using the servo loop.
Fig 9.16 Positioning Operation
9 -14
9.10 Functions
9.10.2 User-set Position Stop Control Using Incremental Operations

Incremental positioning is used when positioning to a new stop position that adds to the current stop posi-
tion a specified amount of travel rotation (i.e., angle).
If an incremental signal is input and an orientation signal is input again after fixed positioning has been
completed, the shaft stops at the new stop position according to the servo loop and a completion signal is
output at the same time.
In this mode, the shaft advances by the specified rotation travel amount only whenever an orientation sig-
nal is input.
The timing chart for the incremental positioning operation is shown in the following diagram.

Orientation signal (ORT) ON ON ON
Incremental signal (INC) ABS INC ON
Orientation completion signal (ORE) ON ON ON
Speed
( Reference)
( Actual speed) 0

0 Fixed position stop position

Position
( Reference)
( Actual speed)
Incremental operation
Note: If performing incremental positioning, make sure that the position does not slip while the orientation signal
is turned OFF. If the position slips, stop position accuracy may be lost.
Fig 9.17 Incremental Positioning
To use user-set position stop control, select the stop position reference using control constant bit 7 of C1-36
(SEL1).
When bit 7 of C1-36 is set to ON, the stop position reference is enabled and user-set position stop can be
used during orientation control. Normally, user-set position stop is used as a digital speed reference, so the
standard setting is OFF. When bit 7 is OFF, fixed position stop control is used.
C1−36
Bit 7
9 -15
9.11 Magnetic Sensor Orientation Control Mode Adjustment

Procedure
Adjust the Magnetic Sensor orientation according to the following flowchart. Be sure to perform the following
adjustments if the Motor, Inverter, or Encoder is replaced.
Turn ON the power supply. Initial Settings: Change Constants Using Digital Operator
S Turn OFF the orientation selection (bit 0) of selection signal 4 (C1-39).
Initial settings S Set the sensor signal standardization angle (C3-20).
S Turn OFF the tuneup operation selection (bit 4) of orientation selection
signal 1 (C3-22).
Is gear ratio NO
setting correct? Gear Ratio Constants
S C1-27: Gearbox ratio (H)
YES 0.0400 to 2.5000
Adjust controller gear S C1-28: Gearbox ratio (M)
ratio constant. S C1-29: Gearbox ratio (L)
Rotate the load shaft forwards at

100 to 300 rotations/min.
Is motor
speed U1-01 dis- NO
playing forward
rotation?
YES Turn OFF bit 7 of C3-22. Input Signal Check
Turn ON bit 7 of C3-22.
Select H gear.
Orientation signal is lit.
Turn ON orientation signal (ORT). Tuneup Operation
Orientation signal
Tuneup incomplete error
(AL-70) is displayed. STOP Key and
RESET Key 60 min−1
10 min−1
Press the STOP Key and RESET Do not hold the key FWD
Load shaft speed0
Key simultaneously. down. REV
Note: During tuneup, the orientation completion signal (ORE) is not
Rotate motor output.
NO
forwards. Does load
shaft stop at home Load Shaft Home Position
position?
Perform error diagnosis Orientation signal
YES and correct error.
(When 0 < P1 < P3 < P2)
9 Select control constant display for
load shaft home position (C3-01).
Home position data 0 P1 P2 P3
ENTER Key
Set the home position data,
and press the ENTER Key.
FWD
Load shaft speed 0
REV
Shaft stops at new home position.
P2
P3
Load shaft
stop position P1
Does shaft NO
stop at correct
position? 0
YES
(1)
9 -16
9.11 Magnetic Sensor Orientation Control Mode Adjustment Procedure

(1) If a malfunction occurs during tuneup, reset the system, and them per-
form the tuneup operation again.
Tuneup completed. (Bit 4 of C3-22 turned ON.)
Turn OFF orientation signal (ORT). S Turn ON tuneup operation selection (C3-22 bit 4).
Adjust Control Constants
Tuneup completed. Adjust Virtual Stop Position Offset (C3-13)
(Bit 4 of C3-22 turned ON.) S Perform adjustment so that final run-on is not delayed, and there is no
overshoot.
Offset small
Adjust control constants accord-
ing to machine specifications. Offset large
Stop position
Time
S If the load inertia changes, the characteristics will also change, so check
the characteristics for the H, M, and L gears individually.
H Gear Selection
Is stopping NO
smooth?
S If the ORE signal is not output close to the stop position, increase the
gain.
YES
Adjust virtual stop posi- S If the shaft load is unsteady even if the ORE signal is output, reduce the
tion offset (C3-13). gain.
Is position
cient, or is there Check M Gear Selection
hunting? S Interface input status (U1-09)
Select M gear. Lit when M gear is selected

S If the ORE signal is not output close to the stop position, increase the
Turn ON orientation signal (ORT). gain.
S If the shaft load is unsteady even if the ORE signal is output, reduce the
gain.
Is position YES
accuracy insuffi-
cient, or is there

9
(2)
9 -17

(2) Note: If there is no L gear selection in the machine specifications, omit
the following L gear adjustment procedure.
Select L gear. Check L Gear Selection


Lit when L gear is selected.
Is position
accuracy insuffi- YES Adjust Proportional Gain (C3-04)
cient, or is there S If the ORE signal is not output close to the stop position, increase the
hunting? gain.
NO proportional gain (C3-04). S If the shaft load is unsteady even if the ORE signal is output, reduce the
gain.
Adjustment completed.
9 -18
10
Control Constants
The control constants of the VS-626M5 can be changed using the Digital
Operator (option). The control constants includes user constants (C1), op-
tional encoder orientation constants (C2), and magnetic sensor orientation
constants (C3).
10.1 User Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -2

10.2 Encoder Orientation Constants . . . . . . . . . 10 -8
10.3 Magnetic Sensor Orientation Constants . 10 -11
10
10-1
Control Constants
10.1 User Constants

The user constants are listed in the following table.
Table 10.1 User Constants

Con- Name Explanation Change Unit Standard Upper
stant *1 Setting Limit/
No. Lower
Limit
Speed Control Speed control proportional gain when high-speed gear is selected (i.e., 255
Proportional
p MGR and LGR are OFF)) or when high-speed
g p windingg is selected (i.e.,
( ,
C1 01
C1-01 G i (H)
Gain CHW iis OFF)
OFF). IIncreasing
i KVHN increases
i rigidity
i idi . Yes %/Hz 30
KVHN 1
Torque reference P = KVHN × Speed tolerance
Speed Control Speed control integral time constant when high-speed gear is selected 1000
Integral
g Time ((i.e.,, MGR and LGR are OFF)) or when high-speed
g p windingg is selected
C1 02
C1-02 (H) (i CHW iis OFF)
(i.e., OFF). RReducing
d i τVHN quickens
i k response. Yes ms 600
τVHN 5
Torque reference I = Torque reference P × Time/τVHN
Speed Control Speed control proportional gain when low-speed is selected (i.e., MGR
Proportional or LGR is ON) or when low-speed winding is selected (i.e., CHW is 255
C1 03
C1-03 Gain (M, L) ON). Yes %/Hz 30
KVLN Increasing KVLN increases rigidity.
1
Torque reference P = KVLN × Speed tolerance
Speed Control Speed control integral time constant when low-speed gear is selected
Integral Time (i.e., MGR or LGR is ON) or when low-speed winding is selected (i.e., 1000
C1 04
C1-04 Constant (M, L) CHW is ON). Yes ms 600
τVLN Reducing τVLN quickens response.
5
Torque reference I = Torque reference P × Time/τVLN
Speed Control Speed proportional gain when high-speed gear is selected (i.e., MGR and 255
Proportional
p LGR are OFF)) or when high-speed
( , CHW is
C1 05
C1-05 G i (H)
Gain OFF) in
i servo moded (i.e.,
(i SV isi ON).
ON) Yes %/Hz 40
KVHS 1
Torque reference P = KVHS × Speed tolerance
Speed Control Speed control integral time constant when high-speed gear is selected 1000
Integral
g Time ((i.e.,, MGR and LGR are OFF)) or when high-speed
g p windingg is selected
C1 06
C1-06 C
Constant (H) (i CHW iis OFF) iin servo mode
(i.e., d (i.e.,
(i SV iis ON)
ON). Yes ms 100
τVHS 5
Torque reference I = Torque reference P × Time/τVHS
Speed Control Speed control proportional gain when low-speed gear is selected (i.e., 255
Proportional
p MGR or LGR is ON)) or when low-speed
p windingg is selected (i.e.,
( , CHW
C1 07
C1-07 G i (M
Gain (M, L) i ON) in
is i servo mode
d (i.e.,
(i SV is i ON).
ON) Yes %/Hz 40
KVLS 1
Torque reference P = KVLS × Speed tolerance
Speed Control Speed control integral time constant when low-speed gear is selected 1000
Integral
g Time ((i.e.,, MGR or LGR is ON)) or when low-speed
( ,
C1 08
C1-08 C
Constant (M,
(M L) CHW is i ON) in
i servo mode
d (i.e.,
(i SV iis ON)
ON). Yes ms 100
τVLS 5
Torque reference I = Torque reference P × Time/τVLS
Torque Refer- Time constant of low-pass filter for torque reference for gear chattering
ence noise. Increasing the time constant may cause run-away depending on 5.0
C1 09
C1-09 Filter Time conditions
conditions. Yes ms 10
1.0
Constant
0.0
τT
Soft Start Time Setting of time required for soft starter. Variations in speed references are 180.0
10 C1 10
C1-10
Setting
g TSFS suppressed
pp
time
accordingg to the speed
p
i ffrom at rest state iis obtained
changeg ratio of the set time. Startingg
b i d as ffollows:
ll Yes sec 01
0.1
0.1
Starting time = TSFS × Speed reference (%)/100
Speed Refer- Offset adjustment to analog reference. Set the value of U1-15 when oper- 80
ence Offset Ad-
Ad ating using speed reference 0 in C1
C1-11.
11.
C1 11*2
C1-11 justment Value Yes --- 0
SCOFS −80
Motor Speed Constant to adjust motor speed over analog speed reference. When the 1.1000
Adjustment Val-
Val value of SADJ increases, speed increases, and when the value of SADJ
C1 12*2
C1-12 ue decreases, speed decreases. Disabled when using digital speed reference. Yes --- 1 0000
1.0000
SADJ 0.9000
10-2
10.1 User Constants
Table 10.1 User Constants (continued)

No. Lower
Limit
C1-13 --- --- ---
to --- --- ---
C1-15 ---
Speedometer Constant to finely adjust the speed signal so that the actual speed and 1.50
Signal Adjust- speedometer display agree. When the value of SMADJ increases,
C1-16
C1 16*2 Yes --- 1 00
1.00
ment Value speedometer indication also increases. A 10-V output is the standard
0.90
SMADJ value at rated speed (C1-26).
Load Meter Sig- This constant makes fine adjustments so that the torque reference and 1.50
nal Adjustment the load meter display agree. When the value of LMADJ increases, meter
C1 17*2
C1-17 Yes --- 1 00
1.00
Value needle indication also increases. A 10-V output is the standard value at
0.90
LMADJ 120% of rated torque for 30 min.
Load Factor Sets the load meter full scale value when continuous torque is taken to 500
C1-18
C1 18*2 Meter Full Scale be 100%.
100% The full scale value depends on machine specifications
specifications. Yes % 200
LMFS 120
Zero Speed Detection level of zero-speed signal (ZSPD). Standard setting is 30 60
C1 19
C1-19 Detection Level min−1. Yes min−1 30
ZSLVL 3
Speed Agree Detection width of speed-agree signal at rated speed. Standard setting is 50
Signal Detection 15%.
C1 20
C1-20 Yes % 15
Width
10
AGRBD
Speed Detection Speed detection signal (SDET) activation level used for winding selec- 100
C1 21
C1-21 Signal Level tion Expressed as a percent of the motor rated speed (C1-26).
tion. (C1 26) Yes % 10
SDLVL 0
Speed Detection Hysteresis width adjustment level of speed signal detection. During 10.00
Signal Detection acceleration, SDLVL + SDHYS is detected. During deceleration,
C1 22
C1-22 Yes % 1 00
1.00
Width SDLVL − SDHYS is detected. Expressed as a percent of the motor rated
0.00
SDHYS speed (C1-26).
Torque Detec- Torque detection signal (TDET) activation level used to detect abnormal 120
tion Signal Op- loads. Expressed as a percent of the 30-minute rated torque. Hysteresis
C1 23
C1-23 Yes % 10
eration Level width is limited to ±10%.
5
TDLVL
External Control Torque limit using external torque limit signals (TLL and TLH). 120
C1 24
C1-24 Torque Limit Expressed as a percent of the 30
30-minute
minute rated torque.
torque Yes % 10
Level TLEXT 5
Motor Code Select applicable motor from the motor codes stored in Inverter memo- 1FF
Selection MTR ry. Expressed in 3-digit hexadecimal (0 to F). When the motor code is
C1 25
C1-25 No --- ---
changed, be sure to turn OFF the power once; and then turn it ON again
001
after verifying that the Digital Operator display has gone OFF.
Rated Speed Rated speed set according to load machine specifications. Must not be Max.
C1-26
C1 26 S100 greater than the motor maximum speed.
g p When speed
p reference is 100%,, No min−1 Max. speed
this
hi speedd is
i applied.
li d speed
100
Gear Ratio 1 Gear ratio determined by mechanical specifications. This parameter is 2.5000
C1 27
C1-27 (H) valid when H gear is selected (i.e.,
(i e HGR and MGR are OFF).
OFF) No --- 1 0000
1.0000
RHGR Gear ratio = Load shaft speed ÷ Motor speed 0.0400
Gear Ratio 2 Gear ratio determined by mechanical specifications. This parameter is 2.5000
C1 28
C1-28 (M) valid when M gear is selected (i.e.,
(i e MGR is ON).
ON) No --- 1 0000
1.0000
RMGR Gear ratio = Load shaft speed ÷ Motor speed 0.0400
C1 29
C1-29
Gear Ratio 3 (L)
RLGR
Gear ratio determined by mechanical specifications. This parameter is
valid when L gear is selected (i.e.,
(i e LGR is ON).
ON) No --- 1 0000
1.0000
2.5000
10
Gear ratio = Load shaft speed ÷ Motor speed 0.0400
Motor Flux Set value of motor flux lower limit level at reduction control 100
Lower Limit
C1 30
C1-30 No % 15
Level
15
φWL
10-3
Control Constants

No. Lower
Limit
Servo Mode Motor flux level when high-speed gear is selected (i.e., MGR and LGR 100
C1 31
C1-31 Flux Level (H) are OFF) or when high-speed
high speed winding is selected (i.e.,
(i e CHW is OFF) in No % 70
φSVH servo mode (i.e., SV is OFF). 30
Servo Mode Base speed ratio when high-speed gear is selected (i.e., MGR and LGR 5.00
Base Speed
p Ra- are OFF)) or when high-speed
( , CHW is OFF)) in
C1 32
C1-32 tio
i (H) servo mode
d (i.e.,
(i SV iis ON)
ON). No --- 1 00
1.00
RBSH 1.00
Base speed (Servo) = RBSH × Base speed (Motor)
Servo Mode Motor flux level when low-speed gear is selected (i.e., MGR or LGR is 100
Flux Level (M, low-speed
ON) or when low speed winding is selected (i.e., CHW is ON) in servo
C1 33
C1-33 L) mode (i.e., SV is ON). No % 70
φSVL 30
Servo Mode Base speed ratio when low-speed gear is selected (i.e., MGR or LGR is 5.00
Base Speed
p Ra- ON)) or when low-speed
( , CHW is ON)) in servo
C1 34
C1-34 tio
i (M
(M, L) mode
d (i.e.,
(i SV iis ON)
ON). No --- 1 00
1.00
RBSL 1.00
Base speed (Servo) = RBSL × Base speed (Motor)
Zero-speed Time for generating braking force after deceleration and zero-speed is 100
C1 35
C1-35 Braking Time reached to stop
stop. No sec 0
TBLK 0
Signal Selec- Selections for multi-functional signals and other selections.*3
tions 1 S Bits 1 and 0: 6CN pin 11
SEL1*4 00: TLL 01: −−−
10: INC 11: −−−
S Bit 2: 6CN pin 10
0: TLH 1: −−−
C1-36 S Bit 3: 6CN pin 12 No --- 00000000 ---
0: SSC 1: SV
S Bit 4: 6CN pin 15*2
0: PPI 1: LM10
S Bit 7: 1CN 12-bit digital reference signal selection*2
0: Digital speed reference
1: Orientation control stop position reference
Signal Selec- Selections for multi-functional signals and other selections.*3
tions 2 S Bits 1 and 0: RUN mode selection
SEL2*4 00: Operation by speed reference
11: Operation by Digital Operator
S Bit 2: 6CN pin 6
C1-37 0: RDY 1: EMG2 No --- 01000000 ---
S Bits 7 and 6: Digital speed reference selection*2
00: 2-digit BCD
01: 12-bit binary
10: 3-digit BCD
11: Internal speed setting
10
10-4
10.1 User Constants

No. Lower
Limit
Signal Selec- Signal selections for control mode and level
tions 3 S Bits 1 and 0: Load meter filter selection*2
SEL3*4 00: 2-ms filter
01: 10-ms filter
10: 100-ms filter
11: 500-ms filter
S Bit 2: Torque limit auto judgement
0: Speed reference gain switching OFF
1: Speed reference gain switching ON
S Bit 3: Sensitivity switching selection when using servo mode*2
0: Not judged
1: Judged
C1-38 No --- 00000000 ---
S Bit 4: Excessive speed deviation protection (AL-32) operation threshold
0: 1/2 or less of speed reference
1: 1/4 or less of speed reference
S Bit 5: Speed limiting level*2
0: 105% of rated reference
1: 110% of rated reference
S Bit 6: Speed agree signal (AGR) output at zero speed
0: Output (AGR: closed)
1: Not output (AGR: open)
S Bit 7: Load meter adjustment selection*2
0: 120% of rated output signal for 30 min.
1: 100% of continuous rated output signal
Signal Selec- Signal selections for control mode and level
tions 4 S Bit 0: Orientation control method
SEL4*4 0: Encoder
C1-39 No --- 00000000 ---
1: Magnetic sensor
When the setting has changed, turn the control power supply OFF then
ON again.
Signal Selec- Control mode signal selections
tions 5 S Bit 1 and 0: Operation delay time for excessive speed deviation protec-
SEL5*4 tion (AL-32)
00: 0 s 01: 0.3 s
10: 0.4 s 11: 0.5 s
S Bit 2: Torque detection signal (TDET) output
0: Standard output
1: ON for acceleration/deceleration
S Bit 3: NC orientation
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled. Even if orientation signal (ORT) is input, the
Inverter will not perform orientation. The rotating
C1-40 direction of motor is determined according to the polar- No --- 00000000 ---
ity of speed reference.
S Bit 4: Load meter output standard selection*2
0: Continuous rated output
1: 30 min. rated output
S Bit 5: Servo mode speed reference gain selection (Enabled when bit 3 of
C1-38 is ON.)*2
0: Analog speed reference, 10 V/5,000 rotations/min.
1: Set the read gain of the analog speed reference using 10
C1-49 or C1-50.
S Bit 7: Load fault detection selection (AL-33)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
10-5
Control Constants

No. Lower
Limit
Internal Speed Set values when using internal speed references using digital speed refer-
Reference Set ences. The correspondence with reference inputs (1CN) are as shown 100.00
C1-41 Values below, and are given as percentages over the rated speed (C1-26).
to SPD1 to SPD8 Pin 19: SPD1 Pin 23: SPD5 No % 0 00
0.00
C1-48*2 Pin 20: SPD2 Pin 24: SPD6
Pin 21: SPD3 Pin 25: SPD7 0.00
Pin 22: SPD4 Pin 26: SPD8
Servo Mode Set value of the analog speed reference read gain in servo mode. (En-
Speed Refer- abled when C1-38 bit 3 is ON and C1-40 bit 5 is ON.) Set the ratio of the
ence Gain number of rotations when the analog speed reference is 10 V over the 100.00
C1-49 SVGAIN1 and rated speed (C1-26).
to SVGAIN2 A l speedd reference
Analog f 10 V/(S100 x SVGAIN/100) min i −11. No % 100 00
100.00
C1-50*2
Select C1-49 and C1-50 using the DAS signal (C6N-5).
0.00
DAS = OFF: C1-49 (SVGAIN1)
DAS = ON: C1-50 (SVGAIN2)
C1-51 --- ---
to --- --- --- ---
C1-53
Speedmeter Sig- Offset adjustment value for speedometer signal. Outputs speedometer 200
nal Offset Ad-
Ad signal after subtracting from SMOFS. 5.4
C1 54*2
C1-54 justment Value Yes mV 0
SMOFS −200
Load Meter Sig- Offset adjustment value for load meter signal. Outputs speedometer 200
nal Offset Ad-
Ad signal after subtracting from LMOFS. 5.4
C1 55*2
C1-55 justment Value Yes mV 0
LMOFS −200
Inverter Capac- Inverter capacity setting. (The setting is already made at factory prior
ity Selection to shipment.)
UNITNO
200 V class
CIMR
23P7 25P5 27P5 2011 2015 2018 2022 2030 2037
−M5
Set value 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C
C1-56 No --- --- ---
400 V class
CIMR 45P5 47P5 4011 4015 4018 4022 4030 4037 4045
−M5
Set value 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D
When the setting has changed, turn the control power supply OFF for
3 seconds or longer then ON again.
Signal Selec- Control mode signal selections
tions 6 S Bit 0: Fault record clear selection
SEL6*4 0: Disabled
1: Clears next time control power is turned ON.
(Automatically returns to 0.)
C1-57 No --- 00000000 ---
S Bit 4 and 5: Emergency stop fault (AL-21) detection time selection *5
00: 10 sec
01: 20 sec
10: 40 sec
11: Disabled
10 Signal Selec-
tions 7
Control mode signal selections
S Bit 0: YENET1200 card encoder selection
SEL7*4 0: Motor encoder (2CN)
C1-58 No --- 00000000 ---
1: Load shaft encoder (8CN)
ON again.
C1-59 --- --- --- --- --- ---
10-6
10.1 User Constants

No. Lower
Limit
Magnetic Pole Adjusts the position of the magnetic pole. Sets the difference between the
Positioning magnetic position and the encoder origin signal using the electrical angle 8191
C1 60
C1-60 Value*6 (360_ el = 8192). Set the C1-60 value on the terminal box. No --- 4096
When the setting has changed, turn the control power supply OFF then −8192
ON again.
Phase-C Pulse Sets the pulse width of the motor encoder origin signal (phase C). Set the 100
Width*6 C1-61 value listed on the terminal box.
C1 61
C1-61 No Pulse 7
0
ON again.
*1. Change (change during operation) column: Indicates whether the constant can be changed during inverter operation.
Yes: Constant can be changed during inverter operation; No: Constant cannot be changed during inverter operation
*2. This constant is enabled for stand-alone drives (M5A) only. Do not change the set value for NC system s (M5N).
*3. Connector pin numbers are for stand-alone drives.
*4. In signal selection descriptions, 0 stands for “ ” and 1 for “ .”
*5. This function is available in the following software.
VSM200XXX: VSM200112 or later
*6. Constants only for IPM motors (with syncs using flush-type permanent magnets). C1-60 and C1-61 are not displayed when the
software for controlling an induction motor is used.
10
10-7
Control Constants
10.2 Encoder Orientation Constants

The encoder orientation constants are listed in the following table.
Table 10.2 Encoder Orientation Constants

No. Lower
Limit
Load Shaft Position- Mechanical origin of the load shaft. Set difference from encoder ori- 4095
C2 01
C2-01 ing Origin gin signal (phase C) pulses.
pulses Yes Pulse 0
PORG 0
Position Control Position control proportional gain when high-speed gear is selected 99
Proportional
p Gain ((i.e.,, MGR and LGR are OFF)) or when high-speed
g p windingg is se-
C2 02
C2-02 (H) l
lected d (i
(i.e., CHW iis OFF)
OFF). IIncreasing
i KPH increases
i rigidity.
i idi Yes 1/s 15
KPH 1
Speed reference (pps) = KPH × Position tolerance (pulses)
Position Control Position control proportional gain when medium-speed gear is se- 99
Proportional Gain lected (i.e., MGR is ON). Increasing KPM increases rigidity.
C2 03
C2-03 (M) Yes 1/s 15
Speed reference (pps) = KPM × Position tolerance (pulses) 1
KPM
Position Control Position control proportional gain when low-speed gear is selected 99
Proportional
p Gain ((i.e.,, LGR is ON)) or when low-speed
( , CHW
C2 04
C2-04 (L) i ON)
is ON). IIncreasing
i KPL increases
i rigidity.
i idi Yes 1/s 15
KPL 1
Speed reference (pps) = KPL × Position tolerance (pulses)
Speed Control Pro- Speed control proportional gain when high-speed gear is selected 255
portional Gain (H)
p ( ) ((i.e.,, MGR and LGR are OFF)) or when high-speed
g p windingg is se-
C2 05
C2-05 KVHO l
lected d (i
(i.e., CHW iis OFF) iin orientation
i i controll (i.e.,
(i ORT iis ON)ON). Yes %/Hz 40
1
Torque reference P = KVHO × Speed tolerance
Speed Control Inte- Speed control integral time constant when high-speed gear is selected 1000
gral Time Constant
g ((i.e.,, MGR and LGR are OFF)) or when high-speed
g p windingg is se-
C2 06
C2-06 (H) l
lected d (i
i i controll (i.e.,
(i ORT iis ON)ON). Yes ms 100
τVHO 5
Torque reference I = Torque reference P × Time/τVHO
Speed Control Pro- Speed control proportional gain when low-speed gear is selected (i.e., 255
portional Gain (M,
p ( , MGR or LGR is ON)) or when high-speed
( ,
C2 07
C2-07 L) CHW iis ON) iin orientation
i i controll (i.e.,
(i ORT is i ON).
ON) Yes %/Hz 40
KVLO 1
Torque reference P = KVLO × Speed tolerance
Speed Control Inte- Speed control integral time constant when low-speed gear is selected 1000
gral Time Constant
g ((i.e.,, MGR or LGR is ON)) or when low-speed
p windingg is selected
C2 08
C2-08 (M L)
(M, (i CHW iis ON) iin orientation
(i.e., i i controll (i.e.,
(i ORT is i ON).
ON) Yes ms 100
τVLO 5
Torque reference I = Torque reference P × Time/τVLO
Positioning Comple- Detection width for outputting completion signal when the load shaft 200
C2 09
C2-09 tion Detection Width approaches the stop reference position
position. Detection width is stop refer-
refer No Pulse 5
ZFIN ence position ±ZFIN. 0
Positioning Comple- Set value for canceling completion signal when the load shaft is 200
C2 10
C2-10 tion Cancel Width moved after completion signal is output.
output Cancel width is stop refer-
refer No Pulse 10
ZCAN ence position ±ZCAN. ZFIN
Orientation Speed Speed applied (after detecting encoder origin) until changing to the 600
C2 11
C2-11 SORT servo loop during orientation.
orientation No min−1 400
40
BCD Stop Position Angle set value per minimum increment of stop position BCD com- 180.0
10 C2 12
C2-12 Reference Resolu
tion PBCD
Resolu- mand
mand. No Deg
Deg. 10
1.0
0.5
Virtual Stop Stop position offset for smoothing stop operation when the servo loop 100
C2 13
C2-13 Position Offset is used.
used When ZFIN is reached,
reached offset becomes 00. No Pulse 0
PIMG 0
Orientation Speed Speed changing ratio for gradually reducing orientation speed to 100
C2 14
C2-14 Changing Ratio reduce gear noise when switching from orientation speed to servo No --- 0
RSOR loop speed. 0
Starting Soft Start Soft start time for accelerating from at rest state to orientation speed. 50
C2 15
C2-15 Time Use this parameter to reduce gear noise at starting.
starting Acceleration rate No ms 0
TSFO is (500 min−1)/sec. 0
10-8
10.2 Encoder Orientation Constants
Table 10.2 Encoder Orientation Constants (continued)

No. Lower
Limit
Flux Level Flux level at completion of orientation. Motor noise and torque
C2-16 No % 60 100
φORT changes in proportion to flux level.
Orientation Speed Reduction coefficient to set orientation speed in proportion to the 32767
Reduction Coeffi- traveling angle for incremental positioning.
C2 17
C2-17 No --- 0
cient
0
KSOR
C2-18 --- --- ---
to --- --- ---
C2-21 ---
Orientation Control Control mode setting signals, e.g., for specifying the direction of
Signal Selections 1 rotation in orientation control.
SEL-E1*2 S Bits 1 and 0: Positioning rotation direction
00: Automatically selected rotation direction
01: Same direction as the forward/reverse RUN signal
10: Fixed rotation direction
11: Automatically selected rotation direction ---
S Bit 2: Selection for fixed rotation direction
0: Forward rotation of load shaft
1: Reverse rotation of load shaft
S Bit 3: Stop position reference code
0: 12-bit binary
1: 33-digit
digit BCD
C2 22
C2-22 No --- 11000000
S Bit 4: Tuneup operation
0: Tuneup enabled
1: Tuneup disabled
S Bit 5: Incremental positioning reference point
0: Previous stop reference position
1: Current stop position
S Bit 6: Encoder selection ---
0: Load shaft encoder
1: Motor encoder
S Bit 7: Rotation direction of motor and load shaft
(automatically set at tuneup)
0: Reverse
1: Same
Orientation Control Dither signal pattern and gain
Signal Selections 2 S Bit 0: DB selection upon orientation completion
SEL-E2*2 0: Disabled
1: Stops by braking torque at orientation completion
---
S Bit 1: Dither signal pattern
0: 6 steps (83 Hz)
1: 2 steps (250 Hz)
S Bits 4,, 3 and 2: Dither signal
g level (H)
( ) (i.e.,
( , MGR and LGR are OFF))
C2 23
C2-23 000 0.0%
000: 0 0% 011:
011 7.5%
7 5% No --- 00000000
110: 15.0% 001: 2.5%
100: 10.0% 111: 17.5%
010: 5.0% 101: 12.5%
S Bits 7, 6 and 5: Dither signal level (L) (i.e., MGR or LGR is ON) ---
000: 0% 011: 3%
110: 6% 001: 1%
100: 4%
010: 2%
111: 7%
101: 5% 10
10-9
Control Constants
Table 10.2 Encoder Orientation Constants (continued)

No. Lower
Limit
Orientation Con- Orientation control parameters
trol Signal Selec- S Bit 3: Speed control mode selection when positioning *3
tions 3 0: P control
1: PI control ---
SEL-E3*2
S Bits 5 and 4: Seed reference differential compensation gain
00: 10
C2 24
C2-24 01: 15 No --- 10000000
10: 20
11: 30
S Bits 7 and 6: Flux level for positioning servo loop control
00: 100% ---
01: 80%
10: 60%
11: 40%
*3. This function available in the following software.
VSM2051XX: VSM205120 or later
10
10 -10
10.3 Magnetic Sensor Orientation Constants

The magnetic sensor orientation constants are listed in the following table.
Table 10.3 Magnetic Sensor Orientation Constants
No. Lower
Limit
Load Shaft Position- Mechanical origin of the load shaft. Set difference from magnetic 2.00
C3 01
C3-01 ing Origin sensor signal in degrees.
degrees Yes Deg
Deg. 0 00
0.00
PORG −2.00
Position Control Pro- Position control proportional gain when high-speed gear is selected
portional Gain (H) (i.e., MGR and LGR are OFF) or when high-speed winding is se- 99
C3 02
C3-02 KPH lected (i.e., CHW is OFF). Yes 1/sec 15
Increasing KPH increases rigidity.
1
Speed reference (pps) = KPH × Position tolerance (pulses)
Position Control Pro- Position control proportional gain when medium-speed gear is se- 99
portional Gain (M)
p ( ) lected ((i.e.,, MGR is ON).) Increasingg KPM increases rigidity.
g y
C3 03
C3-03 Yes 1/sec 15
KPM Speed reference (pps) = KPM × Position tolerance
1
(pulses)
Position Control Pro- Position control proportional gain when low-speed gear is selected
portional Gain (L) (i.e., LGR is ON) or when low-speed winding is selected (i.e., CHW 99
C3 04
C3-04 KPL is ON). Yes 1/sec 15
Increasing KPL increases rigidity.
1
Speed reference (pps) = KPL × Position tolerance (pulses)
Speed Control Pro- Speed control proportional gain when high-speed gear is selected 255
portional Gain (H)
p ( ) ((i.e.,, MGR and LGR are OFF)) or when high-speed
g p windingg is se-
C3 05
C3-05 l
lected d (i
i i controll (i.e.,
(i ORT iis ON)ON). Yes %/Hz 40
KVHO
1
Torque reference P = KVHO × Speed tolerance
Speed Control Inte- Speed control integral time constant when high-speed gear is se- 1000
gral Time Constant
g lected ((i.e.,, MGR and LGR are OFF)) or when high-speed
g p windingg is
C3 06
C3-06 (H) selected
l d (i
i i controll (i.e.,
(i ORT iis ON)
ON). Yes ms 100
5
τVHO Torque reference I = Torque reference P × Time /τVHO
Speed Control Pro- Speed control proportional gain when low-speed gear is selected 255
portional Gain (M,
p ( , L)) ((i.e.,, MGR or LGR is ON)) or when low-speed
C3 07
C3-07 (i CHW iis ON) iin orientation
(i ORT is i ON).
ON) Yes %/Hz 40
KVLO
1
Torque reference P = KVLO × Speed tolerance
Speed Control Inte- Speed control integral time constant when low-speed gear is selected 1000
gral Time Constant
g ((i.e.,, MGR or LGR is ON)) or when low-speed
C3 08
C3-08 (M L)
(M, (i CHW iis ON) iin orientation
(i ORT is i ON).
ON) Yes ms 100
5
τVLO Torque reference I = Torque reference P × Time /τVLO
Positioning Comple- Detection width for outputting completion signal when the load shaft 20.0
C3 09
C3-09 tion Detection Width approaches the stop reference position
position. No Deg
Deg. 05
0.5
ZFIN Detection width is stop reference position ±ZFIN. 0.0
Positioning Comple- Set value for canceling completion signal when the load shaft is 20.0
C3 10
C3-10 tion Cancel Width moved after completion signal is output.
output No Deg
Deg. 10
1.0
ZCAN Cancel width at stop reference position ±ZCAN. ZFIN
Orientation Speed
p Speed
p applied
pp ((after detecting
g magnetic
g sensor signal)
g ) until changing
g g 600
C3 11
C3-11 SORT t th
to the servo lloop dduring
i orientation.
i t ti No min−1 400
40
BCD Stop Position Completion signal cancel angle per minimum increment for deter- 180.0
C3 12
C3-12 Reference Resolution
PBCD
mining stop position for incremental positioning with BCD com-
mand after stopping at home position.
No Deg
Deg. 10
1.0
0.5 10
Virtual Stop Position Stop position offset for smoothing stop operation when the servo 10.0
C3 13
C3-13 Offset loop is used.
used No Deg
Deg. 00
0.0
PIMG When ZFIN is reached, offset becomes 0. 0
Orientation Speed Speed changing ratio for gradually reducing orientation speed to 100
C3 14
C3-14 Changing Ratio reduce gear noise when switching from orientation speed to servo No --- 0
loop speed. 0
10-11
Control Constants
Table 10.3 Magnetic Sensor Orientation Constants (continued)

No. Lower
Limit
Starting Soft Start Soft start time for accelerating from stop to orientation speed. Use this 50
C3 15
C3-15 Time parameter to reduce gear noise at starting.
starting No ms 0
TSFO Acceleration rate is (500 min−1)/sec. 0
Flux Level Flux level at completion
p of orientation. Motor noise and torque
q 100
C3 16
C3-16 change
h in
i proportion
i to flux
fl level.
l l No --- 60
φORT 15
Orientation Speed Reduction coefficient to set orientation speed in proportion to the 32767
C3 17
C3-17 Reduction Coefficient traveling angle for incremental positioning.
positioning No --- 0
KSOR 0
C3 18
C3-18 --- --- --- --- --- ---
C3 19
C3-19 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Sensor Signal Stan- Angle for standardizing magnetic sensor signal detection sensitivity
dardization Angle θSEN = 180°× Detection range (mm (inches)) ÷ Mounting radius ÷ π 20.0
θSEN Set 20.0 to θSEN when θSEN > 20.0.
C3 20
C3-20 F ddetection
For i range, check
h k the
h specifications
ifi i off the
h magnetizer
i and d No Deg
Deg. 50
5.0
apply the values below:
MG-1378BS (15 mm (0.59 inches)) 5.0
MG-1444S (7 mm (0.28 inches))
C3 21
C3-21 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Orientation Control Control mode setting signals, e.g., for specifying the direction of
Signal Selections 1 rotation in orientation control.
SEL-M1*2 S Bits 1 and 0: Positioning rotation direction
01: Same direction as the forward/reverse run signal
10: Fixed rotation direction
S Bit 2: Selection for fixed rotation direction
0: Forward rotation of load shaft
1: Reverse rotation of load shaft
S Bit 3: Stop position reference code
0: 12-bit binary
C3 22
C3-22 1: 33-digit
digit BCD No --- 11000000 ---
S Bit 4: Tuneup operation
0: Tuneup enabled
1: Tuneup disabled
S Bit 5: Incremental positioning reference point
0: Previous stop reference position
1: Current stop position
S Bit 6: Encoder selection
0: Load shaft encoder
1: Motor encoder
S Bit 7: Rotation direction of motor and load shaft
0: Reverse
1: The same
Orientation Control Dither signal pattern and gain
Signal Selections 2 S Bit 1: Dither signal pattern
SEL-M2*2 0: 6 steps (83 Hz)
1: 2 steps (250 Hz)
S Bits 4, 3, and 2: Dither signal level (H) (i.e., MGR and LGR are OFF)
000: 0.0% 011: 7.5% 110: 15.0%
10 C3 23
C3-23
001: 2.5% 100: 10.0% 111: 17.5%
010: 5.0% 101: 12.5%
No --- 00000000 ---
S Bit 7, 6, and 5: Dither signal level (L) (i.e., MGR or LGR is ON)
000: 0% 011: 3% 110: 6%
001: 1% 100: 4% 111: 7%
010: 2% 101: 5%
10 -12
Table 10.3 Magnetic Sensor Orientation Constants (continued)

No. Lower
Limit
Orientation Control Orientation control parameters
Signal Selections 3 S Bits 5 and 4: Speed reference differential compensation gain
SEL-M3*2 00: 10
01: 15
10: 20
C3 24
C3-24 11: 30 No --- 10000000 ---
S Bits 7 and 6: Flux level for positioning servo loop control
00: 100%
01: 80%
10: 60%
11: 40%
10
10 -13
11
Operating Status Displays
The operating status of the VS-626M5 can be monitored on the Digital Op-
erator (option). The operating status displays include Inverter operation
(U1), optional encoder orientation control (U2), and magnetic sensor orien-
tation control (U3).
11.1 Inverter Operating Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 -2

11.2 Encoder Orientation Control Status . . . . . 11 -3
11.3 Magnetic Sensor Orientation
Control Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 -3
11.4 Miscellaneous Status Displays . . . . . . . . . 11 -4
11
11 -1
11.1 Inverter Operating Status

The status displays when the Inverter is operating are listed in the following table.
Table 11.1 Operating Status Displays for Inverter Operation

No. Signal Name Explanation Unit
U1-01 Motor speed Speed detected by the motor encoder min−1
U1-02 Speed reference Speed control reference. Percentage of the rated speed (C1-26) %
U1-03 Load shaft speed Product of motor speed and gear transmission ratio min−1
U1-04 Torque reference Percentage of 30-minute rating (100%) %
U1-05 −−− −−−−−−−−
Inverter output cur- Detected Inverter output current converted to amperes.
U1-06 A
rent Accuracy: ±3%
U1-07 Output frequency Inverter output current frequency Hz
Operating status signal (at logical level)
U1-08*1 Internal status IRDY EMGL ESP0 YNALM PUVSTS
BB RGM RST RUN CLIM

MD CONFLT CONRDY INTMY INTMC
Sequence input signal ON/OFF status*2
U1-09 Input signal status RDY EMG FWD REV TLH
TLL SSC RST CHW PPI

ORT LGR MGR DAS (CHWA)
Sequence output signal ON/OFF status*2
U1-10 Output signal status ZSPD AGR SDET TDET TLE
ORG ORE CHWE FLT TALM

FC0 FC1 FC2 FC3 FLTL
U1-11 Inverter capacity Inverter unit 30-minute rated capacity kW

Inverter internal
U1-12 Detected Inverter internal temperature (control PC board) °C
temperature
U1-13 Heatsink temperature Detected heatsink temperature of Inverter. Accuracy: ±5°C (±41°F) °C
U1-14*1 DC bus voltage Main circuit capacitor voltage V
Analog speed refer- Conversion value of analog reference used to adjust the speed refer-
U1-15*1
ence A/D converter ence offset.
U1-16 −−− −−−−−−−−
U1-17*1 Phase-U current Detected phase-U current converted from analog to digital
U1-18*1 Phase-W current Detected phase-W current converted from analog to digital
On/OFF status of 12-bit digital reference signal.*2
12-bit digital refer-

U1-19*3 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5
ence signal status
D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
D11 D12
11
U1-20 LED check All LEDs on the Digital Operator light when U1-20 is selected.
U1-21 PROM No. PROM software version number is displayed (lower 5 digits).
* 1. Operating status display data for in-house adjustment.

* 2. The LED segments for ON I/O signals will light.
* 3. Operating status display is enabled for independent drives (M5A) only.
11 -2
11.2 Encoder Orientation Control Status
11.2 Encoder Orientation Control Status

The status displays for encoder orientation control are listed in the following table.
Table 11.2 Operating Status Displays Functions for Encoder Orientation Control
Orientation I/O signal status (See note.)
HGR MGR LGR INC

U2-01 I/O signal status
TUNE
U2-02 −−− −−−−−−−−
Actual position expressed by dividing one rotation by 4096 in refer-

U2-03 Position monitor Pulses
ence to the set origin
Stop reference Stop reference position expressed by dividing one rotation by 4096
U2-04 Pulses
position in reference to the set origin
Difference between stop reference position and current position in

U2-05 Position deviation Pulses
pulses
Time from input of orientation command to output of completion

U2-06 Positioning time ×2 ms
signal
Note: The LED segments for ON I/O signals will light.
11.3 Magnetic Sensor Orientation Control Status

The status displays for magnetic sensor orientation control are listed in the following table.
Table 11.3 Operating Status Displays for Magnetic Sensor Orientation Control
Orientation I/O signal status*1
HGR MGR LGR INC

U3-01 I/O signal status
TUNE
Magnetic sensor
U3-02*2 AD converted value of magnetic sensor signal
signal level
Actual position expressed by dividing one rotation by 4096 in refer-

U3-03 Position monitor Pulses
ence to the set origin
stop reference
U3-04 stop reference position expressed in reference to the set origin Pulses
position
Difference between stop reference position and current position in

U3-05 Speed deviation Pulses
pulses
Time from input of orientation command to output of completion of

U3-06 Positioning time ×2 ms
signal
* 1. Operating status display data for in-house adjustment.

* 2. The LED segments for ON I/O signals will light.
11
11 -3
11.4 Miscellaneous Status Displays

The miscellaneous status displays are listed in the following table.
Table 11.4 Miscellaneous Operating Status Displays

U7-01 Motor temperature Detected temperature for motor overheat protection °C
U7-02 Slip frequency∗ Slip frequency to be applied to the motor Hz
* Operating status display data for in-house adjustment.
11
11-4
12 12
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the Inverter and Converter fault displays, the faults
caused by motor malfunctions, and the corrective actions to be taken.
12.1 Troubleshooting Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 -2

12.2 Converter Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 -3
12.3 Inverter Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 -5
12.4 Motor Faults and Corrective Actions . . . . 12 -13
12 -1
Troubleshooting
12.1 Troubleshooting Outline

When the Inverter or Converter detects a fault, the fault number is displayed on the 7-segment display or the
Digital Operator, outputs an error signal, and the motor coasts to a stop. Check the cause in tables 12.1 to 12.3
and take corrective actions.
If the inspections or corrective actions described cannot solve the problem, contact your YASKAWA
representative immediately.
To restart, turn ON the reset input signal of NC machine, press the RESET Key or shut OFF the main circuit
power supply once to reset the stop status.
12
IMPORTANT Precautions on Resetting Faults
S To reset a fault from the Digital Operator after removing the cause, press the RESET Key
in fault display mode. The RESET Key will not reset the fault in any other mode.
S Before resetting, turn OFF the RUN signals (FWD, REV, ORT) that are externally input.
12 -2
12.2 Converter Faults
12.2 Converter Faults

If a fault occurs during operation, protective functions are activated depending on the fault and operation is
stopped. The contents of the faults are displayed numerically on the 7-segment display.
Table 12.1 Converter Faults

Fault No. Name Meaning Corrective Actions
S Check the wiring.
S Check the input supply voltage.
Output current exceeded overcurrent
Overcurrent S Check the AC reactor.
detection level.
S Check the load shaft (Inverter, Servo)
capacity.
12
Main circuit fuse Check for damaged transistor, load
Main circuit fuse was blown.
blown short circuit, ground short, etc.
S Reduce the load.
Output current exceeded overload lev-
Overload S Check the load shaft (Inverter, Servo)
el.
capacity.
Output voltage exceeded overvoltage
level. S Check the input supply voltage.
Output overvoltage Detection level: S Check the load shaft
200 V class: Approx. 400 V (Inverter, Servo) capacity.
400 V class: Approx. 800 V
Main circuit output voltage became
Main circuit under-
lower than undervoltage detection lev- Check the input supply voltage.
voltage
el.
Control circuit power supply became
Control circuit un-
lower than undervoltage detection lev-
dervoltage
el. Check the control supply voltage.
Servo unit power Control supply voltage supplied to Ser-
supply fault vo Unit was not normal.
Power supply fre- Excessive power supply frequency
Check the input power waveform.
quency fault deviation (50 Hz or 60 Hz ±5%)
Initial charging Charging of main circuit capacitor was
Replace the Unit.
fault not completed within set time.
Power supply open An open phase occurred at input sup- S Check the input supply voltage.
phase ply. S Check the wiring.
Built-in MC opera-
Magnetic contactor did not function. Replace the Unit.
tion fault
Heatsink overheat Heatsink temperature exceeded upper
1 limit (minor fault). Check the ambient temperature for ef
ef-
Heatsink overheat Heatsink temperature over upper limit fective cooling.
2 continued for one minute or longer.
Thermistor for heatsink temperature
Replace the unit.
thermis detection was disconnected.
Heatsink thermis-
tor disconnection The ambient temperature is low Raise the ambient temperature to above
(−20°C (−4°F) or below). −20°C (−4°F).
Control PCB tem- Control PCB temperature exceeded
perature fault 1 80°C (176°F) (minor fault). Check the ambient temperature for ef
ef-
Control PCB tem- Control PCB temperature exceeded fective cooling.
perature fault 2 85°C (185°F).
12 -3
Troubleshooting
Table 12.1 Converter Faults (continued)

Fault No. Name Meaning Corrective Actions
CPU built-in A/D
Built-in A/D Converter error
error
ROM error Memory (PROM) error
EEPROM error Memory (EEPROM) error Replace the control PCB.
CPU error CPU error
12 . . Control PCB fault WDT time exceeded.
12 -4
12.3 Inverter Faults

If a fault occurs during operation, protective functions are activated depending on the fault and operation is
stopped. The contents of the faults are displayed on the Digital Operator (option) in AL code, and on the Invert-
er, 7-segment display display as the last two digits of the AL code.
As shown in the following diagram, the error codes (for stand-alone drives only) are shown as f for ON and
F for OFF, using the signals output from pins 26 to 29 on 6CN.
Error code fFFf

6CN pin 26 (FC0)
6CN pin 27 (FC1)
6CN pin 28 (FC2)
(6CN pin 30 is the common.) 12
6CN pin 29 (FC3)
Fig 12.1 Error Code Outputs
Table 12.2 Inverter Faults
Fault No. Name Contents Corrective Actions Error Code
Check the wiring for looseness,

etc.
Output current exceeded overcurrent
Note) Before turning the power
Overcurrent detection value, or Inverter output FFFF
ON again, make sure that no
(load) was short-circuited.
short-circuit or ground fault oc-
curs at the Inverter output.
S Check the motor for deteriora-

tion of insulation.
S Check the wiring between In-
verter and motor.
Inverter output side ground current
Ground fault * FFFF
exceeded grounding detection level. Note) Before turning the power
ON again, make sure that no
short-circuit or ground fault oc-
curs at the Inverter output.
S Check for damage to transistor,

short-circuits on load side,
Main circuit ground fault, etc.
DC circuit fuse was blown. FFFF
fuse blown
S Check the Inverter output wir-
ing.
S Reduce the load.

Inverter output Output current of 120% of 30-minute
S Check the load shaft (Inverter, FFFF
overload rating runs for over one minute.
Servo) capacity.
Motor over-
Motor overload capacity exceeded. Reduce the load. FFFF
load
S Check if the load is heavy or a

tool is jammed.
Motor Over-
load (When the The motor exceeded the overload S Make sure that the motor shaft
motor is level at low speed (30 min−1 or less). rotates. (Check if a motor fault FFFF
or a contact between the rotor
locked) and the stator occurs, or if a
bearing is damaged.)
Check fault contents by using

Converter fault A fault occurred in Converter Unit. FFFf
Converter LED.
S Check the input supply voltage.

Main circuit Main circuit DC bus voltage exceed- S Check the load shaft (Inverter,
FFFf
overvoltage ed the overvoltage set value. Servo) capacity.
S Check the control constants.
* The ground fault here is one which occurs in the motor wiring while the motor is running.
A ground fault may not be detected in the following cases.
¯ A ground fault with low resistance which occurs in motor cables or terminals.
¯ A ground fault occurs when the power is turned ON.
12 -5
Troubleshooting
Table 12.2 Inverter Faults (continued)

Main circuit DC bus voltage became

Main circuit
lower than undervoltage detection Check the input supply voltage. FFFf
undervoltage
level during run.
Control cir- Control circuit power supply became

cuit under- lower than undervoltage detection Check the control supply voltage. FFFf
voltage level.
12 Winding
Winding selection was not completed
S Check the control constant
C1-25.
selection FFfF
within set time. S Check magnetic contactor wir-
fault
ing for winding selection.
S Check control constant C1-25.

Inverter did not stop within 10 se- S Check the setting of control
Emergency
conds after emergency stop com- constant C1-24 and whether ex- FFfF
stop fault
mand. ternal torque limit signals TLL
and TLH are input.
Encoder sig-
Motor encoder signal was discon- Check the wiring of encoder sig-
nal cable dis- FFff
nected or connected improperly. nal lines.
connection
S Confirm that encoder signal

Motor over- Motor speed exceeded 120% of set lines are separated from main
circuit or other power lines. FFff
speed rated speed.

tool is jammed.
S Check whether external torque
Excessive
Speed falls to less than 50% of refer- limit signals TLL and TLH are
speed devi- input. FFff
ence value.
ation
S Check the wiring of encoder sig-
nal lines.
Inverter output (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)

Load fault Check Inverter output wiring. FFff
was disconnected.

tool is jammed.
S Check the wiring between In-
verter and motor.
Motor Lock The motor is locked. (The motor
Detection speed remains at 35 min−1 or lower S Check the wiring of encoder sig-
nal lines. FFff
(For IP mo- for 10 seconds during the torque
tors only) reference saturation.) S Make sure that the motor shaft
rotates.
S Check if a motor fault or a con-
tact between rotor and stator oc-
curs, or if a bearing is damaged.
S Check the wiring.

Motor over- Motor temperature exceeded upper
S Confirm that motor cooling air is FfFF
heat 1 limit (minor fault).
normal with power ON.
Confirm
S C fi thatt th
th the ffan iis nott
Motor over- Motor temperature over upper limit clogged with dust or oil.
S Check the wiring of motor FfFF
heat 2 continued for over one minute.
thermistor signal lines.
12 -6

S Check the motor thermistor sig-

Motor therm- nal wiring.
Motor temperature detection therm-
istor discon- S Check the motor ambient tem- FfFF
istor was disconnected.
nection perature. (Raise the temperature
to above −10°C (14°F) or more.)
Heatsink Heatsink temperature exceeded up-

overheat 1 per limit (minor fault).
Heatsink
Heatsink temperature over upper
Check the ambient temperature
for effective cooling.
FfFF 12
limit continued for one minute or
overheat 2
longer.
Thermistor for heatsink temperature
Heatsink detection was disconnected. S Replace the unit.
thermistor S Raise the ambient temperature FfFF
The ambient temperature is low
disconnection to above −20°C (−4°F).
(−20°C (−4_F) or below).
Control PCB
Control PCB temperature exceeded
temperature
80°C (176°F) (minor fault).
fault 1 Check the ambient temperature
FfFF
Control PCB for effective cooling.
Control PCB temperature exceeded
temperature
85°C (185°F).
fault 2
Internal cool- Inverter internal cooling fan is
Replace the internal cooling fan. FfFF
ing fan fault stopped.
tuneup
incomplete
Orientation command was input be-
(Encoder Perform orientation tuneup. FffF
fore tuning up (minor fault).
method
orientation)
Phase-C sig-
Phase-C signal could not be de-
nal detection
tected during tuning up.
error S Check the wiring g of encoder sig-
g
nall li
lines.
Phase-C sig-
Phase-C signal width exceeded 100 S Confirm that encoder signal
nal width er-
pulses. lines are separated from main
ror circuit or other power lines. FffF
Fault of num- S Verify that motor and Inverter
ber of pulses are grounded.
per rotation Number of pulses per rotation ex- S Replace the Orientation Card.
(Encoder ceeded 4096 ±1 during tuning up. S Replace the encoder.
method
orientation)
Position S Check the wiring of load shaft
Position detection encoder signal encoder signal lines.
detection sig-
cable was disconnected or con- FffF
nal cable S Replace the load shaft encoder.
nected improperly.
disconnection S Replace the Orientation Card.
INC signal er-
ror After carrying out absolute posi-
INC signal input timing error
(Encoder tioning, change circuit to com- FffF
(minor fault)
method mand INC signal.
orientation)
12 -7
Troubleshooting

Tuneup
incomplete
(magnetic Orientation command was input be-
Perform orientation tuneup. Ffff
sensor meth- fore tuning up (minor fault).
od orienta-
tion)
Magnetic sen- S Check the wiring of magnetic
12 sor signal
detection er-
Incorrect magnetic sensor signal
voltage level during tuning up.
sensor signal lines.
S Replace the magnetic sensor or
Ffff
ror magnetizer.
Fault of num-
ber of pulses
per rotation Number of motor pulses per main S Check control constants C1-27,
axis rotation (4096 ÷ speed gear ra- 28, 29.
(magnetic Ffff
tio) exceeded ±6% during tuning S Check the wiring of motor en-
sensor meth- coder signal lines.
up.
od orienta-
tion)
S Check the wiring of magnetic
Magnetic sen- Magnetic sensor signal cable was sensor signal lines.
sor signal dis- disconnected or connected improp- S Replace the magnetic sensor or Ffff
connection erly. magnetizer.
S Perform tuneup again.
INC signal er-
ror
After carrying out absolute posi-
(Magnetic INC signal input timing error
tioning, change circuit to com- Ffff
sensor meth- (minor fault)
mand INC signal.
od orienta-
tion)
YENET1200
Communication error between YE- Check the wiring on communica-
communica- ---
NET1200 card and NC machine. tion line.
tion error
Excessive
Position deviation exceeded the al-
position devi- Check the main axis load. ---
lowable range.
ation
YENET1200
YENET1200 card memory (PROM)
card ROM er- Replace YENET1200 card. ---
error
ror
YENET1200
communica- WDT error between YENET1200 Check the wiring on communica-
---
tion WDT er- card and NC machine. tion line.
ror 1
YENET1200
communica- WDT error between YENET1200
Replace the control PCB. ---
tion WDT er- card and control PCB.
ror 2
YENET1200
YENET1200 card detected NMI. Replace YENET1200 card. ---
card NMI
YENET1200
YENET1200 card detected division/
card zero di- ---
overflow error.
vision
Communica- Answer to communications com-

tions timeout mand between YENET1200 card Replace the controller PCB. ---
1 and control PCB does not return.
12 -8

Communica-
YENET1200 card internal timeout
tions timeout Replace YENET1200 card. ---
error
2
Undefined
constant No. Undefined constant number is set. Check NC machine constants. ---
setting error
YENET1200
undefined Undefined command for YENET
12
---
command er- 1200 is specified.
ror
Replace YENET1200 card.
Constant
change dis- I/F card constant change is disabled. ---
able error
Handshake Handshake error between YENET

Replace the control PCB. ---
error 1200 card and control PCB
YENET1200
YENET1200 card memory (RAM)
card RAM er- ---
error
ror 1
Replace YENET1200 card.
card
YENET1200
YENET1200 card memory (IC) er-
card RAM er- ---
ror
ror 2
Communica- YENET1200 communications com-

tions command error (undefined warning oc- ---
mand error 1 curred.)

tions command error (orientation tuneup dis- ---
mand error 2 abled)

tions command error (memory access dis-
mand error 3 abled)

tions command error (constant write-in dis-
mand error 4 abled)

Check software version for con-
tions command error (constant read-out dis-
trol PCB and NC machine.
mand error 5 abled)

tions command error (constant setting change ---
mand error 6 disabled during run)

tions command error (constant set value ex-
mand error 7 ceeds upper/lower limits.)

tions command error (incorrect access num-
mand error 8 ber)

tions command error (undefined command
mand error 9 code)
12 -9
Troubleshooting

YENET1200
YENET1200 card fault
card fault
YENET1200
YENET1200 card memory (com-
card RAM er-
mon RAM) error
ror
YENET1200
YENET1200 card data send/receive
12 card I/O fault
1
error (initial handshake error) Replace YENET1200 card. ---
YENET1200
WDT error between control PCB
card I/O fault
and YENET1200 card
2
YENET1200
YENET1200 card interrupt signal
card I/O fault
timeout error
3
Initial Origin S Check the wiring of the C-phase

When the power is turned ON, a signal of the encoder.
Detection Er-
phase-C signal cannot be detected fFff
ror (For IPM S Replace the encoder or motor.
while detecting the initial origin.
motors only) S Replace the control card.
S Check the wiring of the encoder

signal lines.
S Check if the encoder signal line
is separated from the main cir-
Encoder Pulse cuit wiring and other power
The encoder pulse number per rota- cables.
Number Error
tion exceeded the correct value by fFff
(For IPM mo- S Check if the motor and the In-
±10 pulses. verter are properly grounded.
tors only)
S Check the encoder cable specifi-
cations. (Check if a shielded
twisted-pair cable is used.)
S Replace the encoder.
Low Speed
Winding Check the external sequence to
The motor speed exceeded the max.
Overspeed Er- verify that the winding change fFff
speed for the low speed winding.
ror (For IPM point is correct.
motor only)
12 -10

CPU built-in
A/D Convert- CPU built-in A/D Converter error ffFf
er error
Phase U A/D
Phase U current detection A/D Con-
Converter er- ffFf
verter error
ror
Phase W A/D
Converter er-
Phase W current detection A/D
ffFf
12
Converter error
ror
Replace the control PCB.
PCB
Control cir-
cuit I/O fault ffFf
1
Control cir-
Data transmission error between
cuit I/O fault ffFf
CPUs.
2
Control cir-
cuit I/O fault ffFf
3
Selected motor code (C1-25) does Check motor model, motor code
Motor code
not match Inverter capacity (C1-25), Inverter model, and In- fffF
selection error
(C1-56). verter capacity selection (C1-56).
S Check motor model and motor

code (C1-25).
Motor code Motor code set in C1-25 is not re-
unrecorded corded. S Check setting list for correct fffF
PROM version of motor code
(C1-25).
S Confirm that rated speed

Constant set- (C1-26) is within setting range.
Memory (EEPROM) data exceeded
ting range er- fffF
upper/lower limit. S Check control constants.
ror
S Replace the control PCB.
S Check Orientation Card model

Orientation
Selected orientation bit does not and orientation selection signal
Card mis- (bit 0 of C1-39). fffF
match Orientation Card.
match
S Replace the Orientation Card.
Inverter ca-
Selected Inverter capacity (C1-56) Check Inverter model and Invert-
pacity selec- fffF
does not match the Unit. er capacity selection (C1-56).
tion error
ROM error Memory (PROM) error ffff
EEPROM er-
ffff
ror 1
EEPROM er-
ffff
ror 2 Replace the control PCB.
Memory (EEPROM) error
EEPROM er-
ffff
ror 3
EEPROM er-
ffff
ror 4
12 -11
Troubleshooting

Control cir- Transmission between the Inverter

cuit fault 1 and the Digital Operator cannot be
(operator established until 5 seconds after ---
transmission supplying power. Built-in memory S Insert the Digital Operator con-
error) fault, WDT activated. nector again.
g
Transmission between the Inverter S Check the wiring of power sup-
Control cir- ply signal line of 1CN.
and the Digital Operator is estab-
12 cuit fault 2
(operator
lished once after supplying power,
but later transmission fault contin-
S Replace the control PCB.
---
transmission
ues for more than 2 seconds. WDT
error)
time exceeded.
YENET1200 S Check the wiring of YE-

After turning control power ON,
communica- NET1200 communication line.
NC machine and YENET1200 com- ---
tion signal S Check NC machine power sup-
munication is not established.
delay ply.
12 -12
12.4 Motor Faults and Corrective Actions

If any of the following faults occurs in the motor, check the cause and perform the relevant corrective actions.
Table 12.3 Motor Faults and Corrective Actions

Fault Cause Corrective Action
Protective function has been activated. Check fault number and carry out appropriate steps.
Inverter output disconnection, improper connec-

Check the wiring between Inverter and motor.
tion
S Check sequence input signal on operating status display 12

(U1-09) (RDY, EMG, FWD and REV).
S Check if speed reference is input or not on operating status
Control signal does not function.
display (U1-02).
S Check if operating signal FWD or REV is input at least 15 ms
after RDY or EMG is input.
Motor does not rotate.
rotate
Check whether external torque limit signals TLL or TLH is
Torque limiting
input on operating status display (U1-09).
S Check resistance between motor terminals (a circuit tester

Motor winding wire disconnection necessary).
S Replace the motor.
Motor fault (rotor and stator rub together, broken S Check motor shaft rotation manually.
bearing) S Replace the motor.
Control PCB fault Replace the control PCB.
S Turn ON power supply.

Power of Converter’s main circuit is not turn ON.
S Check voltage.
Motor
M t does
d nott rotate.
t t
Flat cable is not correctly connected. Check that flat cable is correctly installed to connectors.
(STOP LED blinks.)
Timing of operating signal FWD, RED and EMG Check if operating signal FWD or REV is input at least 15 ms
is incorrect. (All signals input at the same time.) after RDY or EMG is input.
Inverter output disconnection, improper connec-

Check the wiring between Inverter and motor.
tion
Encoder signal line disconnection, improper con-

Check the wiring of encoder signal line.
nection, loose connector (See note.)
Motor rotates slowly or vi- S Check for abnormal changes in motor speed on speedometer
brates without rotation. Motor encoder fault or operating status display (U1-01).
S Replace the encoder or the motor.

Torque limiting
Motor rotates in Improper connection of Inverter output or motor

Check the wiring according to the connection diagram.
reverse direction. encoder signal line
12 -13
Troubleshooting
Table 12.3 Motor Faults and Corrective Actions (continued)

S Check speed reference on operating status display (U1-02).
Speed reference signal error
S Readjust master speed reference function.
Incorrect setting of motor rated speed Check the setting of control constant C1-26.
Check the operating status display of the motor speed

Incorrect adjustment of motor speed *
Motor does not rotate at (U1-01), and adjust the control constant (C1-12).
commanded speed. Check if PPI signal is input or not on operating status display
12 Speed is controlled by P control.
(U1-09).

Torque limiting

Soft starter time setting error
Check the setting of control constant C1-10.
(Set time is too long.)
Check the setting of control constant C1-25 on the setting
Motor code selection error
list.
Extended acceleration/de- Check whether external torque limit signals TLL or TLH is
Torque limiting
celeration time input on operating status display (U1-09).
S Check load status on the load factor meter for loss and inertia
Excess load on load machine moment of the load machine.
S Increase the capacity of Inverter and motor.
Inverter output disconnection Check wiring between Inverter and motor.
Check continuity of motor and Inverter to see if they are
Grounding error of motor or Inverter
securely grounded.
S Confirm that encoder signal lines are separated from Inverter
Malfunction due to noise output wiring or other power lines.
(Poor encoder characteristics) S Check encoder cable specifications (whether the cable is a
shielded twisted-pair cable).
Control constant setting error
Check control constants on the setting list.
(especially speed control proportional gain)
Motor installation error Check for loose mounting bolts.
Heavy motor noise, vibration S Check if rotor is balanced.
Unbalanced motor
S Run a motor alone to check if noise and vibration are within
Motor fault specifications.
(Motor bearing fault, rotor fault)
Confirm that coupling and centering are appropriate accord-
Defective load machine coupling or centering
ing to the connection with load machine.
Insufficient strength of load machine Check the load machine for deformations or resonance.
Loose foundation bolts Check for loose foundation bolts on load machine.
Confirm that operation signal (FWD or REV) is open on
Control signal does not operate.
Motor does not stop. operating status display (U1-09).
* Enabled for stand-alone drives (M5A) only.
12 -14

Confirm that orientation signal ORT is closed on operating
Orientation signal ORT is not input.
status display (U1-09).
Motor does not stop at Encoder signal line disconnection, improper con-
Check the wiring of encoder signal lines.
orientation. nection, loose connector
(encoder method orienta- S Check for abnormal changes in motor speed on the speedom-
tion) Encoder fault eter or operating status display (U1-01).
S Replace the encoder or the motor.
Fault of Orientation Card or control PCB Replace the Orientation Card or the control PCB. 12
Check the machine data for transmission ratio values (C1-27
Incorrect transmission ratio setting
Motor does not stop
p at to 29).
orientation.
i i Magnetic sensor signal line disconnection, im-
(magnetic sensor method Check the wiring of magnetic sensor signal lines.
proper connection, loose connector
orientation)
Rotate the load shaft and verify that ORG signal lights once
Fault of magnetic sensor or magnetizer
per rotation on operating status display (U1-10).
Fault of Orientation Card or control PCB Replace the Orientation Card or the control PCB.
Check whether the position reference is correct on operating
Incorrect setting of stop position reference
Incorrect selection of binary/BCD reference or in- Check the setting of control constants C2-22 bit 3 and
correct setting of BCD reference resolution C2-12.
Incorrect selection of reference point at incremen-
Check the setting of control constant C2-22 bit 5.
tal positioning
Stop position differs from S Perform positioning at zero-point to measure position accu-
commanded position. Improper setting of load shaft zero-point position racy.
(encoder method orienta- S Perform tuneup again to set the load shaft zero point.
ti )
tion)
Encoder signal line disconnection, improper con-
Check the wiring of encoder signal lines.
nection, loose connector
S Confirm that encoder signal lines are separated from Inverter
Malfunction due to noise output wiring or other power lines.
(Poor encoder characteristics) S Check encoder cable specifications (whether the cable is a
shielded twisted-pair cable).
Stop position differs from Magnetic sensor signal line disconnection, loose
Check the wiring of magnetic sensor signal lines.
commanded position. connector
(magnetic sensor method
orientation) Fault of Orientation Card or control PCB Replace the Orientation Card or the control PCB.
12 -15
Troubleshooting

Incorrect setting of selection signal
Set tuneup operation selection signal (C2-22 or C3-22, bit 4)
(Completion signal is not output at tuning of initial
to “1.”
setting.)
Verify the machine data for transmission ratio values (C1-27
Incorrect speed changing ratio setting
to 29).
12 Orientation completion
signal is not output. S Confirm that no vibration occurs in the forward and reverse
Position control proportional gain is high. directions near the stop position.
S Lower position control proportional gain to reduce vibration.
S Confirm that the load shaft has reached the stop position on
operating status display (U2-03 or U3-03).
Position control proportional gain is low.
S Increase position control proportional gain to reach the com-
manded position.
Fault of Orientation Card or control PCB Replace the Orientation Card or the control PCB.
12 -16
13
Maintenance and Inspection 13
This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection procedures for the
VS-626M5 and the VS-656MR5.
13.1 Maintenance and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . 13 -3

13.1.1 Daily Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 -3
13.1.2 Periodic Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 -3
13.1.3 Parts Replacement Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 -4
13 -1
Maintenance and Inspection
WARNING
D Never touch high-voltage terminals in the Inverter or the Converter.
D Close the upper and lower covers before supplying power to the Inverter or the Converter. Be-
fore opening the covers, always shut OFF the molded-case circuit breaker.
D Perform maintenance or inspection only after verifying that the CHARGE LED indicator and
7-segment display go OFF after the main circuit power supply and control power supply have
been turned OFF.
The capacitors are still charged and can be dangerous.
D Only authorized personnel should be permitted to perform maintenance, inspections, or parts
13 replacement. Remove all metal objects (watches, bracelets, etc.) before performing these op-
erations. (Use tools which are insulated against electric shock.)
CAUTION
D The control PC board employs CMOS ICs. Do not touch the CMOS elements.
They are easily damaged by static electricity.
D Do not connect or disconnect wires or connectors while power is applied to the circuits.
Failure to observe this caution can result in personal injury.
13 -2
13.1 Maintenance and Inspection
13.1 Maintenance and Inspection

This section explains the maintenance and inspection methods for the Inverter and Converter.
13.1.1 Daily Inspections

Check the following items while the system is in operation.
D Are there abnormal motor noises or vibration?
D Is there any abnormal heat?
D Is the ambient temperature too high?
D Is the value displayed on the output voltage monitor higher than normal?
13.1.2 Periodic Inspections
Check the following items during periodic maintenance.
To prevent electric shock, turn OFF the power supply to the main circuit and check that the CHARGE indi-
13
cator and 7-segment display have gone out before performing maintenance operations.
Table 13.1 Periodic Inspection Items

Area Component Check Corrective Action
External terminals, Unit Loose screws Tighten.

mounting bolts,
bolts con-
con
nectors, etc. Loose connectors Tighten.
Blow with dry compressed air of 39.2¢104 to
Heatsink Build-up of dust and dirt 58.8¢104 Pa (4 to 6kg¡cm2) pressure.

Printed circuit boards Accumulation of conductive dust or oil 58.8¢104 Pa (4 to 6kg¡cm2) pressure. If dust and oil
Inverter and cannot be removed, replace the board.
Converter
S For abnormal noise and vibration
Cooling fan S Whether the cumulative operation time Replace the cooling fan.
exceeds 20,000 hours or not.
Power elements Accumulation of dust and dirt 58.8¢104 Pa (4 to 6kg¡cm2) pressure.
Smoothing capacitor Discoloration or odor Replace the capacitor or Unit.
Bearing noise Abnormal noise or increase of noise level
Vibration Abnormal vibration Replace the bearings.
Related to
Bearings Bearing temperature Abnormal temperature rise
Grease No leakage Remove the cause.
Motor and Remove the cause of fan halt or replace the fan if a
Cooling Fan Operating status Normal operation
fault is found.
13 -3
Maintenance and Inspection
13.1.3 Parts Replacement Schedule
13.1.3 Parts Replacement Schedule

The Inverter and Converter are configured using multiple parts, and these parts perform their functions
as long as they are operating normally.
The electronic parts require maintenance depending on their operating conditions. To make sure that the
Inverter and Converter operate normally over a long period of time, periodic maintenance and parts re-
placement is required depending on the service life of the relevant part.
The parts replacement schedule differs depending on the installation environment and conditions of use
of the Inverter and Converter. The parts replacement schedule of the Inverter and Converter are shown in
the following table. Refer to the table for parts replacement and maintenance.
Table 13.2 Parts Replacement Schedule

Area Parts Interval (Approx.) Remarks
Cooling fan 2 to 3 years Replace with new one.
13 Smoothing capacitor 5 years
Replace with new one. (Decided after
inspection.)
Inverter and Breakers or relays  Decided after inspection.
inspection
Converter
Fuse 10 years Replace with new one.
Aluminum electrolytic Replace with new one. (Decided after
capacitor on PCBs 5 years inspection.)
Disassemble and replace worn items or provide

Bearings 12000 hours or 2 years
necessary maintenance.
M
Motor
Cooling fan 15000 hours or 2 years Replace the fan.
Overhaul 20000 hours or 5 years Contact your YASKAWA representative.
Note: Operating conditions are as follows:

S Ambient temperature: 30_C (86_F) yearly average
S Load factor: 80% or below
S Operating rate: 12 hours max. per day
13 -4
14
Specifications
14
This chapter describes the specifications for the Drives, Motors, options,
and peripheral devices.
14.1 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -2
14.1.1 Standard Drive Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -2
14.1.2 Winding Selection Drive Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -6
14.1.3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -10
14.1.4 Panel Cutout Dimensions for External Heatsink
Cooling Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -14
14.1.5 Calorific Value and Cooling Air Speed . . . . . . . . . . 14 -15
14.2 Standard Motor Specifications . . . . . . . . . . 14 -17

14.2.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -17
14.2.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -17
14.2.3 Output and Torque Speed Characteristics . . . . . . 14 -19
14.2.4 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -30
14.2.5 Tolerance Radial Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -37
14.2.6 Motor Total Indicator Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -37
14.2.7 Encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -38
14.2.8 Encoder Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -39
14.2.9 Spare Motor Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -40
14.2.10 Replacing the Motor Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -41
14.3 Options and Peripheral Units . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -42

14.3.1 AC Reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -42
14.3.2 Molded Case Circuit Breaker and
Magnetic Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -46
14.3.3 Magnetic Contactor Specifications for
Winding Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -47
14.3.4 Busbar and Cable Kits for Connecting Units . . . . 14 -49
14.3.5 Digital Operator and Connector Cables . . . . . . . . 14 -54
14.3.6 Connector Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -58
14.3.7 Noise Filters (Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -62
14.3.8 Surge Absorbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 -68
14 -1
Specifications
14.1.1 Standard Drive Series
14.1 Drives
This section provides the standard specifications of the Drives.

The following table lists the specifications for the Standard Drive Series.
Table 14.1 Standard 200 V Series

Model UAASK FZ A-04 A-06 A-08 A-11 A-15 A-19 A-22 J-30 J-37
Rated 30-minute Rating (S2) 5 *1 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50
Output 50%ED Rating (S3) (3.7) (5.5) (7.5) (11) (15) (18.5) (22) (30) (37)
*2
2
HP 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40
Continuous Rating (S1)
(kW) (2.2) (3.7) (5.5) (7.5) (11) (15) (18.5) (22) (30)
Rated Base Speed 1500 1150
speed
(min−1) Maximum Speed 8000 6000 4500
N·m 14.0 23.5 35.0 47.7 70.0 95.0 117.6 182.3 249.1
Output Torque at
14 Motor
Base Speed Con-
tinuous Rating
lb·ft
(kgf·m)
10.4
(1.43)
17.4
(2.40)
25.8
(3.57)
35.8
(4.87)
51.7
(7.14)
70.6
(9.74)
86.9
(12.0)
134
(18.6)
183
(25.4)
Rotor Inertia J (GD2/4) lb·ft2 0.209 0.411 0.617 0.759 1.614 1.970 2.326 6.122 8.068
(kg·m2) (0.0088) (0.0173) (0.026) (0.032) (0.068) (0.083) (0.098) (0.258) (0.34)
Overload Capacity 120%, 60s of 30-minute rating
Vibration (µ·m) V5 V10
Noise Level 75dB (A) or less 80dB (A) or less
Ambient Temperature, Humidity 0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F), 95% or less (non-condensing)
Approx. Mass lb 71 119 130 150 207 238 269 481 580
(kg) (32) (54) (59) (68) (94) (108) (122) (218) (263)
* 1. 15-minute rating (50%ED)/continuous rating for model UAASKA-04FZ 5/3HP (3.7/2.2kW)

* 2. Rated output power is guaranteed when input voltage is three-phase, 200 V (50/60 Hz), 220 V (50/60 Hz), 230 V (60 Hz). If
input voltage is lower than 200 V, rated output power is not guaranteed.
14 -2
14.1 Drives
Model CIMR-M5j*1 23P7 23P5 27P5 2011 2015 2018 2022 2030 2037
Continuous Rated Input Cur-
rent (A) 17.6 17.6 26.2 35.7 52.4 71.4 88.1 104.8 142.8
Continuous Rated Output Cur-

rent (A) 21 21 31 40 56 80 98 113 160
Control Method Sine wave PWM Inverter (Vector control)

Speed Control Range 40 min−1 to maximum motor speed
rter
nvert
Speed Regulation 0.2% maximum speed or less

In

Approx. Mass lb (kg) 11 (5) 27 (12) 35 (16) 57 (26)
7.84 11.81
Width 3.94 (100) 5.91 (150) (200) (300)
Dimensions in
inches
Height 13.78 (350)
(mm) *22
Depth 12.60 (320)
Model CIMR-MR5j*1 23P7 25P5 27P5 2011 2015 2018 2022 2030 2037
Required Power Capacity
(kVA) 7 9 12 19 24 30 36 48 60
Continuous Rated Input Cur-

13.3 13.3 19.7 26.8 39.3 53.6 66.1 78.6 107.2
14
rent (A)
Continuous Rated Output Cur-
rent (A) 17.6 17.6 26.2 35.7 52.4 71.4 88.1 104.8 142.8
Three-phase, 200 VAC (50/60Hz); 220 VAC (50/60Hz); 230 VAC (60Hz)
Power Supply (Allowable voltage fluctuation: +10% to −15%, allowable frequency fluctuation: ±5%,
Line-to-line voltage unbalance: 5% or less)
Single-phase, 200 VAC (50/60Hz); 220 VAC (50/60Hz); 230 VAC (60Hz)
onverter *3
Controller
(Allowable voltage fluctuation: +10% to −15%, allowable frequency fluctuation: ±5%)

Control Power Supply
Required power capacity: 100 VA (for independent drive system)
250 VA (for NC system)
C
Co
Control Method Power regenerative control (120_ current conduction)

Overload Capacity 120% for one minute, 200% for one second
Approx. Mass lb (kg) 11 (5) 27 (12) 35 (16) 57 (26)
7.84 11.81
Width 3.94 (100) 5.91 (150) (200) (300)
Dimensions in
inches
Height 13.78 (350)
(mm) *22
Depth 12.60 (320)
Power Supply AC Reactor
Code No. X010057 X010058 X010059 X010060 X010061 X010062 X010063 X010064 X010120
Model CIMR-M5j*1 23P7 25P5 27P5 2011 2015 2018 2022 2030 2037
CIMR-MR5j*1
Ambient Temperature 0°C to 55°C (32°F to 131°F) (not frozen)
Heatsink Intake Air Tempera-
ture 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F)
n
C mmon
Storage Temperature *4 −20°C to 60°C (−4°F to 140°F)

Comm
Humidity 90% or less (non-condensing)

Location Indoor (protected from corrosive gases and dust), elevation: 1000 m (3280 ft) or less
Vibration 9.8 m/s2 (1G) at 10 to less than 20 Hz, up to 2 m / s2 (0.2G) at 20 to 50 Hz
IEC IP00
Protective Structure (Protected so that parts of the human body cannot reach electrically charged parts from the front)
* 1. A: For stand-alone drive system N: for NC system

* 2. Dimensions of External Heatsink Cooling Type. Refer to 14.1.3 Dimensions for Open Chassis Type.
* 3. An AC reactor is required between Converter and main circuit power supply.
* 4. Temperature during shipping.
14 -3
Specifications
Table 14.2 Standard 400 V Series

Model UAAS FZ***E A-06 A-08 A-11 A-15 A-19 A-22 J-30 J-37 J-45
Rated 30-minute Rating (S2) 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60
Output 50%ED Rating (S3) (5.5) (7.5) (11) (15) (18.5) (22) (30) (37) (45)
1
*1
HP Continuous Rating 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50

(kW) (S1) (3.7) (5.5) (7.5) (11) (15) (18.5) (22) (30) (37)
speed
(min−1) Maximum Speed 8000 6000 4500
Output Torque at Base N·m 23.5 35.0 47.7 70.0 95.0 117.6 182.3 249.0 306.8
Speed Continuous Rat- lb·ft 17.4 25.8 35.8 51.7 70.6 86.9 134 183.7 226.4
Motor ing (kgf·m) (2.40) (3.57) (4.87) (7.14) (9.74) (12.0) (18.6) (25.4) (31.3)
Rotor Inertia J (GD2/4) lb·ft2 0.411 0.617 0.759 1.614 1.970 2.326 6.122 8.068 11.22
(kg·m2) (0.0173) (0.026) (0.032) (0.068) (0.083) (0.098) (0.258) (0.340) (0.473)
14 Ambient Temperature, Humidity

Approx. Mass lb 119 130
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F), 95% or less (non-condensing)
150 207 238 269 481 580 783
(kg) (54) (59) (68) (94) (108) (122) (218) (263) (355)
Model CIMR-M5j*2 45P5 47P5 4011 4015 4018 4022 4030 4037 4045
Continuous Rated Input Current
(A) 8.8 13.1 17.9 26.2 35.7 44.1 52.4 71.4 88.2
Continuous Rated Output Current

10.4 15.5 20 28 40 49 56.5 80 98
(A)
ter
verte

Inv
Overload Capacity*3 120%, 60s of 30-minute rating

Approx. Mass lb (kg) 11 (5) 27 (12) 35 (16)
Width 3.94 (100) 5.91 (150) 9.84 (250)
Dimensions in inches
Height 13.78 (350)
(mm) *4
Depth 12.60 (320)
Model CIMR-MR5j*2 45P5 47P5 4011 4015 4018 4022 4030 4037 4045
Required Power Capacity (kVA) 9 12 19 24 30 36 48 60 70
(A) 6.7 9.85 13.4 19.7 26.8 33.1 39.3 53.6 66.2

troller
(A) 8.8 13.1 17.9 26.2 35.7 44.1 52.4 71.4 88.2
Contr
onverter *5

Co

Approx. Mass lb (kg) 11 (5) 27 (12) 46 (21)
Width 3.94 (100) 5.91 (150) 9.84 (250)
Height 13.78 (350)
(mm) *4
Depth 12.60 (320)
Power Supply AC Reactor Code X002501 X010099 X010100 X010101 X010102 X010103 X010104 X010105 X010106
No.
14 -4
14.1 Drives
Model CIMR-M5j*2 45P5 47P5 4011 4015 4018 4022 4030 4037 4045
CIMR-MR5j*2
Heatsink Intake Air Temperature 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F)

oller
Controll

C mon
Comm
C
IEC IP00
* 1. Rated output power is guaranteed when input voltage is three-phase, 400 V (50/60 Hz), 440 V (50/60 Hz), 460 V (60Hz). If
* 2. A: For stand-alone drive system N: for NC system 14
* 3. If the heatsink input temperature for the 4037 and 4045 Inverter is high, the bearable load is limited. The continuous use time
at 1 minute rated value (120% of 30 minutes rated output) depending on the Unit heat limit is shown in the following diagram.
1 min. rated continuous use time
60
40
20
(seconds)
15
0
37.5
0 10 20 30 40 50
Heatsink input temperature (_C)
1 Minute Rated Continuous Use Time for 4037 and 4045 Inverters
14 -5
Specifications
14.1.2 Winding Selection Drive Series

The specifications for the winding selection drive series are shown in the following table.
Table 14.3 Winding Selection 200 V Series

Model UAASK FZ B-06 B-08 B-11 B-15 B-19 B-22 B-30
Rated 30-minute Rating (S2) 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40
Output 50%ED Rating (S3) (5.5) (7.5) (11) (15) (18.5) (22) (30)
*11
HP Continuous Rating 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 27

(kW) (S1) (3.7) (5.5) (7.5) (11) (15) (18.5) (20)
speed
(min−1) Maximum Speed 6000 4800
N·m 71 105 143 262 358 442 477
Output Torque at Base
Speed Continuous Rat- lb·ft 52.3 77.6 105.9 193.6 264.5 326.2 351.8
Motor ing (kgf·m) (7.21) (10.7) (14.5) (26.7) (36.5) (45.0) (48.7)
Rotor Inertia J (GD2/4) lb·ft2 1.614 1.970 2.563 6.146 11.22 13.00 13.00
(kg·m2) (0.068) (0.083) (0.108) (0.259) (0.473) (0.548) (0.548)
14 Overload Capacity 120%, 60s of 30-minute rating
Ambient Temperature, Humidity 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F), 95% or less (non-condensing)
Approx. Mass lb 207 238 291 481 783 893 893
(kg) (94) (108) (132) (218) (355) (405) (405)
Model CIMR-M5j*2 25P5 27P5 2011 2015 2018 2022 2030
(A) 17.6 26.2 35.7 52.4 71.4 88.1 104.8

(A) 21 31 40 56 80 98 113

er
verter

C ntrollller
Inve

Con
Approx. Mass lb (kg) 11 (5) 27 (12) 35 (16)

Applicable Magnetic Contactor
Model HV-75AP4 HV-150AP4
Width 3.94 (100) 5.91 (150) 7.84 (200)

Dimensions
Di i iin iinches
h
Height 13.78 (350)
(mm) *3
Depth 12.60 (320)
14 -6
14.1 Drives
Model CIMR-MR5j*2 25P5 27P5 2011 2015 2018 2022 2030

Required Power Capacity (kVA) 9 12 19 24 30 36 48
(A) 13.3 19.7 26.8 39.3 53.6 66.1 78.6

(A) 17.6 26.2 35.7 52.4 71.4 88.1 104.8
Converter *4

Co

oller
Approx. Mass lb (kg) 11 (5) 27 (12) 35 (16)

ontro
Width 3.94 (100) 5.91 (150) 7.84 (200)

Con
Dimensions
Di i iin iinches
h
Height 13.78 (350)
(mm) *3
Depth 12.60 (320) 14
Power Supply AC Reactor Code
No. X010058 X010059 X010060 X010061 X010062 X010063 X010064
Model CIMR-M5j*2 25P5 27P5 2011 2015 2018 2022 2030

CIMR-MR5j*2
n
Co mon

Comm

IEC IP00
* 1. Rated output power is guaranteed when input voltage is three-phase, 200 V (50/60 Hz), 220 V (50/60 Hz), 230 V (60 Hz). If
14 -7
Specifications
Table 14.4 Winding Selection 400 V Series

Model UAASK FZ***E B-06 B-08 B-11 B-15 B-19 B-22 B-30*1
30-minute Rating (S2) 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40
Rated 50%ED Rating (S3) (5.5) (7.5) (11) (15) (18.5) (22) (30)
Output *22
HP (kW) Continuous Rating 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 27
(S1) (3.7) (5.5) (7.5) (11) (15) (18.5) (20)
speed
(min−1) Maximum Speed 6000 4800
N·m 71 105 143 262 358 442 477
Output Torque at Base
Motor Speed Continuous Rating lb·ft 52.3 77.6 105.9 193.6 264.5 326.2 351.8
(kgf·m) (7.21) (10.7) (14.5) (26.7) (36.5) (45.0) (48.7)
Rotor Inertia J (GD2/4) lb·ft2 1.614 1.970 2.563 6.146 11.22 13.00 13.00
(kg·m2) (0.068) (0.083) (0.108) (0.259) (0.473) (0.548) (0.548)
14
Ambient Temperature, Humidity 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F), 95% or less (non-condensing)
Approx. Mass lb 207 238 291 481 783 893 893
(kg) (94) (108) (132) (218) (355) (405) (405)
Model CIMR-M5j*3 45P5 47P5 4011 4015 4018 4022 4030
(A) 8.8 13.1 17.9 26.2 35.7 44.1 52.4

(A) 10.4 15.5 20 28 40 49 56.5

I verter
er

Inve

Approx. Mass lb (kg) 11 (5) 27 (12) 35 (16)
Applicable Magnetic Contactor
Model HV-75AP4 HV-150AP4
Width 3.94 (100) 5.91 (150) 9.84 (250)

Height 13.78 (350)
(mm) *4
Depth 12.60 (320)
Model CIMR-MR5j*3 45P5 47P5 4011 4015 4018 4022 4030
ollerr
Required Power Capacity (kVA) 9 12 19 24 30 36 48

Contro

(A) 6.7 9.85 13.4 19.7 26.8 33.1 39.3
C

(A) 8.8 13.1 17.9 26.2 35.7 44.1 52.4
Converter *55
Control Power Supply (Allowable voltage fluctuation: +10% to −15%, allowable frequency fluctuation: ±5%)
Co

Approx. Mass lb (kg) 11 (5) 27 (12) 46 (21)
Width 3.94 (100) 5.91 (150) 9.84 (250)
Height 13.78 (350)
(mm) *4
Depth 12.60 (320)
Power Supply AC Reactor Code
No. X002501 X010099 X010100 X010101 X010102 X010103 X010104
14 -8
14.1 Drives
Model CIMR-M5j*3 45P5 47P5 4011 4015 4018 4022 4030

CIMR-MR5j*3
roller
er
n
mon

Comm
ontro

Co
Co
IEC IP00
* 1. UAASKB-30FZ***E 30/20 kW is 20 minutes (50%ED)/Continuous rated value.

* 2. Rated output power is guaranteed when input voltage is three-phase, 400 V (50/60 Hz), 440 V (50/60 Hz), 460 V (60 Hz).
If input voltage is lower than 400 V, rated output power is not guaranteed.
14
14 -9
Specifications
14.1.3 Dimensions
14.1.3 Dimensions
The Inverter and Converter dimensions are shown in the following diagrams.
J Inverter (VS-626M5) External Heatsink Cooling Type

The figures below show a 200 V 10 HP (7.5 kW) model.
Air
H1
H
14 Max.70mm
(2.76 inches)
H2
Air
W1 4-d D1 D2
W D
Fig 14.1 Inverter Dimensions
Table 14.5 VS-626M5 Inverter Dimensions and Approx. Mass

External Heatsink Cooling Type Dimensions in mm (inches)
Model
Voltage Approx.
CIMR-
Class W H D W1 H1 H2 D1 D2 Mass d
M5j*
kg (lb)
23P7
25P5 100 350 320 75 330 10 190 130 5 M5
(3.94) (13.78) (12.6) (2.95) (12.99) (0.39) (7.48) (5.12) (11)
27P5
2011
2015 150 350 320 100 330 10 190 130 12
200 V M5
class 2018 (5.91) (13.78) (12.6) (3.94) (12.99) (0.39) (7.48) (5.12) (26)
2022
200 350 320 150 330 10 190 130 16
2030 (7.87) (13.78) (12.6) (5.91) (12.99) (0.39) (7.48) (5.12) (35) M5
300 350 320 250 330 10 190 130 26

2037 (11.81) (13.78) (12.6) (9.84) (12.99) (0.39) (7.48) (5.12) (57) M6
45P5
47P5 100 350 320 75 330 10 190 130 6 M5
(3.94) (13.78) (12.6) (2.95) (12.99) (0.39) (7.48) (5.12) (13)
4011
4015
400 V 150 350 320 100 330 10 190 130 12
4018 M5
class (5.91) (13.78) (12.6) (3.94) (12.99) (0.39) (7.48) (5.12) (26)
4022
4030
4037 250 350 320 200 330 10 190 130 16 M5
(9.84) (13.78) (12.6) (7.87) (12.99) (0.39) (7.48) (5.12) (35)
4045
* A: For stand-alone drive system N: for NC system
14 -10
14.1 Drives
J Inverter (VS-626M5) Open Chassis Type

Air
H1
H
Max.70mm
(2.76 inches)
14
H2
Air
W1
W 4-d D
Fig 14.2 Inverter Dimensions
Table 14.6 VS-626M5 Dimensions and Approx. Mass

Open Chassis Type Dimensions in mm (inches)
Voltage Model CIMR- W H D W1 H1 H2 Approx. d
Class M5j* Mass
kg (Ib)
23P7
25P5 100 385 324 75 370 75
7.5 6 M5
(3.94) (15.16) (12.76) (2.95) (14.57) (0.30) (13)
27P5
2011 16
2015 (35)
200 V 150 470 324 100 455 6.5 M5
class 2018 (5.91) (18.5) (12.76) (3.94) (17.91) (0.26)
16 5
16.5
2022 (36)
200 470 324 150 455 6.5 21.5
2030 (7.87) (18.5) (12.76) (5.91) (17.91) (0.26) (47) M5
300 470 324 250 455 7 35

2037 (11.81) (18.50) (12.76) (9.84) (17.91) (0.28) (1.38) M6
45P5 100 385 324 75 370 7.5 7 M5

47P5 (3.94) (15.16) (12.76) (2.95) (14.57) (0.30) (15)
4011 16
4015 (35)
150 470 324 100 455 6.5 M5
400 V (5.91) (18.5) (12.76) (3.94) (17.91) (0.26)
4018 16 5
16.5
class
4022 (36)
4030
4037 250 470 324 200 455 7 25 M6
(9.84) (18.50) (12.76) (7.87) (17.91) (0.28) (0.98)
4045
Note: The 2037 and 4030 to 4045 models are in development.

14 -11
Specifications
14.1.3 Dimensions
J Converter (VS-656MR5) External Heatsink Cooling Type

Air
H1
H
Max.70mm
14
(2.76 inches)
H2
Air
W1 4-d D1 D2
W D
Fig 14.3 Dimensions of the Converter
Table 14.7 VS-656MR5 Dimensions and Approx. Mass

Voltage Model CIMR- W H D W1 H1 H2 D1 D2 Approx. d
Class MR5j* Mass
kg (Ib)
23P7
25P5 100 350 320 75 330 10 190 130 5 M5
(3.94) (13.78) (12.6) (2.95) (12.99) (0.39) (7.48) (5.12) (11)
27P5
2011
2015 150 350 320 100 330 10 190 130 12
200 V M5
class 2018 (5.91) (13.78) (12.6) (3.94) (12.99) (0.39) (7.48) (5.12) (26)
2022
200 350 320 150 330 10 190 130 16
2030 (7.87) (13.78) (12.6) (5.91) (12.99) (0.39) (7.48) (5.12) (35) M5
300 350 320 250 330 10 190 130 26

2037 (11.8) (13.78) (12.6) (9.84) (12.99) (0.39) (7.48) (5.12) (57.3) M6
45P5 100 350 320 75 330 10 190 130 7 M5

47P5 (3.94) (13.78) (12.6) (2.95) (12.99) (0.39) (7.48) (5.12) (15)
4011
4015 150 350 320 100 330 10 190 130 12
400 V M5
4018 (5.91) (13.78) (12.6) (3.94) (12.99) (0.39) (7.48) (5.12) (26)
class
4022
4030
4037 250 350 320 200 330 10 190 130 21 M5
(9.84) (13.78) (12.6) (7.87) (12.99) (0.39) (7.48) (5.12) (46)
4045
14 -12
14.1 Drives
J Converter (VS-656MR5) Open Chassis Type

Air
H1
H Max.70mm
(2.76 inches)
H2
W1
Air
14
W D
4-d
Fig 14.4 Dimensions of the Converter
Table 14.8 VS-656MR5 Dimensions and Approx. Mass

Voltage Model CIMR- W H D W1 H1 H2 Approx. d
Class MR5j* Mass
kg (Ib)
23P7
25P5 100 385 324 75 370 75
7.5 6 M5
(3.94) (15.16) (12.76) (2.95) (14.57) (0.30) (13)
27P5
2011 16
2015 (35)
200 V 150 470 324 100 455 6.5 M5
class 2018 (5.91) (18.5) (12.76) (3.94) (17.91) (0.26)
16 5
16.5
2022 (36)
200 470 324 150 455 6.5 21.5
2030 (7.87) (18.5) (12.76) (5.91) (17.91) (0.26) (47) M5
300 470 324 250 455 7 40

2037 (11.81) (18.50) (12.76) (9.84) (17.91) (0.28) (1.57) M6
45P5 100 385 324 75 370 7.5 8 M5

47P5 (3.94) (15.16) (12.76) (2.95) (14.57) (0.30) (18)
4011 16
4015 (35)
150 470 324 100 455 6.5 M5
400 V (5.91) (18.5) (12.76) (3.94) (17.91) (0.26)
4018 16 5
16.5
class
4022 (36)
4030
4037 250 470 324 200 455 7 30 M6
(9.84) (18.50) (12.76) (7.87) (17.91) (0.28) (0.98)
4045
Note: The 2037 and 4030 to 4045 models are in development.

14 -13
Specifications
14.1.4 Panel Cutout Dimensions for External Heatsink Cooling Type
14.1.4 Panel Cutout Dimensions for External Heatsink Cooling Type

Refer to the following diagram for panel cutout.
W
W2 W1 4-C
(H2)
H6
Opening
H5
H1
14
H
H3
H4
W4 W5
H2
W3 W6 Dust Gasket (Hatched Area)

Note: Gasket is attached on mounting area
of Converter and Inverter unit.
CIMR-
Volt-
M5j*
age W W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 H H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 C
CIMR-
Class MR5j*
23P7 99 75 12 3.5 8.5 5.5 89 350 330 10 18 28 300 22 M5

25P5 (3.90) (2.95) (0.47) (0.14) (0.33) (0.22) (3.50) (13.8) (13.0) (0.39) (0.71) (1.10) (11.8) (0.87) (0.24
27P5 dia)
2011 149 100 24.5 4.5 20 20 140 350 330 10 18 28 300 22 M5
2015 (5.87) (3.94) (0.96) (0.18) (0.79) (0.79) (5.51) (13.8) (13.0) (0.39) (0.71) (1.10) (11.8) (0.87) (0.24
2018 dia)
200 V 2022
class
2030 199 150 24.5 4.5 20 20 190 350 330 10 18 28 300 22 M5
(7.83) (5.91) (0.96) (0.18) (0.79) (0.79) (7.48) (13.8) (13.0) (0.39) (0.71) (1.10) (11.8) (0.87) (0.24
dia)
2037 299 250 24.5 4.5 20 20 290 350 330 10 18 28 300 22 M6
(11.78) (9.84) (0.96) (0.18) (0.79) (0.79) (11.42) (13.8) (13.0) (0.39) (0.71) (1.10) (11.8) (0.87) (0.28
dia)
45P5 99 75 12 3.5 8.5 5.5 89 350 330 10 18 28 300 22 M5
47P5 (3.90) (2.95) (0.47) (0.14) (0.33) (0.22) (3.50) (13.8) (13.0) (0.39) (0.71) (1.10) (11.8) (0.87) (0.24
dia)
4011 149 100 24.5 4.5 20 20 140 350 330 10 18 28 300 22 M5
400 V 4015 (5.87) (3.94) (0.96) (0.18) (0.79) (0.79) (5.51) (13.8) (13.0) (0.39) (0.71) (1.10) (11.8) (0.87) (0.24
class 4018 dia)
4022
2030 249 200 24.5 4.5 20 20 240 350 330 10 18 28 300 22 M5
4037 (9.80) (7.87) (0.96) (0.18) (0.79) (0.79) (9.45) (13.8) (13.0) (0.39) (0.71) (1.10) (11.8) (0.87) (0.24
4045 dia)

Fig 14.5 Panel Cutout Dimensions in mm (inches)
14 -14
14.1 Drives
14.1.5 Calorific Value and Cooling Air Speed

The following tables show the calorific value and cooling air speed of the Inverter and the Converter unit.
Table 14.9 Calorific Value and Cooling Air Speed of Inverter Unit (200 V class)
Inverter Model
23P7 25P5 27P5 2011 2015 2018 2022 2030 2037
CIMR-M5j*1
Output Con- 30- Con- 30- Con- 30- Con- 30- Con- 30- Con- 30- Con- 30- Con- 30- Con- 30-
tinu- min- tinu- min- tinu- min- tinu- min- tinu- min- tinu- min- tinu- min- tinu- min- tinu- min-
ous ute ous ute ous ute ous ute ous ute ous ute ous ute ous ute ous ute
Open Chassis 185 257 185 257 244 316 307 427 454 597 565 680 717 836 869 1147 1061 1344
Type
Total calorific
value*2 (W)
External Outside 127 188 127 188 167 229 218 320 335 456 421 519 537 638 650 887 809 1029
Heatsink of
Cooling heatsink
Type
yp (W)
Inside 58 69 58 69 77 87 89 107 119 141 144 161 180 198 219 260 252 315
of
heatsink
(W) 14
Cooling air speed 2.5
near heatsink (m/s)
Table 14.10 Calorific Value and Cooling Air Speed of Inverter Unit (400 V class)
Inverter Model
45P5 47P5 4011 4015 4018 4022 4030 4037 4045
CIMR-M5j*1
Open Chassis Type 117 192 170 247 273 288 354 488 512 583 630 674 759 939 934 1130 1298 1691
Total calorific
value*2 (W)
Heatsink of
Cooling heatsink
Type
yp (W)
Inside of 61 72 76 88 127 129 147 167 184 195 211 217 271 298 322 352 388 448
heatsink
(W)
near heatsink (m/s)
Table 14.11 Calorific Value and Cooling Air Speed of Converter Unit (200 V class)
Inverter Model
23P7 25P5 27P5 2011 2015 2018 2022 2030 2037
CIMR-MR5j*1
Total calorific
value*2 (W)
Heatsink of
Cooling heatsink
Type
yp (W)
Inside of 44 48 44 48 61 65 70 76 88 96 108 115 132 139 160 175 193 272
heatsink
(W)
near heatsink (m/s)
14 -15
Specifications
14.1.5 Calorific Value and Cooling Air Speed
Table 14.12 Calorific Value and Cooling Air Speed of Converter Unit (400 V class)
Inverter Model
45P5 47P5 4011 4015 4018 4022 4030 4037 4045
CIMR-MR5j*
Total calorific value
(W)
Heatsink of
Cooling heatsink
Type
yp (W)
Inside of 38 41 47 49 77 80 126 130 114 117 133 135 192 199 207 212 235 241
heatsink
(W)
near heatsink (m/s)

14
14 -16
14.2 Standard Motor Specifications

This section explains the standard motor specifications.
14.2.1 Outline
The AC main axis motor is a squirrel cage induction motor ideal for the main axis drive of machine-tools
and high-speed drives on industrial devices. There are two series of models: Flange models for easy mount-
ing to machinery, and foot-mounted models. The features of both are given below.
J Wide Rated Output Ranges

The application of high-precision bearings, a high rigidity frame design, and other design elements enables
using the motor within the following ranges: Maximum speed of 8,000 min−1 (rated output range of 1:5.3)
at 7.5 kW maximum, maximum speed of 6,000 min−1 (rated output range of 1:4) from 11 kW to 22 kW,
and maximum speed of 4,500 min−1 (rated output range of 1:3.9) at 30 kW minimum. The winding selec-
tion motors have even wider rated output ranges, and achieve a rated output range of 1:12 without using
a speed change gear. Compact magnetic contactors having a transfer contact structure specialized for
winding selection are provided. For detailed specifications of the magnetic contactor, refer to 14.3.3 Mag-
netic Contactor Specifications for Winding Selection.
J Low Vibration 14
Low vibration is achieved by miniaturizing the motor and adjusting the dynamic balance for high-speed
drive.
J High Reliability
The motor protection conforms to IP44, and the speed detector uses a highly reliable 1024 P/R magnetic
field encoder.
J Cooling System
In all motors, cooling air enters from the load machine side and exits from the opposite side, avoiding expo-
sure of the machine to the exhaust. If the opposite air direction is preferred because of the machine configu-
ration, the cooling structure can be changed accordingly.
J 400 V Series
The mounting dimensions and other dimensions are the same as for the Standard 200 V Series. The Motor
Cooling Fan, however, is special for the 400 V Series.
14.2.2 Configuration
The motor configuration is shown in the following diagram.
6 5 3 4
7
8 2
10 2
Number Name Number Name

1 Output shaft 6 Stator winding
2 Bearings 7 Terminal box
3 Rotor 8 Cable socket
4 Rotor short environment 9 Cooling fan
5 Stator 10 Encoder
Fig 14.6 Motor Configuration
14 -17
Specifications
14.2.2 Configuration
Encoder
board
Encoder
connector U V W
Z1 Z2 Z3
Main circuit Fan power

supply ter-
terminals minals
Cable connector Cable connector
Fig 14.7 Terminal and Connector Arrangement
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
EL Connector (ELR-12V)
14 Number Terminal Number Terminal

1 5 VDC 7 PC
2 0V 8 :PC
3 PA 9 FG (Frame Ground)
4 :PA 10 SS (Shield)
5 PB 11 TS
6 :PB 12
Fig 14.8 Encoder Connector
The common motor specifications are shown in the following table.

Table 14.13 Common Motor Specifications
Isolation F type
Cooling Fan Fan motor: Thermostat (auto resetting)
3-phase 200 V 50/60 Hz, 220 V 50/60 Hz, 230 V 60 Hz,
400 V 50/60 Hz, 440 V 50/60 Hz, 460 V 60 Hz
Overheating Protection NTC Thermistor
Detector Magnetic field encoder
Mounting Direction Output shaft can be between horizontal to vertically down.
Bearing Lubrication Grease
Color Munsell N1.5
Ambient Temperature 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Humidity 95% max. (with no condensation)
Elevation 1000 m (3281 ft) max.
Insulation Voltage Resistance 1500 VAC for 1 min. (200 V Series)
1800 VAC for 1 min. (400 V Series)
Insulation Resistance 500 VDC, 10 MΩ min.
Conforming Standards JIS, JEC
14 -18
14.2.3 Output and Torque Speed Characteristics

The output and torque speed characteristics are shown in the following graphs.
J Standard Motors
The output characteristics are the same for both the 200 V and 400 V Series. Note that 3.7/2.2 kW is avail-
able only for the 200 V Series, and 45/37 kW is available only for the 400 V Series.
3.7/2.2 kW (200 V Series)

(kgf•m) (N•m)
2.88 28.3
4.4 kW (1 min. rating)
4 3.7 kW (15 min. rating, 50% ED) 2.40 23.5
1 min. rating
Output (kW)
15 min. rating (50% ED)
Torque
2.2 kW (Continuous rating) 1.43 14.0
2
14
Continuous
rating
0 0
0 1500 8000 1500 8000
Motor speed (min−1) Motor speed (min−1)
5.5/3.7 kW (200 V and 400 V Series)

(kgf•m) (N•m)
4.28 42.0
6
5.5 kW (30 min. rating, 50% ED)
3.57 35.0
4.44 kW 1 min. rating
4 3.7 kW (Continuous rating)
Output (kW)
3.7 kW
2.40 23.5 30 min. rating (50% ED)
Torque
2.5 kW
2
Continuous
rating
0 1500 6000 8000 0 0

1500 6000 8000
14 -19
Specifications
7.5/5.5 kW (200 V and 400 V Series)
(kgf•m) (N•m)
9.0 kW (1 min. rating) 5.84 57.3
8 7.5 kW (30 min. rating, 50% ED)

4.87 47.7
6 5.5 kW (Continuous rating) 1 min. rating
3.57 35.0
Output (kW)

4
Torque
2 Continuous
rating
0 1500 8000 0 0
1500 8000
14
11/7.5 kW (200 V and 400 V Series)
(kgf•m) (N•m)
13.2 kW (1 min. rating) 8.57 84.0
12
11 kW (30 min. rating, 50% ED) 7.14 70.0

4.87 47.7
Output (kW)

Torque
4
Continuous
rating
0 1500 6000 0 0
1500 6000
15/11 kW (200 V and 400 V Series)
(kgf•m) (N•m)
18 kW (1 min. rating) 11.7 114.6
16 15 kW (30 min. rating, 50% ED) 9.74 95.5
1 min. rating
12 11 kW (Continuous rating) 7.14 70.0
Output (kW)
8
Torque
4 Continuous
rating
0 0
0 1500 6000 1500 6000
14 -20
18.5/15 kW (200 V and 400 V Series)
(kgf•m) (N•m)
24 22.2 kW (1 min. rating) 14.4 141.3
18.5 kW (30 min. rating, 50% ED) 12.0 117.6
16 15 kW (Continuous rating) 9.74 95.5 1 min. rating

Output (kW)
Torque
8
Continuous
rating
0 0
0 1500 6000 1500 6000
14
22/18.5 kW (200 V and 400 V Series)
(kgf•m) (N•m)
17.1 168.1
24
22 kW (30 min. rating, 50% ED)
14.3 140.0
18.5 kW (Continuous rating)
12.0 117.6 1 min. rating
16
Output (kW)
Torque
8
Continuous
rating
0 1500 6000 0 0
1500 6000
30/22 kW (200 V and 400 V Series)
(kgf•m) (N•m)
36 kW (1 min. rating) 30.5 298.9
32 30 kW (30 min. rating, 50% ED) 25.4 249.1
24 22 kW (Continuous rating) 18.6 182.3 1 min. rating

Output (kW)

Torque
16
8 Continuous
rating
0 0
0 1150 4500 1150 4500
14 -21
Specifications
37/30 kW (200 V and 400 V Series)
44.4 kW (1 min. rating) (kgf•m) (N•m)

44.4 37.6 368.7
37 31.3 306.8
30 kW (Con-
tinuous rating) 31.2 kW
30 25.4 249.0
1 min. rating
Output (kW)
26 kW
Torque
22 kW 30 min. rating (50% ED)
Continuous rating
0 0
1150 3800 4500 1150 3800 4500
14 45/37 kW (400 V Series)

(kgf•m) (N•m)
54 kW (1 min. rating)
54 45.7 448.4

45 38.1 373.7
37 kW (Continuous rating)
37 31.3 306.8 1 min. rating
36 kW
Output (kW)
30 kW 30 min. rating (50% ED)

Torque
26 kW
Continuous rating
0 0
1150 3800 4500 1150 3800 4500
Motor rating (min−1) Motor speed (min−1)
Fig 14.9 Output and Torque Speed Characteristics for Standard Motors
14 -22
J Winding Selection Motors

The output characteristics are the same for both the 200 V and 400 V Series.
5.5/3.7 kW (200 V and 400 V Series)

(kgf•m) (N•m)
8
12.8 126
Low-speed winding output (kW)
6.6 kW (1 min. rating) 1 min. rating

10.7 105
6 5.5 kW (30 min. rating, 50% ED)

7.21 71
Continuous rating
(Low-speed
Torque
2 winding)
0 500 1500
0
0 500 1500 14
8 (kgf•m) (N•m)
High-speed winding output (kW)
4.28 42.0
6 3.57 35.0 1 min. rating
5.5 kW (30 min. rating, 50% ED)

4 3.7 kW (Continuous rating) 2.40 23.5
Continuous rating
Torque
(High-speed
2 winding)
0 0
1500 6000 0 1500 6000
14 -23
Specifications
7.5/5.5 kW (200 V and 400 V Series)

(kgf•m) (N•m)
10
Low-speed winding output (kW) 9 kW (1 min. rating) 17.5 172
1 min. rating
8 7.5 kW (30 min. rating, 50% ED) 14.5 143
6 5.5 kW (Continuous rating) 10.7 105 30 min. rating (50% ED)
4 Continuous (Low-speed
Torque
rating winding)
2
0 0
500 1500 0 500 1500
(kgf•m) (N•m)
10
5.84 57.3
8 7.5 kW (30 min. rating, 50% ED)

14 4.87 47.7 1 min. rating
6 5.5 kW (Continuous rating) 30 min. rating (50% ED)
3.57 35.0
Continuous High-speed
4 rating
Torque
winding
0 1500 6000 0 0 6000

1500
14 -24
11/7.5 kW (200 V and 400 V Series)

(kgf•m) (N•m)
14 13.2 kW (1 min. rating) 25.7 252
12 1 min. rating
11 kW (30 min. rating, 50% ED) 21.4 210
10
8 7.5 kW (Continuous rating) 30 min. rating (50% ED)

14.5 143
6
Continuous (Low-speed
Torque
4 rating winding)
0 500 1500 0 0 500 1500

(kgf•m) (N•m)
14 13.2 kW (1 min. rating) 8.57 84.0
12 11 kW (30 min. rating, 50% ED)

10
7.14 70.0
1 min. rating 14
7.5 kW (Continuous rating) 30 min. rating (50% ED)
8 4.87 47.7
6 Continuous High-speed
rating
Torque
winding
4
0 0 0 1500 6000
1500 6000
14 -25
Specifications
15/11 kW (200 V and 400 V Series)

(kgf•m) (N•m)
20
18 kW (1 min. rating) 43.8 430
16 15 kW (30 min. rating, 50% ED) 36.5 358
1 min. rating
12 11 kW (Continuous rating) 26.7 262

8 Continuous (Low-
Torque
rating speed
winding)
4
0
0 400 1000 0 400 1000
20 (kgf•m) (N•m)
17.5 172
14
16 15 kW (30 min. rating, 50% ED)

14.6 143
1 min. rating
12 11 kW (Continuous rating)
10.7 105
Torque
rating winding
4
0 1000 4800 0 0 1000 4800

14 -26
18.5/15 kW (200 V and 400 V Series)

54.0 530
20 18.5 kW (30 min. rating, 50% ED)
45.0 442
15 kW (Continuous rating) 1 min. rating
15 36.5 358
Torque
10 Continuous (Low-
rating speed
winding)
5
0
0 400 1000 0 400 1000
Motor rating (min−1) Motor rating (min−1)

21.6 212
20 18.5 kW (30 min. rating, 50% ED)

18.0 177 14
15 kW (Continuous rating) 1 min. rating
15 14.6 143

Torque
rating winding
5
0 0
1000 4800 0 1000 4800
Motor rating (min−1) Motor speed (min−1)
14 -27
Specifications
22/18.5 kW (200 V and 400 V Series)

(kgf•m) (N•m)
64.2 630
25
22 kW (2 min. rating, 50% ED) 53.5 525

45.0 442
15 20 min. rating (50% ED)
Torque
Continuous rating
10
Low-speed
5 winding
0 400 1000 0
0 400 1000
25 25.7 252

21.4 210
20
18.0 177
1 min. rating
15 Torque 30 min. rating (50% ED)
10 Continuous rating
High-speed
5 winding
0 1000 4800 0
0 1000 4800
Motor speed (min−1)
14 -28
30/20 kW (200 V and 400 V Series)

(kgf•m) (N•m)
87.6 859
Low-speed winding output (kW) 30 30 kW (2 min. rating, 50% ED) 73.0 716
1 min. rating
20 kW (Continuous rating) 20 min. rating (50% ED)
Torque
20 48.7 477
Continuous rating
Low-speed
10 winding
0
0 400 1000 0 400 1000
(kgf•m) (N•m)
35.1 344
30 kW (2 min. rating,
50% ED) 31.2 kW

30 29.2 286
26 kW 1 min. rating 14
20 kW (Continuous rating) 19.5 191
20 20 min. rating (50% ED)
Torque
Continuous rating
10 High-speed
winding
0 1000 4000 4800 0 0 1000 4000 4800

Fig 14.10 Output and Torque Speed Characteristics (Winding Selection Motor)
14 -29
Specifications
14.2.4 Dimensions
14.2.4 Dimensions
The motor dimensions are shown in the following diagram. (unit: mm)
J Standard Motors, Foot-mounted Type

jD L
KI A R
B
KD
H
C
G
J J F F XB
4-φZ:
E E N
Diameter of
mounting hole M
Detail of Shaft
14
U
W
U
QK W
T
T
3-m screw d 2-m screw

QR
Depth 10 Depth 10
Q S S
(For 3.7/2.2 kW)
Unit: mm (inch)
Rated Output kW 0
−0.5
05
30
Continuous A B C D E F G H J KD L M N R XB Z KI
min.
Rating
Rating
3.7 *1 2.2 237 93 100 174 80 50 9 242 34 34 392 188 125 155 45 12 174
(9.33) (3.66) (3.94) (6.85) (3.15) (1.97) (0.35) (9.53) (1.34) (1.34) (15.4) (7.4) (4.92) (6.1) (1.77) (0.47) (6.85)
5.5 3.7 308 132 100 174 80 89 9 242 34 34 502 188 206 194 45 12 174
(12.1) (5.2) (3.94) (6.85) (3.15) (3.5) (0.35) (9.53) (1.34) (1.34) (19.8) (7.4) (8.11) (7.64) (1.77) (0.47) (6.85)
7.5 5.5 300 137 112 204 95 70 10 269 75 42.5 520 220 177 220 70 12 204
(11.8) (5.39) (4.41) (8.03) (3.74) (2.76) (0.39) (10.6) (2.95) (1.67) (20.5) (8.66) (6.97) (8.66) (2.76) (0.47) (8.03)
11 7.5 321 156 112 204 95 89 10 269 75 42.5 590 220 215 269 70 12 204
(12.6) (6.14) (4.41) (8.03) (3.74) (3.5) (0.39) (10.6) (2.95) (1.67) (23.2) (8.66) (8.46) (10.6) (2.76) (0.47) (8.03)
15 11 261 196 160 260 127 89 16 341 55 42.5 568 290 223 307 108 15 250
(10.3) (7.72) (6.3) (10.2) (5) (3.5) (0.63) (13.4) (2.17) (1.67) (22.4) (11.4) (8.78) (12.1) (4.25) (0.59) (9.84)
18.5 15 283 212 160 260 127 105 16 341 55 42.5 606 290 255 323 108 15 250
(11.1) (8.35) (6.3) (10.2) (5) (4.13) (0.63) (13.4) (2.17) (1.67) (23.9) (11.4) (1) (12.7) (4.25) (0.59) (9.84)
22 18.5 297 234 160 260 127 127 16 341 55 42.5 642 290 299 345 108 15 250
(11.7) (9.21) (6.3) (10.2) (5) (5) (0.63) (13.4) (2.17) (1.67) (25.3) (11.4) (11.8) (13.6) (4.25) (0.59) (9.84)
30 22 406 246 180 320 139.5 127 16 407 55 61 794 320 298 388 121 19 320
(16) (9.69) (7.09) (12.6) (5.49) (5) (0.63) (16) (2.17) (2.4) (31.3) (12.6) (11.7) (15.3) (4.76) (0.75) (12.6)
37 30 460 297 180 320 139.5 178 16 407 55 61 899 320 400 439 121 19 320
(18.1) (11.7) (7.09) (12.6) (5.49) (7.01) (0.63) (16) (2.17) (2.4) (35.4) (12.6) (15.7) (17.3) (4.76) (0.75) (12.6)
45 *2 37 378 302 225 380 178 155.5 21 505 75 61 822.5 420 425 444.5 149 24 385
(14.9) (11.9) (8.86) (15) (7.01) (6.12) (0.83) (19.9) (2.95) (2.4) (32.4) (16.5) (16.7) (17.5) (5.87) (0.94) (15.2)
14 -30
Rated Output kW Shaft Dimensions

30 min. Continuous
Q QK QR S T U W d m
Rating Rating
3.7 *1 2.2 60 45 1 +0.009 7 4 8 16 M6
28
(2.36) (1.77) (0.039) −0.004 (0.28) (0.16) (0.31) (0.63)
5.5 3.7 60 45 1 0 7 4 8 22 M4
(2.36) (1.77) (0.039) 28 −0.013 (0.28) (0.16) (0.31) (0.87)
7.5 5.5 80 70 1 0 8 5 (0.2) 10 22 M5
(3.15) (2.76) (0.039) 32 −0.016 (0.31) (0.39) (0.87)
11 7.5 110 90 0.5 0 9 5.5 14 40 M5
(4.33) (3.54) (0.02) 48 −0.016 (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) (1.57)
15 11 110 90 1 0 9 5.5 14 40 M5
(4.33) (3.54) (0.039) 48 −0.016 (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) (1.57)
18.5 15 110 90 1 0 9 5.5 14 40 M5
(4.33) (3.54) (0.039) 48 −0.016 (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) (1.57)
22 18.5 110 90 1 +0.030 10 6 16 45 M5
(4.33) (3.54) (0.039) 55 +0.011 (0.39) (0.24) (0.63) (1.77)
30 22 140 110 2 +0.030 11 7 18 50 M6
(5.51) (4.33) (0.079) 60 +0.011 (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) (1.97)
37 30 140
(5.51)
110
(4.33)
2
(0.079) 60
+0.030
+0.011
11
(0.43)
7
(0.28)
18
(0.71)
50
(1.97)
M6
14
45 *2 37 140 110 1 +0.030 12 7.5 20 60 M6
(5.51) (4.33) (0.039) 70 +0.011 (0.47) (0.3) (0.79) (2.36)
* 1. 3.7/2.2 kW is 15 min. rating (50% ED)/Continuous rating. There are no eyebolts on the 3.7/2.2 kW or 5.5/3.7 kW models.
* 2. 45/37 kW is for the 400 V Series.
Notes:1. The shaft key and the key way are standard JIS B 1301-1996 models.
2. External dimensions are the same for both the 200 V and 400 V Series.
14 -31
Specifications
14.2.4 Dimensions
J Standard Motors, Flange Type
KD
LL
L
jD
LG
LR
5
Q
Detail of Shaft
LB
U
W
U
QK W
LH
T
T
LC
KI
I
LA
14
j
3-m screw
QR d 2-m screw
Depth 10
Q S Depth 10
S
4-φZ: KL
Diameter of (For 3.7/2.2 kW)
mounting hole
Unit: mm (inch)
Rated Output kW
30 L LA LB LC LG LH LL LR Z D I KD KL KI
Continuous
min.
Rating
Rating
3.7 *1 2.2 392 185 0 174 12 220 332 60 11 174 --- 34 142 174
(15.4) (7.28) 150 −0.04 (6.85) (0.47) (8.66) (13.1) (2.36) (0.43) (6.85) (1.34) (5.59) (6.85)
5.5 3.7 502 185 0 174 12 220 442 60 11 174 --- 34 142 174
(19.8) (7.28) 150 −0.04 (6.85) (0.47) (8.66) (17.4) (2.36) (0.43) (6.85) (1.34) (5.59) (6.85)
7.5 5.5 526 215 0 204 16 250 446 80 15 204 270 42.5 157 204
(20.7) (8.46) 180 −0.04 (8.03) (0.63) (9.84) (17.6) (3.15) (0.59) (8.03) (10.6) (1.67) (6.18) (8.03)
11 7.5 596 215 0 204 16 250 486 110 15 204 270 42.5 157 204
(23.5) (8.46) 180 −0.04 (8.03) (0.63) (9.84) (19.1) (4.33) (0.59) (8.03) (10.6) (1.67) (6.18) (8.03)
15 11 568 265 0 250 20 300 458 110 15 260 343 42.5 182.5 250
(22.4) (10.4) 230 −0.046 (9.84) (0.79) (11.8) (18) (4.33) (0.59) (10.2) (13.5) (1.67) (7.19) (9.84)
18.5 15 606 265 0 250 20 300 496 110 15 260 343 42.5 182.5 250
(23.9) (10.4) 230 −0.046 (9.84) (0.79) (11.8) (19.5) (4.33) (0.59) (10.2) (13.5) (1.67) (7.19) (9.84)
22 18.5 642 265 0 250 20 300 532 110 15 260 343 42.5 182.5 250
(25.3) (10.4) 230 −0.046 (9.84) (0.79) (11.8) (20.9) (4.33) (0.59) (10.2) (13.5) (1.67) (7.19) (9.84)
30 22 794 350 0 320 20 385 654 140 19 320 440 61 224 320
(31.3) (13.8) 300 −0.052 (12.6) (0.79) (15.2) (25.7) (5.51) (0.75) (12.6) (17.3) (2.4) (8.82) (12.6)
37 30 899 350 0 320 20 385 759 140 19 320 440 61 224 320
(35.4) (13.8) 300 −0.052 (12.6) (0.79) (15.2) (29.9) (5.51) (0.75) (12.6) (17.3) (2.4) (8.82) (12.6)
45 *2 37 827 400 0 370 22 450 687 140 24 380 505 61 280 385
(32.6) (15.7) 350 −0.057 (14.6) (0.87) (17.7) (27) (5.51) (0.94) (15) (19.9) (2.4) (11) (15.2)
14 -32

30
Continuous
min. Q QK QR S T U W d m
Rating
Rating
3.7 *1 2.2 60 45 1 +0.009 7 4 8 16 M6
(2.36) (1.77) (0.039) 28 −0.004 (0.28) (0.16) (0.31) (0.63)
5.5 3.7 60 45 1 0 7 4 8 22 M4
(2.36) (1.77) (0.039) 28−0.013 (0.28) (0.16) (0.31) (0.87)
7.5 5.5 80 70 1 0 8 5 10 22 M5
(3.15) (2.76) (0.039) 32−0.016 (0.31) (0.2) (0.39) (0.87)
11 7.5 110 90 0.5 0 9 5.5 14 40 M5
(4.33) (3.54) (0.02) 48−0.016 (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) (1.57)
15 11 110 90 1 0 9 5.5 14 40 M5
(4.33) (3.54) (0.039) 48−0.016 (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) (1.57)
18.5 15 110 90 1 0 9 5.5 14 40 M5
(4.33) (3.54) (0.039) 48−0.016 (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) (1.57)
22 18.5 110 90 1 +0.030 10 6 16 45 M5
(4.33) (3.54) (0.039) 55 +0.011 (0.39) (0.24) (0.63) (1.77)
30 22 140 110 2 +0.030 11 7 18 50 M6
60 +0.011
14
(5.51) (4.33) (0.079) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) (1.97)
37 30 140 110 2 +0.030 11 7 18 50 M6
(5.51) (4.33) (0.079) 60 +0.011 (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) (1.97)
45 *2 37 140 110 1 +0.030 12 7.5 20 60 M6
(5.51) (4.33) (0.039) 70 +0.011 (0.47) (0.3) (0.79) (2.36)
* 1. 3.7/2.2 kW is 15 min. rating (50% ED)/Continuous rating. There are no eyebolts on the 3.7/2.2 kW or 5.5/3.7 kW models.
* 2. 45/37 kW is for the 400 V Series.
14 -33
Specifications
14.2.4 Dimensions
J Winding Selection Motor, Foot-mounted Type

jD L
KI A R
B
KD
H
C
J
G
J F F XB
E E N
4-φZ:
M
Diameter of
mounting hole
Details of Shaft
U
QK W
14
T
3-m screw
QR
Depth 10
Q S
Unit: mm (inch)
Rated Output kW 0
A B −0.5
05 D E F G H J KD L M N R XB Z KI
30 min. Continuous
Rating Rating C
5.5 3.7 261 196 160 260 127 89 16 341 55 42.5 568 290 223 307 108 15 250
(10.3) (7.72) (6.3) (10.2) (5) (3.5) (0.63) (13.4) (2.17) (1.67) (22.4) (11.4) (8.78) (12.1) (4.25) (0.59) (9.84)
7.5 5.5 283 212 160 260 127 105 16 341 55 42.5 606 290 255 323 108 15 250
(11.1) (8.35) (6.3) (10.2) (5) (4.13) (0.63) (13.4) (2.17) (1.67) (23.9) (11.4) (1) (12.7) (4.25) (0.59) (9.84)
11 7.5 310.5 246.5 160 260 127 139.5 16 341 55 42.5 668 290 324 357.5 108 15 250
(12.2) (9.7) (6.3) (10.2) (5) (5.49) (0.63) (13.4) (2.17) (1.67) (26.3) (11.4) (12.8) (14.1) (4.25) (0.59) (9.84)
15 11 406 246 180 320 139.5 127 16 407 55 61 794 320 298 388 121 19 320
(16) (9.69) (7.09) (12.6) (5.49) (5) (0.63) (16) (2.17) (2.4) (31.3) (12.6) (11.7) (15.3) (4.76) (0.75) (12.6)
18.5 15 378 302 225 380 178 155.5 21 505 75 61 822.5 420 425 444.5 149 24 385
(14.9) (11.9) (8.86) (15) (7.01) (6.12) (0.83) (19.9) (2.95) (2.4) (32.4) (16.5) (16.7) (17.5) (5.87) (0.94) (15.2)
22 18.5 409 321 225 380 178 174.5 21 505 75 61 872.5 420 465 463.5 149 24 385
(16.1) (12.6) (8.86) (15) (7.01) (6.87) (0.83) (19.9) (2.95) (2.4) (34.4) (16.5) (18.3) (18.2) (5.87) (0.94) (15.2)
30 20 409 321 225 380 178 174.5 21 505 75 61 872.5 420 465 463.5 149 24 385
(16.1) (12.6) (8.86) (15) (7.01) (6.87) (0.83) (19.9) (2.95) (2.4) (34.4) (16.5) (18.3) (18.2) (5.87) (0.94) (15.2)

30
Continuous
min. Q QK QR S T U W d m
Rating
Rating
110 90 1 0 9 5.5 14 40
5.5 3.7 48−0.016 M5
(4.33) (3.54) (0.039) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) (1.57)
110 90 1 0 9 5.5 14 40
7.5 5.5 48−0.016 M5
(4.33) (3.54) (0.039) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) (1.57)
110 90 1 +0.030 10 6 16 45
11 7.5 55 +0.011 M5
(4.33) (3.54) (0.039) (0.39) (0.24) (0.63) (1.77)
140 110 2 +0.030 11 7 18 50
15 11 60 +0.011 M6
(5.51) (4.33) (0.079) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) (1.97)
140 110 1 +0.030 12 7.5 20 60
18.5 15 70 +0.011 M6
(5.51) (4.33) (0.039) (0.47) (0.3) (0.79) (2.36)
140 110 1 +0.030 12 7.5 20 60
22 18.5 70 +0.011 M6
(5.51) (4.33) (0.039) (0.47) (0.3) (0.79) (2.36)
140 110 1 +0.030 12 7.5 20 60
30 20 70 +0.011 M6
(5.51) (4.33) (0.039) (0.47) (0.3) (0.79) (2.36)
14 -34
J Winding Selection Motor, Flange Type
KD
LL
L
jD
LG
LR
5
Q
Details of Shaft
LB
QK W
U
LH
T
LC
KI
I
14
j LA
3-m screw
QR
Depth 10
Q S
4-φZ: KL
Diameter of
mounting hole
Unit: mm (inch)
Rated Output kW
30 min. Rat- Continuous L LA LB LC LG LH LL LR Z D I KD KL KI
ing Rating
568 265 0 250 20 300 458 110 15 260 343 42.5 182.5 250
5.5 3.7 230 −0.046
(22.4) (10.4) (9.84) (0.79) (11.8) (18) (4.33) (0.59) (10.2) (13.5) (1.67) (7.19) (9.84)
606 265 0 250 20 300 496 110 15 260 343 42.5 182.5 250
7.5 5.5 230 −0.046
(23.9) (10.4) (9.84) (0.79) (11.8) (19.5) (4.33) (0.59) (10.2) (13.5) (1.67) (7.19) (9.84)
668 265 0 250 20 300 558 110 15 260 343 42.5 182.5 250
11 7.5 230 −0.046
(26.3) (10.4) (9.84) (0.79) (11.8) (22) (4.33) (0.59) (10.2) (13.5) (1.67) (7.19) (9.84)
794 350 0 320 20 385 654 140 19 320 440 61 224 320
15 11 300 −0.052
(31.3) (13.8) (12.6) (0.79) (15.2) (25.7) (5.51) (0.75) (12.6) (17.3) (2.4) (8.82) (12.6)
827 400 0 370 22 450 687 140 24 380 505 61 280 385
18.5 15 350 −0.057
(32.6) (15.7) (14.6) (0.87) (17.7) (27) (5.51) (0.94) (15) (19.9) (2.4) (11) (15.2)
877 400 0 370 22 450 737 140 24 380 505 61 280 385
22 18.5 350 −0.057
(34.5) (15.7) (14.6) (0.87) (17.7) (29) (5.51) (0.94) (15) (19.9) (2.4) (11) (15.2)
877 400 0 370 22 450 737 140 24 380 505 61 280 385
30 20 350 −0.057
(34.5) (15.7) (14.6) (0.87) (17.7) (29) (5.51) (0.94) (15) (19.9) (2.4) (11) (15.2)
14 -35
Specifications
14.2.4 Dimensions
Rated Output
Shaft Dimension
kW
30 Contin-
min. uous Q QK QR S T U W d m
Rating Rating
110 90 1 0 9 5.5 14 40
5.5 3.7 48−0.016 M5
(4.33) (3.54) (0.039) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) (1.57)
110 90 1 0 9 5.5 14 40
7.5 5.5 48−0.016 M5
(4.33) (3.54) (0.039) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) (1.57)
110 90 1 +0.030 10 6 16 45
11 7.5 55 +0.011 M5
(4.33) (3.54) (0.039) (0.39) (0.24) (0.63) (1.77)
140 110 2 +0.030 11 7 18 50
15 11 60 +0.011 M6
(5.51) (4.33) (0.079) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) (1.97)
140 110 1 +0.030 12 7.5 20 60
18.5 15 70 +0.011 M6
(5.51) (4.33) (0.039) (0.47) (0.3) (0.79) (2.36)
140 110 1 +0.030 12 7.5 20 60
22 18.5 70 +0.011 M6
(5.51) (4.33) (0.039) (0.47) (0.3) (0.79) (2.36)
140 110 1 +0.030 12 7.5 20 60
30 20 70 +0.011 M6
(5.51) (4.33) (0.039) (0.47) (0.3) (0.79) (2.36)
14 Notes:1. The shaft key and the key way are standard JIS B 1301-1996 models.
14 -36
14.2.5 Tolerance Radial Loads

The tolerance radial loads for the motor are listed in the following table.
Table 14.14 Tolerance Radial Load (Shaft Tip)
Motor Model Rated Output (kW) Tolerance Radial Load (N)
UAASK - FZ
Standard Motor Winding Selection Motor
(UAASKA) (UAASKB)
04 3.7/2.2 1320 ---
06 5.5/3.7 1470 2940
08 7.5/5.5 1765 2940
11 11/7.5 1810 3530
15 15/11 2940 4900
19 18.5/15 2940 5200
22 22/18.5 3530 5200
30 *1 30/22 *3 4900 5200
37
45
*2 37/30
45/37
5200
5200
---
---
14
Note: Be sure that no axial load is imposed on the motor shaft.
* 1. Model 30 is UAASKJ-30FZ.
* 2. Model 37 is UAASKJ-37FZ.
* 3. The winding selection motor is 30/20.
14.2.6 Motor Total Indicator Readings
The motor TIR (Total Indicator Reading) are listed in the following tables.
J Foot-mounted Motors
Table 14.15 Leg-mounted Motor TIR
Item Standard Motor Winding Selection Motor Accuracy
Degree of Shaft Paral- 7.5/5.5 kW max. --- 0.03
lax
11/7.5 to 22/18.5 kW 5.5/3.7 to 11/7.5 kW 0.033
30/22 to 45/37 kW 15/11 to 30/20 kW 0.042
Shaft Vibration 7.5/5.5 kW max. --- 0.02
11/7.5 to 22/18.5 kW 5.5/3.7 to 11/7.5 kW 0.022
30/22 to 45/37 kW 15/11 to 30/20 kW 0.028
J Flange Motors
Table 14.16 Flange Motor TIR
Item Standard Motor Winding Selection Motor Accuracy
Right Angle to the 22/18.5 kW max. 11/7.5 kW max. 0.04
Flange Output Shaft
30/22 to 37/30 kW 15/11 kW 0.06
45/37 kW 18.5/15 to 30/20 kW 0.072
Flange External Diame- 11/7.5 kW max. --- 0.04
ter Eccentricity
15/11 to 22/18.5 kW 5.5/3.7 to 11/7.5 kW 0.046
30/22 to 37/30 kW 15/11 kW 0.048
45/37 kW 18.5/15 to 30/20 kW 0.070
Shaft Vibration 7.5/5.5 kW max. --- 0.02
11/7.5 to 22/18.5 kW 5.5/3.7 to 11/7/5 kW 0.022
30/22 to 45/37 kW 15/11 to 30/20 kW 0.028
14 -37
Specifications
14.2.7 Encoders
14.2.7 Encoders
A magnetic encoder that uses a magnetic disk is used as the motor speed detector. If there is a home position
signal, three detection signals are used: Two 1024 P/R AB phase signals, and one P/R home position pulse
signal. If using a main axis drive with a machine-tool, the signal resolution is the same as the main axis
encoder, and in machinery where the motor axis and main axis correspond 1:1, the motor encoder can be
used as the main axis encoder. The relationship between the encoder configuration and the output phase
during forward rotation is shown in the following diagram.
Magnetic
drum
N
S
N
S
N N
S S
N
S
N
Shaft S
N A
B
14 Magnetic sensor (magnetic

C
resistance element)
Fig 14.11 Encoder Configuration
Forward rotation
A phase
(PA)
90°
B phase
(PB)
C phase
(PC)
Fig 14.12 Output Phases (Forward Rotation)
14 -38
14.2.8 Encoder Connector

The terminal arrangement and dimensions of the encoder connector are given below.
J Terminal Arrangement
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
EL Connector (ELR-12V)
Number Name Number Name

1 5V 7 PC
2 0V 8 :PC
3 PA 9 FG (Frame Ground)
4
5
:PA
PB
10
11
SS (Shield)
TS
14
6 :PB 12
Notes:1. Pins 11 and 12 are thermistor signal wires from the motor unit.
2. The asterisk (:) before PA, PB, and PC indicate reverse rotation signals.
Fig 14.13 Encoder Signal Connector Terminal Arrangement
J Dimensions
Motor (Wiring Completed) Cable (Included with Motor Terminal Box)
Receptacle housing: ELR-12V Plug housing: ELP-12V
19.3
19.3
14.6
14.8 24.6
24.6 14.8
Pin contacts Socket contacts

LLM-01T-1.3E × 11 pins (pins 1 to 9, 11, and 12) LLF-01T-1.3E × 11 pins (pins 1 to 9, 11, and 12)
LLM-41T-1.3E × 1 pin (pin 10) LLF-41T-1.3E × 1 pin (pin 10)
1.3
φ
17.7 17.7
2.3 2.0 11.3 11.3 2.0 2.3
Notes:1. Manufacturer: JST Manufacturing Co., Ltd.

2. The cable connector housing and socket contact is built into the motor. Special tool:
YC-202 and YC-203. (manufactured by JST Manufacturing Co., Ltd.)
Fig 14.14 Encoder Signal Connector Dimensions
14 -39
Specifications
14.2.9 Spare Motor Parts
14.2.9 Spare Motor Parts

The model numbers of the spare parts for the motors are listed in the following tables.
Table 14.17 200 V Series Spare Motor Parts

Stan- Model UAASKA- FZ
dard
Motors 04 06 08 11 15 19 22 30 *1 37 *2
Encoder UTMSI-10AAGAZA UTMSI-10AAGBZA
Cooling B935P4562-1 B935P7267-1 B032P0341-1 B935P4690-1
Fan Mo-
tor *3
Winding Model UAASKB- FZ
Selec
Selec- *3
tion Mo-
Mo --- 06 08 11 15 19 22 30 ---
tors Encoder --- UTMSI-10AAGAZA UTMSI-10AAGBZA ---
Cooling --- B032P0341-1 B935P B935P6539-1 ---
Fan Mo- 4690-1
tor *3
14 * 1. Motor model is UAASKJ-30FZ.

* 2. Motor model is UAASKJ-37FZ.
* 3. When specifying the Cooling Fan Motor, also specify the casing. The casing must be replaced at the same time as the cooling
fan motor.
Table 14.18 400 V Series Spare Motor Parts
Stan- Model UAASKA- FZ:::E
dard
Motors 04 06 08 11 15 19 22 30 *1 37 *2 45 *3
Encoder UTMSI-10AAGAZA UTMSI-10AAGBZA
Cooling B935P5653-1 B032P0426-1 B032P0427-1 B935P5659-1 B935P6496-1
Fan Mo-
tor *4
Winding Model UAASKB- FZ:::E
Selec
Selec-
tion Mo-
Mo --- 06 08 11 *4 15 19 22 30 --- ---
tors Encoder --- UTMSI-10AAGAZA UTMSI-10AAGBZA --- ---
Cooling --- B032P0427-1 B935P B935P6496-1 --- ---
Fan Mo- 5659-1
tor *4
* 1. Motor model is UAASKJ-30FZ***E.

* 4. When specifying the cooling fan motor, also specify the casing. The casing must be replaced at the same time as the cooling
fan motor.
14 -40
14.2.10 Replacing the Motor Cooling Fan

The AC main axis motor is cooled using a cooling fan mounted to the back of the motor. If the cooling fan
malfunctions due to dirt or damage, replace the cooling fan immediately. For spare parts, refer to 14.2.9
Spare Motor Parts.
IMPORTANT Never replace the cooling fan or insert or remove wiring while the power supply is turned ON. Also, when
replacing the cooling fan or inserting or removing wiring, be sure not to drop screws or other small parts into
the motor unit.
Replace the Motor Cooling Fan using the following procedure.

1. Turn OFF the power supply. Make sure the main circuit capacitor has fully discharged by confirming
that the CHARGE indicator is not lit before starting work.
2. Remove the cooling fan lead cables inside the terminal box, and pull out the lead cables from the lead
cable vent.
3. Remove the four screws used to mount the casing to the motor unit, and the screws within the terminal
box used to fix the terminal box to the casing.
4. Remove the cooling fan and the casing as a single unit.
5. Perform steps 1. to 4. in reverse to mount the new cooling fan and the casing as a single unit to the motor 14
unit.
6. Apply Three Bond No. 1212 to the lead cable vent on the terminal box to seal the vent.
Note: When performing step 4., if the casing and terminal box interfere with each other making
it difficult to remove the casing, loosen the terminal box mounting screws.
Terminal box
Casing (Forms
Casing mounting single unit with
screws (x 4) cooling fan.)
Motor unit
Casing Mounting
Terminal box mounting screw
Cooling fan lead wires
Lead wire vent
Casing fixing screw
Terminal Box Exterior

Fig 14.15 Replacing the Motor Cooling Fan
14 -41
Specifications
14.3.1 AC Reactor
14.3 Options and Peripheral Units

This section explains the specifications for the options and peripheral units.
14.3.1 AC Reactor
The exterior of the AC Reactor (UZBA-B: Input, 50/60 Hz) and connections examples are shown below.
Connection Example
Magnetic AC Reactor
MCCB contactor U X R/L1
V Y Converter
W S/L2VS-656MR5
Z
T/L3
J With Terminal Block

Select an AC reactor from the table below according to Converter (VS-656MR5) model.
14 200 V Class
Dimensions in mm (inches)
Model Cur - Induc- Approx. Heat
Code Fig.
Fig
CIMR- rent tance A B1 Mass Loss
No. No. A1 B B2 C1 C2 D E F I J K L M
MR5V: A mH (Max.) (Max.) kg (lb) W
23P7 20 0.53 X010 1 130 — 88 60 44 105±5 25 50 70 130 3.2 M6 9 7 M4 3 35

057 (5.12) (3.46) (2.36) (1.73) (4.13±0.2) (0.98) (1.97) (2.76) (5.12) (0.13) (0.35) (0.28) (6.6)
25P5 30 0.35 X010 1 130 — 88 60 44 105±5 40 50 70 130 3.2 M6 9 7 M5 3 45

058 (5.12) (3.46) (2.36) (1.73) (4.13±0.2) (1.57) (1.97) (2.76) (5.12) (0.13) (0.35) (0.28) (6.6)
27P5 40 0.265 X010 2 130 150 98 65 49 105±5 40 50 80 130 3.2 M6 9 7 M6 4 50

059 (5.12) (5.91) (3.86) (2.56) (1.93) (4.13±0.2) (1.57) (1.97) (3.15) (5.12) (0.13) (0.35) (0.28) (8.8)
2011 60 0.18 X010 1 160 — 105 75 52.5 130±5 40 75 85 160 2.3 M6 10 7 M6 6 65

060 (6.3) (4.13) (2.95) (2.07) (5.12±0.2) (1.57) (2.95) (3.35) (6.3) (0.09) (0.39) (0.28) (13.2)
2015 80 0.13 X010 1 180 — 100 85 50 150±5 42 75 80 180 2.3 M6 10 7 M6 8 75

061 (7.09) (3.94) (3.35) (1.97) (5.91±0.2) (1.65) (2.95) (3.15) (7.09) (0.09) (0.39) (0.28) (17.6)
2018 90 0.12 X010 2 180 190 100 90 50 150±5 45 75 80 180 2.3 M6 10 7 M8 8 90

062 (7.09) (7.48) (3.94) (3.54) (1.97) (5.91±0.2) (1.77) (2.95) (3.15) (7.09) (0.09) (0.39) (0.28) (17.6)
2022 120 0.09 X010 2 180 190 100 95 50 150±5 45 75 80 180 2.3 M6 10 7 M8 8 90
063 (7.09) (7.48) (3.94) (3.74) (1.97) (5.91±0.2) (1.77) (2.95) (3.15) (7.09) (0.09) (0.39) (0.28) (17.6)
2030 160 0.07 X010 3 210 — 100 210 — 175±5 110 75 80 205 2.3 M6 10 7 M10 12 100
064 (8.27) (3.94) (8.27) (6.89±0.2) (4.33) (2.95) (3.15) (8.07) (0.09) (0.39) (0.28) (26.5)
2037 200 0.05 X010 3 210 — 116 230 — 175±5 130 75 95 205 2.3 M6 10 7 M10 15 110
120 (8.27) (4.57) (9.06) (6.89±0.2) (5.12) (2.95) (3.74) (8.07) (0.09) (0.39) (0.28) (0.59)
400 V Class
Dimensions in mm (inches)
Model Cur - Induc- Approx. Heat
Code Fig.
Fig
CIMR- rent tance A B1 Mass Loss
No. No. A1 B B2 C1 C2 D E F I J K L M
MR5V: A mH (Max.) (Max.) kg (lb) W
45P5 15 1.42 X002 1 130 — 98 — 49 105±5 25 50 80 130 3.2 M6 9 7 M4 4 50

501 (5.12) (3.86) (1.93) (4.13±0.2) (0.98) (1.97) (3.15) (5.12) (0.13) (0.35) (0.28) (8.8)
47P5 20 1.06 X010 1 160 — 90 50 45 130±5 25 75 70 160 2.3 M6 10 7 M4 5 50

099 (6.3) (3.54) (1.97) (1.77) (5.12±0.2) (0.98) (2.95) (2.76) (6.3) (0.09) (0.39) (0.28) (11)
4011 30 0.7 X010 1 160 — 105 95 52.5 130±5 40 75 85 160 2.3 M6 10 7 M5 6 65

100 (6.3) (4.13) (3.74) (2.07) (5.12±0.2) (1.57) (2.95) (3.35) (6.3) (0.09) (0.39) (0.28) (13.2)
4015 40 0.53 X010 1 180 — 100 85 50 150±5 40 75 80 180 2.3 M6 10 7 M6 8 90

101 (7.09) (3.94) (3.35) (1.97) (5.91±0.2) (1.57) (2.95) (3.15) (7.09) (0.09) (0.39) (0.28) (17.6)
4018 50 0.42 X010 1 180 — 100 85 50 150±5 40 75 80 180 2.3 M6 10 7 M6 8 90

102 (7.09) (3.94) (3.35) (1.97) (5.91±0.2) (1.57) (2.95) (3.15) (7.09) (0.09) (0.39) (0.28) (17.6)
4022 60 0.36 X010 1 180 — 100 85 50 150±5 40 75 80 180 2.3 M6 10 7 M6 8 90

103 (7.09) (3.94) (3.35) (1.97) (5.91±0.2) (1.57) (2.95) (3.15) (7.09) (0.09) (0.39) (0.28) (17.6)
4030 80 0.26 X010 1 210 — 100 90 50 175±5 45 75 80 205 3.2 M6 10 7 M6 12 95

104 (8.23) (3.94) (3.54) (1.97) (6.89±0.2) (1.77) (2.95) (3.15) (8.07) (0.13) (0.39) (0.28) (26.5)
4037 90 0.24 X010 1 210 — 116 110 58 175±5 48 75 95 205 3.2 M6 10 7 M8 15 110
105 (8.23) (4.57) (4.33) (2.28) (6.89±0.2) (1.89) (2.95) (3.74) (8.07) (0.13) (0.39) (0.28) (33.1)
4045 120 0.18 X010 1 240 — 126 120 63 205±5 48 150 110 240 3.2 M8 8 10 M8 23 130
106 (9.41) (4.96) (4.72) (2.48) (8.07±0.2) (1.89) (5.90) (4.33) (9.45) (0.13) (0.31) (0.39) (50.7)
14 -42
Fig. 1 6-M: Terminals
U X V Y W Z Nameplate
C2
C1
I
D H
F E
4-J:
A B
Mounting
Bolts B1 B2
L
Details of
Mounting
K
Bolts
Fig. 2
A1 6-M: Terminals 14
U X V Y W Z C2
C1 Nameplate
D H
F E
4-J:
A Mounting B
Bolts B1 B2
L
Details of
Mounting
K
Bolts

X Y Z B1
U V W
Nameplate
C2
C1
D H
F E
4-J:
A B
Mounting
Bolts
L
Details of
Mounting
K
Bolts
14 -43
Specifications
14.3.1 AC Reactor
J Without Terminal Block

Select an AC reactor from the table below according to Converter (VS-656MR5) model.
200 V Class
Cur- Induc-
Dimensions in mm (inches) Approx. Heat
Model Fig.
Fig
CIMR- rent tance Code No. A B1 Mass Loss
MR5V: No. B C D E F H J K L M
A mH (Max.) (Max.) kg (lb) W
130 88 114 105 50 65 130 22 11.5 7 3

23P7 20 0.53 X002491 (5.12) (3.46) (4.49) (4.13) (1.97) (2.56) (5.12) (0.87) M6 (0.45) (0.28) M5 (6.6) 35
130 88 119 105 50 70 130 22 9 7 3

25P5 30 0.35 X002492 (5.12) (3.46) (4.69) (4.13) (1.97) (2.76) (5.12) (0.87) M6 (0.35) (0.28) M5 (6.6) 45
130 98 139 105 50 75 130 22 11.5 7 4

27P5 40 0.265 X002493 (5.12) (3.86) (5.47) (4.13) (1.97) (2.95) (5.12) (0.87) M6 (0.35) (0.28) M6 (8.8) 50
160 105 147.5 130 75 85 160 25 10 7 6

2011 60 0.18 X002495 (6.3) (4.13) (5.81) (5.12) (2.95) (3.35) (6.3) (0.98) M6 (0.39) (0.28) M6 (13.2) 65
180 100 155 150 75 80 180 25 10 7 8

2015 80 0.13 X002497 1 (7.09) (3.94) (6.1) (5.91) (2.95) (3.15) (7.09) (0.98) M6 (0.39) (0.28) M8 (17.6) 75
180 100 150 150 75 80 180 25 10 7 8

14
2018 90 0.12 X002498 (7.09) (3.94) (5.91) (5.91) (2.95) (3.15) (7.09) (0.98) M6 (0.39) (0.28) M8 (17.6) 90
180 100 155 150 75 80 180 25 10 7 8

2022 120 0.09 X002555 (7.09) (3.94) (6.1) (5.91) (2.95) (3.15) (7.09) (0.98) M6 (0.39) (0.28) M10 (17.6) 90
210 100 170 175 75 80 205 25 10 7 12

2030 160 0.07 X002556 (8.27) (3.94) (6.69) (6.89) (2.95) (3.15) (8.07) (0.98) M6 (0.39) (0.28) M10 (26.5) 100
210 115 182.8 175 75 95 205 25 10 7 15

2037 200 0.05 X002557 (8.27) (4.53) (7.2) (6.89) (2.95) (3.74) (8.07) (0.98) M6 (0.39) (0.28) M10 (0.59) 110
400 V Class
Cur- Induc-
Dimensions in mm (inches) Approx. Heat
Model Fig.
Fig
CIMR- rent tance Code No. A Mass Loss
MR5V: No. B B1 C D E F H J K L M
A mH (Max.) kg (lb) W
130 98 130 50 75 130 22 11.5 7 4

45P5 15 1.42 X002501 2 (5.12) (3.86) — (5.12) (1.97) (2.95) (5.12) (0.87) M6 (0.45) (0.28) M4 (8.8) 50
160 90 130 75 70 160 25 10 7 5

47P5 20 1.06 X002502 (6.3) (3.54) 115 (5.12) (2.95) (2.76) (6.3) (0.98) M6 (0.39) (0.28) M5 (11) 50
160 105 130 75 85 160 25 10 7 6

4011 30 0.7 X002503 (6.3) (4.13) 132.5 (5.12) (2.95) (3.35) (6.3) (0.98) M6 (0.39) (0.28) M5 (13.2) 65
180 100 150 75 80 180 25 10 7 8

4015 40 0.53 X002504 (7.09) (3.94) 140 (5.91) (2.95) (3.15) (7.09) (0.98) M6 (0.39) (0.28) M6 (17.6) 90
180 100 150 75 80 180 25 10 7 8

4018 50 0.42 X002505 (7.09) (3.94) 145 (5.91) (2.95) (3.15) (7.09) (0.98) M6 (0.39) (0.28) M6 (17.6) 90
1
180 100 150 75 75 180 25 10 7 8
4022 60 0.36 X002506 (7.09) (3.94) 150 (5.91) (2.95) (2.95) (7.09) (0.98) M6 (0.39) (0.28) M6 (17.6) 90
210 100 175 75 80 205 25 10 7 12

4030 80 0.26 X002508 (8.23) (3.94) 150 (6.89) (2.95) (3.15) (8.07) (0.98) M6 (0.39) (0.28) M8 (26.5) 95
210 115 175 75 95 205 25 10 7 15

4037 90 0.24 X002509 (8.23) (4.53) 177.5 (6.89) (2.95) (3.74) (8.07) (0.98) M6 (0.39) (0.28) M8 (33.1) 110
240 126 205±5 150 110 240 25 8 10 23

4045 120 0.18 X002566 (9.41) (4.96) 193 (5.90) (4.33) (9.45) (0.98) M8 (0.31) (0.39) M10 (50.7) 130
(8.07±0.2)
14 -44

Nameplate
U V W
C
X Y Z
4.5
D H
F E
A B
L
B1
Details of K
Mounting 4-J:
Bolts Mounting
Bolts
14
4-J:
Fig. 2 Mounting
Bolts 6-M: Terminals
U X V Y WZ
Nameplate
C
4.5
D H
F E
A B
L
Details of 4-J:
Mounting K Mounting
Bolts Bolts
14 -45
Specifications
14.3.2 Molded Case Circuit Breaker and Magnetic Contactor
14.3.2 Molded Case Circuit Breaker and Magnetic Contactor

An example of the molded case circuit breaker and magnetic contactor wiring is shown below.
3MCCB
R1
S1 To Motor Cooling Fan
T1
VS-656MR5
1MCCB 1MC L
R R/L1
3-Phase Main Circuit Power
S S/L2 Supply Input
200 VAC*
T T/L3
14 2MCCB 2MC
Single-phase r A1/r Control Power

200 VAC Supply Input
t A2/t
*: For 400 V Class, 3-phase 400 VAC.

Select MCCB and MC from the table below according to Converter (VS-656MR5) model.
Converter MCCB Rated Current (A) MC Rated Current (A)
Voltage Power
Model
Class Capacity
CIMR-
(kVA) 1MCCB 2MCCB 3MCCB 1MC 2MC
MR5 :
23P7 7 30 3 3 20 3
25P5 9 40 3 3 30 3
27P5 12 50 3 3 40 3
2011 19 75 3 3 60 3
200 V 2015 24 100 3 3 75 3
Class
2018 30 125 3 3 100 3
2022 36 150 3 3 125 3
2030 48 175 3 3 150 3
2037 60 250 3 3 200 3
45P5 9 20 3 2 15 3
47P5 12 25 3 2 20 3
4011 19 40 3 2 30 3
4015 24 50 3 2 40 3
400 V 4018 30 60 3 2 50 3
Class
4022 36 75 3 2 60 3
4030 48 100 3 2 80 3
4037 60 125 3 2 100 3
4045 72 150 3 2 125 3

14 -46
14.3.3 Magnetic Contactor Specifications for Winding Selection

This section explains the specifications for the winding selection magnetic contactor.
J Ratings and Specifications

The standard specifications are shown in the following table.
Standard HV-75AP4 HV-150AP4 HV-200AP4
Type*1 *2
IPM Motor HV-75BP4 HV-150BP4 HV-200BP4
Contact Main contact: 3NO3NC, auxiliary contact: 1NO
Rated Insulation Voltage 600 V
Continuous 75A 150A 200A
Rated Applying Cur-
rent 30 minutes
87A 175A 226A
*3
Breaking Current Ca-

Ca 220 V 200A 400A 400A
pacity 440 V 150A 300A 300A
Open/Close Frequency
Mechanical Duration of Life
600 times/hr
5 million times
14
Control Magnetic Coil Rating 200 V 50/60 Hz, 220 V 50/60 Hz, 230 V 60 Hz
Mass lb (kg) 2.5 kg (5.51 lb) 5.0 kg (11 lb) 5.0 kg (11 lb)
Ambient Temperature −10 to 55°C (14 to 131°F)
Humidity 10 to 95% (non-condensing)
5 HP to 20 HP 25 HP to 40 HP
200 V class 50 HP (37 kW)
Applicable Inverter (3.7 kW to 15 kW) (18.5 kW to 30 kW)
Capacity 5 HP to 20 HP 25 HP to 40 HP 50 HP to 60 HP
400 V class
(3.7 kW to 15 kW) (18.5 kW to 30 kW) (37 kW to 45 kW)
* 1. Models with safety covers are as follows: HV- AP4S and HV- BP4S.
* 2. IPM motors are the standard models with the short circuit bar removed.
* 3. A dwell time of 1 hour or more is required after applying power supply for 30 minutes.
J Dimensions
The dimensions are shown below in mm (inches).
Control Circuit Terminals (M4)
4-M6
Mounting 170 (6.69)
Holes 22 (0.87) 22 (0.87) 22 (0.87)
Control Circuit
Terminals (M4)
15 16
13 14 17 18
148 (5.83)
164 (6.46)
107 (4.21)
115 (4.53)
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
4-M6
Mounting
7 8 9 10 11 12 Holes 7 8 9 10 11 12
65 (2.56)
145 (5.71) 34 (1.34) 34 (1.34) 34 (1.34)
85 (3.35)
97 (3.82) 160 (6.3) 107 (4.21) Main Circuit 64 (2.52) 64 (2.52)
Terminals (M8) 192 (7.56)
Main Circuit Terminals (M5)
(a) Model HV-75jP4 (b) Models HV-150jP4, HV-200jP4

Fig 14.16 Dimensions
14 -47
Specifications
14.3.3 Magnetic Contactor Specifications for Winding Selection
J Terminal Descriptions
Table 14.20 Terminal Name and Operation Status

Terminal Name Operation Status
+24 V (Low-speed 0 V (High-speed
13−14 Selection signal
winding) winding)
1−2
3−4 Main contact: 3NC Open Closed
5−6
7−8
9−10 Main contact: 3NO Closed Open
11−12
15−16 Auxiliary contact: 1NO Open Closed
17−18 200 V power supply − −
14
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 7 8 9 10 11 12
(a) HV− AP4 (Standard) (b) HV− BP4 (IPM Motor)

Fig 14.17 Main Circuit Contact Configuration
J Mounting Orientations
Refer to the following table for mounting orientations.
Mounting HV-75 P4 HV-150 P4 and HV-200 P4
Possible
f f
Not Possible
× ×
Terminal
Terminal cover
cover
14 -48
14.3.4 Busbar and Cable Kits for Connecting Units

Busbar and Cables are required for connections between the Converter and Inverter. Select suitable Busbar
and Cable Kit from the tables below depending on the combination of Converter and Inverter. Busbar and
Cable Kit are not supplied with the Inverter, but must be purchased separately when needed.
WARNING
D Always turn OFF the input power supply before wiring terminals.
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
CAUTION
D When mounting the Busbar, use only the screws supplied.
Otherwise, mounting may be incorrect.
J Selecting Busbar and Cable Kits

Refer to the following table when selecting Busbar and Cable Kits
Table 14.21 200 V Class 14
Unit Combination Busbar/Cable Kits Code Number
CIMR-MR5 : Converters CIMR-M5 : Inverters
23P7 72626-W100100
25P5
27P5
23P7 2011 72626-W100150

25P5 2015
27P5 2018
2022
2030 72626-W100200
2037 72626-W100300
23P7 72626-W150100
25P5
27P5
2011
2015 2011 72626-W150150
2018 2015
2022 2018
2030
2022
2030 72626-W150200
2037 72626-W150300
23P7 72626-W300100
25P5
27P5
2011 72626-W300150
2307 2015
2018
2022
2030 72626-W300200
2037 72626-W300300
14 -49
Specifications
Table 14.22 400 V Class

Unit Combination Busbar/Cable Kits Code Number
CIMR-MR5 : Converters CIMR-M5 : Inverters
45P5 72626-W100100
47P5
4011 72626-W100150
4015
45P5
4018
47P5
4022
4030 72626-W100250
4037
4045
45P5 72626-W150100
47P5
14 4011
4011
4015
72626-W150150
4015
4018
4018
4022 4022
4030 72626-W250250
4037
4045
45P5 72626-W250100
47P5
4011 72626-W250150
4030 4015
4037 4018
4045 4022
4030 72626-W250250
4037
4045
14 -50
J Dimensions
The Busbar and Cable dimensions are given in the following table.
Table 14.23 Busbar and Cable Dimensions
Code Special Busbar Flat Cable P1N1 Power Supply
Number Cable
Cutaway Dimensions (mm (inches)) No. Dimen- No. Dimen- No.
Diagram sions L in sions L in
L L1 L2 mm (in- mm (in-
ches) ches)
72626-W100100 1 120 (4.72) 100 (3.94) --- 2 100 (3.94) 1 150 (5.91) 1
72626-W100150 2 167.5 (6.59) 122.5 (4.82) --- 2 180 (7.09) 1 150 (5.91) 1
72626-W100200 2 217.5 (8.56) 172.5 (6.79) --- 2 230 (9.06) 1 150 (5.91) 1
72626-W100250 2 267.5 (10.5) 222.5 (8.76) --- 2 280 (11) 1 150 (5.91) 1
72626-W100300 4 317.5 (12.5) 122.5 (4.82) 98.5 (3.88) 2 330 (13) 1 150 (5.91) 1
72626-W150100 2 147.5 (5.81) 102.5 (4.04) --- 2 100 (3.94) 1 250 (9.84) 1
72626-W150150 3 195 (7.68) 125 (4.92) --- 2 180 (7.09) 1 250 (9.84) 1
72626-W150200 3 245 (9.65) 175 (6.89) --- 2 230 (9.06) 1 300 (11.8) 1 14
72626-W150300 5 345 (13.6) 125 (4.92) 101 (3.98) 2 330 (13) 1 350 (13.8) 1
72626-W250100 2 147.5 (5.81) 102.5 (4.04) --- 2 100 (3.94) 1 300 (11.8) 1
72626-W250150 3 195 (7.68) 125 (4.92) --- 2 180 (7.09) 1 300 (11.8) 1
72626-W250250 3 295 (11.6) 225 (8.86) --- 2 280 (11) 1 300 (11.8) 1
72626-W300100 4 297.5 (11.7) 102.5 (4.04) 78.5 (3.09) 2 100 (3.94) 1 350 (13.8) 1
72626-W300150 5 345 (13.6) 125 (4.92) 101 (3.98) 2 180 (7.09) 1 350 (13.8) 1
72626-W300200 5 395 (15.6) 175 (6.89) 151 (5.94) 2 230 (9.06) 1 350 (13.8) 1
72626-W300300 6 495 (19.5) --- --- 2 330 (13) 1 350 (13.8) 1
14 -51
Specifications
J Cutaway Diagrams
The Busbar and cable cutaway diagrams are shown below.
Busbar: Cutaway Diagram 1
L Width 3 mm
Two 7x12
Oblong holes 10 L1 10
15
22 22
Insulation tube

Width 3 mm
Two 7x12 L
Oblong holes 10 25 L1 10
15
47 22
Insulation tube

L Width 3 mm
14 Two 7x12
Oblong holes 10 25 L1 25 10
15
47 47
Insulation tube

Two 7x12
Oblong holes Width 3 mm
L
10 25 125 25 L1 10
15
47 101 49 L2 22 Insulation tube

Two 7x12
L
10 25 125 25 L1 25 10
15
47 101 49 L2 47
Insulation tube

Two 7x12
L
10 25 125 25 125 25 125 25 10
15
47 101 49 101 49 101 47

Insulation tube
Flat Cable
L
P1N1 Power Supply Cable
14 -52
J Unit Installation
An example combination of a 200-V, 22-kW Converter and a 200-V, 22-kW Inverter is shown in the fol-
lowing diagram. Always install the Converter on the left when viewed from the front.
Converter Inverter
YASKAWA YASKAWA
Inverter
Converter
VS−626M5
VS−656MR5
Upper
covers CHARGE
CHARGE
CHARGE SERVOPACK
indicators
14
Fig 14.18 Unit Mounting
J Busbar Mounting
Use the following procedure to mount the Busbar.
1. Turn OFF the power supply to the Converter, and wait at least 5 minutes (until the CHARGE indicator
is no longer lit) before opening the upper cover.
2. Remove the Converter and Inverter power supply terminal screws, and connect the Busbar.
INFO Be sure to use all of the power supply terminal screws supplied to mount the Busbar, and tighten the screws firmly to a torque
of 4 to 5 NSm.
J Flat Cable Mounting

Use the following procedure to mount the flat cable.
1. Connect the cable with the red line facing down.
2. Connect the Inverter using the left connector of the two connectors.
INFO When inserting the connectors, check that the clasp locks with a snap.
14 -53
Specifications
14.3.5 Digital Operator and Connector Cables
J PIN1 Power Supply Cable Mounting

Connect the P1N1 Power Supply Cable according to the following steps.
1. Turn the cable connector so that the two grooves on the tip are facing left, and then connect the cable.
2. Connect the Inverter using the left connector of the two connectors.
INFO When inserting the connectors, check that the clasp locks with a snap.
Busbars (x2)
Power supply
terminal screws Power supply
Converter Inverter terminal screws
Flat cable
Make sure the
2 connector
grooves are
facing left. Red line
14
P1N1 power supply Cable Insert into leftmost connector.
Fig 14.19 Busbar and Cable Mounting (With Upper Cover Open)

Operations, such as displaying the status of control signals, displaying and setting control constants, and
displaying protection function operations can be performed by mounting an optional JVOP-132 Digital
Operator to the Inverter.
J Digital Operator and Extension Cables

A Digital Operator Extension Cable (72616-W5301 or 72616-W5303, sold separately) is required to con-
nect a JVOP-132 Digital Operator to the Inverter. Digital Operators and Cables are not supplied with the
Inverter, but must be purchased as needed. Refer to 2.4 Mounting and Dismounting the Digital Operator
and to Chapter 5 Operating the Digital Operator for mounting and operating procedures.
Product Model Details
Digital Operator JVOP-132 Use the Digital Operator in combination with an Extension Cable to
set and reference Inverter constants.
Extension Cable 72616-W5301 Use an Extension Cable to connect the Inverter and the Digital
(1 m (3.28 ft)) Operator. The following are supplied with the Extension Cable:
Cable (1 m or 3 m) (3.28
(3 28 ft to 9.84
9 84 ft) x 1
Extension Cable 72616-W5303 Cable clamp x1
(3 m (9.84 ft)) 2 types of tapping screws 3 x 10 x2
14 -54
J Digital Operator Appearance

The appearance of the Digital Operator is shown in the following diagram.
DRIVE FWD REV

REMOTE
SEQ
SEQ REF
REF Mode indicators
Display panel
JVOP-132 DIGITAL OPERATOR

JVOP-132
LOCAL DRIVE
DSPL
REMOTE PRGM
DATA
14
JOG
ENTER
Keypad (display
FWD selection keys, etc.)
REV RESET
JOGRUN STOP
Fig 14.20 Digital Operator Display Panel and Operation Keys
J Mounting the Digital Operator to the Panel

The following three methods can be used to mount the Digital Operator to a control panel. Mount the Digi-
tal Operator in accordance with the application.
Table 14.24 Mounting Method Features
Item Method 1 Method 2 *1 Method 3 *1 Remarks
Ease of mounting Excellent Good Some difficulty ---
(Extent of panel
manipulation) 3 screw holes 3 screw holes 5 screw holes
Ease of removal Some difficulty Some difficulty Excellent Method 3 enables
(Removal from the the Digital Operator
panel) Fixed permanently Fixed permanently Can be mounted and to be mounted and
removed freely removed freely.
Applicable loca- Some difficulty Good Some difficulty ---
tion
(Dusty locations, --- *2 ---
etc.)
Additional parts --- DACT32183-AD DACT32183-BD ---
code number
* 1. Mounting methods 2 and 3 require additional parts such as metal plates or resin.
* 2. If mounting the Digital Operator in a dusty location or similar, mount packaging or another
buffer between the panel and the Digital Operator.
14 -55
Specifications
J Mounting Method 1
As shown in the following diagram, the Digital Operator can be fixed easily just by drilling holes in the
panel on the side to be mounted, and fixing the Digital Operator using screws from the back of the panel.
(Screws must be supplied by the customer. If the panel thickness is 1.6 mm, use Sems screws M3 x 8.)
Panel cutout
(Viewed from the front of the panel.) Mounted on the panel
4 (0.16) Panel
Panel cutout
Cable clamp (Mount the Digital
(for cable)
DRIVE FWD REV
SEQ
REMOTE
REF
Operator to the panel before
mounting the cable.)
(1.54)
39
140 (5.51)
140 (5.51)
DIGITAL OPERATOR
JVOP-132
125 (4.92)
(0.63)
16
Panel front
LOCAL DRIVE
DSPL
8 6 Panel back
REMOTE PRGM
DATA
JOG
ENTER (0.31) (0.24)
FWD
REV RESET 2-φ4 hole
14 RUN STOP
70(2.76)
4 27 18.8
(0.16) (1.06) (0.74) 30 min.
70(2.76)
Fig 14.21 Mounting the Digital Operator to a Panel, Method 1 (Unit: mm)
J Mounting Method 2
Use this method to mount the Digital Operator from the back of the panel using a metal plate.
As shown in the following diagram, this method supports the Digital Operator using a metal plate from
the back of the panel by drilling screw holes making a cutout in the panel.
The code number for the metal plate is DACT32183-AD.
Panel cutout Mounted on the panel
(Viewed from the front of the panel.)
Metal plate
Panel surface
Cable clamp
Panel
130 (5.12)
170 (6.69)
cutout
Panel front
Panel back
2-φ4.8 hole 50 min.

60
(2.36)
Fig 14.22 Mounting the Digital Operator to the Panel, Method 2 (Unit: mm)
14 -56
J Mounting Method 3
Use this method to mount the Digital Operator from the front of the panel using resin parts.
The Digital Operator can be mounted and removed from the panel easily. (To fix the Digital Operator per-
manently, use Sems screws M3 x 8 from the back of the Operator bracket.)
As shown in the following diagram, this method mounts the Digital Operator from the front of the panel
using a resin part on the back of the panel, and by drilling mounting holes and making a cutout in the panel.
When attaching the cable to the resin part, open the cable connector cover fully, and insert the connector
until the cable audibly snaps into place. (If the cable is not securely mounted, the connection with the Digi-
tal Operator will be poor.)
The code number for the metal plate is DACT32183-BD.
Panel cutout Mounted on the panel
(Viewed from the front of the panel.)
(0.61)
15.5
Resin part
Panel surface
Mount the
cable firmly
14
Panel
cutout 125 (4.92)
156 (6.14)
Panel back
Panel front
2-φ4.8 hole
(0.61)
50 min.
15.5
4.5 (0.18) 101 (3.98) 4.5 (0.18)
110 (4.33)
Fig 14.23 Mounting the Digital Operator to the Panel Method 3 (Unit: mm)
14 -57
Specifications
14.3.6 Connector Kits

The required connectors differ depending on the type of Inverter and Option Cards used. Connector Kits
include one set of connectors (for the cable) required for each product combination.
The Connector Kits are not provided with the Inverter and must be purchased separately as required.
Table 14.25 Connector Kits

Code Relevant Connector Relevant Manufacturer
Number Inverter* Connector
Name No. of Plug Case Number Number
Pins
72626-CA01 CIMR- MDR 36 10136-3000VE 10336-52A0-008 1 1CN Sumitomo 3M
M5A LTD
LTD.
M5A Standard 20 10120-3000VE 10320-52A0-008 1 2CN
50 10150-3000VE 10350-52A0-008 1 6CN
72626-CA02 CIMR- MDR 36 10136-3000VE 10336-52A0-008 1 1CN
M5A
M5A Encoder 20 10120-3000VE 10320-52A0-008 2 2CN or 8CN
Orientation 50 10150-3000VE 10350-52A0-008 1 6CN
Card
14 72626-CA03 CIMR- MDR
14
36
10114-3000VE 10314-52A0-008
10136-3000VE 10336-52A0-008
1
1
9CN
1CN
M5A
Magnet-
M5A Magnet 20 10120-3000VE 10320-52A0-008 1 2CN
ic Sensor Ori- 50 10150-3000VE 10350-52A0-008 1 6CN
entation Card
14 10114-3000VE 10314-52A0-008 1 10CN
72626-CN01 CIMR- MDR 36 10136-3000VE 10336-52A0-008 1 1CN
M5N
M5N Standard 20 10120-3000VE 10320-52A0-008 1 2CN
MR 8 MR-8LFG 1 4CN HONDA
TSUSHIN
KOGYO CO.,
LTD.
72626-CN02 CIMR- MDR 36 10136-3000VE 10336-52A0-008 1 1CN Sumitomo 3M
M5N LTD
M5N Encoder 20 10120-3000VE 10320-52A0-008 2 2CN or 8CN
Orientation 14 10114-3000VE 10314-52A0-008 1 9CN
Card
TSUSHIN
KOGYO CO.,
LTD.
72626-CN03 CIMR- MDR 36 10136-3000VE 10336-52A0-008 1 1CN Sumitomo 3M
M5N LTD
LTD.
Magnet-
M5N Magnet 20 10120-3000VE 10320-52A0-008 1 2CN
ic Sensor Ori- 14 10114-3000VE 10314-52A0-008 1 10CN
entation Card
TSUSHIN
KOGYO CO.,
LTD.
* M5A: For stand-alone drive system M5N: for NC system
14 -58
J Connector Attachment Positions

Use the connector code to determine the connector position for mounting to the Inverter.
Example: 22 kW Inverter
72626-CA01 72626-CN01
YASKAWA
VS−626M5 Control
connector 1CN 6CN 1CN 4CN
MDR (36P) MDR (50P) MDR (36P) MR (8P)
2CN 2CN
MDR (20P) MDR (20P)
72626-CA02 72626-CN02
1CN
MDR (36P)
6CN 1CN
MDR (50P) MDR (36P)
4CN
MR (8P) 14
8CN 8CN
MDR (20P) MDR (20P)
2CN 9CN 2CN 9CN
MDR (20P) MDR (14P) MDR (20P) MDR (14P)
72626-CA03 72626-CN03
1CN 6CN 1CN 4CN

MDR (36P) MDR (50P) MDR (36P) MR (8P)
10CN 2CN 10CN

2CN MDR (14P) MDR (20P)
MDR (20P) MDR (14P)
Fig 14.24 Control Connector Attachment Positions
14 -59
Specifications
J MDR Connector Shapes

Plugs (Soldered)
2.54 (0.1) With 20 and 36 poles With 14 and 50 poles
2.3 (0.091)
2.3 (0.091)
1.27 (0.05)
5.1 (0.2)
5.1 (0.2)
6.6 (0.26)
19.3 (0.76)
2.9 (0.11)
12.7 (0.05)
14
Pin 1
9.1 (0.36)
7.5 (0.3)
15°
1.27 (0.05)
Pin (No. of poles/2+1)
Unit: mm (inches)
No. of Poles Product Code A B C Relevant Connector Manufacturer

Number
14 10114-3000VE 7.62 (0.3) 13.8 (0.54) 18.2 (0.72) 9CN or 10CN Sumitomo 3M LTD.
20 10120-3000VE 11.43 (0.45) 17.6 (0.69) 22.0 (0.87) 2CN or 8CN
36 10136-3000VE 21.59 (0.85) 27.8 (1.09) 32.2 (1.27) 1CN
50 10150-3000VE 30.48 (1.2) 36.7 (1.44) 41.1 (1.62) 6CN
Fig 14.25 MDR Connectors (Plugs)
14 -60
Case (Unshielded)
8.5 (0.33)
Jack screw M2.6 with 14 poles
7.0 (0.28)
Logo or other display
39.0 (1.54)
5.2 (0.2) 23.8 (0.94)
12.7 (0.5)
Jack screw M2.6 with 20 poles

14
12.0 (0.47)
10.0 (0.39)
14.0 (0.55)

39.0 (1.54)
5.2 (0.2) 23.8 (0.94)
12.7 (0.5)
Jack screw M2.6 with 36 or 50 poles 17.0 (0.67)

14.0 (0.55)
8.0 (0.31)
39.0 (1.54)
5.2 (0.2) 23.8 (0.94)
12.7 (0.5) Unit: mm (inches)
No. of Poles Product Code A B C Relevant Connector Manufacturer

Number
14 10314-j2j0-008 18.2 (0.72) 29.5 (1.16) 23.6 (0.93) 9CN or 10CN Sumitomo 3M LTD.
20 10320-j2j0-008 22.0 (0.87) 33.3 (1.31) 27.4 (1.08) 2CN or 8CN
36 10336-j2j0-008 32.2 (1.27) 43.5 (1.71) 37.6 (1.48) 1CN
50 10350-j2j0-008 41.1 (1.62) 52.4 (2.06) 46.5 (1.83) 6CN
Fig 14.26 MDR Connectors (Case)
14 -61
Specifications
14.3.7 Noise Filters (Input)
J MR Connector Shapes
The MR connector shapes and specifications are shown in the following diagram.
A
D
6.1 (0.24) 5.2 (0.2)
E B 2.6 (0.1)
3 (0.12) 3 (0.12)
HONDA
1 2 3
4 5 8 (0.31)
C
6 7 8
MR-jL
HONDA 2.6 (0.1)
Unit: mm (inches)
No. of Product Name A B C φD E Relevant Connec- Manufacturer

Cores tor Number
8 MR-8LFG 31.0 (1.22) 19 (0.75) 39.8 (1.57) 11 (0.43) 36.6 (1.44) 4CN HONDA TSUSHIN
KOGYO CO., LTD.
14 Fig 14.27 MR Connectors

Reduce radio noise by using a filter that suppresses transmission of high-frequency noise generated by the
Inverter to the power supply. If used in a location where magnetic field strength is weak, installing an input
noise filter is effective for suppressing electrical interference of televisions and radios.
Select an appropriate input noise filter from the tables 13.28 to 13.31 depending on the Converter model
(VS-656MR5).
Connection Example
Input
MCCB Magnetic noise
contactor filter AC Reactor
IN U X
R 1 4 R/L1
V Y
S 2 5 S/L2 Converter
W Z VS-656MR5
T 3 6 T/L3
Note: Do not connect the input noise filter to the Inverter outputs (U, V. and W).
14 -62
J Specifications
The (input) noise filter specifications are shown in the following table. There are two types: Standard spec-
ifications and Counter−EMC models. There are also a simplified models.
200 V Series
Standard Specifications and EMC Conformance Models (manufactured by Schaffner Elec-

tronik AG)
Table14.26 200-V Noise Filter Specifications

Converter Standard Specifications EMC Conformance Models
Model
CIMR- Model Code Number No. Current (A) Model No. Current (A)
MR5j*
23P7 FN258L-30-07 FIL001064 1 30 FN258-30/07 1 30
25P5 FN258L-42-07 FIL001065 1 42 FN258-42/07 1 42
27P5 FN258L-55-07 FIL001066 1 55 FN258-55/07 1 55
2011
2015
FN258L-75-34
FN258L-100-35
FIL001067
FIL001068
1
1
75
100
FN258-75/34
FN258-100/35
1
1
75
100
14
2018 FN258L-100-35 FIL001068 1 100 FN258-100/35 1 100
2022 FN258L-130-35 FIL001069 1 130 FN258-130/35 1 130
2030 FN258L-180-07 FIL001070 1 180 FN258-180/07 1 180
2037 FN359P-250-99 FIL001071 1 250 --- --- ---
Simplified Models
Table14.27 200-V Simplified Noise Filter Specifications

Converter Model Code Number No. Current (A)
Model
CIMR-
MR5j*
23P7 LNFD-2303HY 72600-D2303HY 1 30
25P5 LNFD-2203HY 72600-D2203HY 2 40
27P5 LNFD-2303HY 72600-D2303HY 2 60
2011 LNFD-2303HY 72600-D2303HY 3 90
2015 LNFD-2303HY 72600-D2303HY 3 90
2018 LNFD-2303HY 72600-D2303HY 4 120
2022 LNFD-2303HY 72600-D2303HY 4 120
2030 --- --- --- ---
2037 --- --- --- ---
Note: Connect two or more noise filters in parallel.

14 -63
Specifications
400 V Series
Standard Specifications and EMC Conformance Models (manufactured by Schaffner Elec-

tronik AG)
Table14.28 400-V Noise Filter Specifications

Converter Standard Specifications EMC Conformance Models
Model
CIMR- Model Code Number No. Current (A) Model No. Current (A)
MR5j*
45P5 FN258L-30-07 FIL001064 1 30 FN258-30/07 1 30
47P5 FN258L-30-07 FIL001064 1 30 FN258-30/07 1 30
4011 FN258L-42-07 FIL001065 1 42 FN258-42/07 1 42
4015 FN258L-55-07 FIL001066 1 55 FN258-55/07 1 55
4018 FN258L-55-07 FIL001066 1 55 FN258-55/07 1 55
4022 FN258L-75-34 FIL001067 1 75 FN258-75/34 1 75
4030 FN258L-100-35 FIL001068 1 100 FN258-100/35 1 100
14 4037 FN258L-130-35 FIL001069 1 130 FN258-130/35 1 130
4045 FN258L-130-35 FIL001069 1 130 FN258-130/35 1 130
Simplified Models
Table14.29 400-V Simplified Noise Filter Specifications

Converter Model Code Number No. Current (A)
Model
CIMR-
MR5j*
45P5 LNFD-4203HY 72600-D4203HY 1 20
47P5 LNFD-4303HY 72600-D4303HY 1 30
4011 LNFD-4203HY 72600-D4203HY 1 40
4015 LNFD-4303HY 72600-D4303HY 1 60
4018 LNFD-4303HY 72600-D4303HY 1 60
4022 LNFD-4303HY 72600-D4303HY 1 90
4030 LNFD-4303HY 72600-D4303HY 1 90
4037 LNFD-4303HY 72600-D4303HY 1 120
4045 LNFD-4303HY 72600-D4303HY 1 120
Note: Connect two or more noise filters in parallel.

14 -64
J Dimensions
The noise filter dimensions are shown in mm (inches) in the following table.
Table14.30 Standard Specifications and EMC Conformance Models (manufactured by

Schaffner Electronik AG)
mm (inch)
Specifica- External Mass
Model Diagram A B C D E F G H J L O P
tions kg (lb)
No.
FN258L- 1 335 (13.2) 150±1 60 (2.36) 305 (12) 320 35 6.5 400 1±0.1 9 M5 AWG10 1.8
30-07 (5.91 (12.6) (1.38) (0.26) (15.7) (0.039± (0.35) (3.97)
±0.039) 0.0039)
FN258L- 1 329 (13) 185±1 70 (2.76) 300 (11.8) 314 45 6.5 500 1.5 12 M6 AWG8 2.8
42-07 (7.28± (12.4) (1.77) (0.26) (19.7) (0.059) (0.47) (6.17)
0.039)
FN258L- 1 329 (13) 185±1 80 (3.15) 300 (11.8) 314 55 6.5 500 1.5 12 M6 AWG6 3.1
55-07 (7.28± (12.4) (2.17) (0.26) (19.7) (0.059) (0.47) (6.83)
0.039)
FN258L- 2 329 (13) 220 (8.66) 80 (3.15) 300 (11.8) 314 55 6.5 --- 1.5 --- M6 --- 4.0
Standard
75-34 (12.4) (2.17) (0.26) (0.059) (8.82)
Specifica-
14
tions FN258L- 2 379±1.5 220 (8.66) 90±0.8 350±1.2 364 65 6.5 --- 1.5 --- M10 --- 5.5
(FN258L) 100-35 (14.9± (3.54± (13.8± (14.3) (2.56) (0.26) (0.059) (12.13)
0.059) 0.031) 0.047)
FN258L- 2 439±1.5 240 (9.45) 110±0.8 400±1.2 414 80 6.5 --- 3 --- M10 --- 7.5
130-35 (17.3± (4.33± (15.7± (16.3) (3.15) (0.26) (0.12) (16.53)
0.059) 0.031) 0.047)
FN258L- 3 438±1.5 240 (9.45) 110±0.8 400±1.2 413 80 6.5 500 4 15 M10 50 mm2 11
180-07 (17.2± (4.33± (15.7± (16.3) (3.15) (0.26) (19.7) (0.16) (0.59) (0.077 in- (24.25)
0.059) 0.031) 0.047) ches2)
FN359P- 4 See diagram for specifications. 16
250-99 (35.27)
FN258- 1 335 (13.2) 150±1 60 (2.36) 305 (12) 320 35 6.5 400 1±0.1 9 M5 AWG10 1.8
30/07 (5.91 (12.6) (1.38) (0.26) (15.7) (0.039± (0.35) (3.97)
±0.039) 0.0039)
FN258- 1 329 (13) 185±1 70 (2.76) 300 (11.8) 314 45 6.5 500 1.5 12 M6 AWG8 2.8
42/07 (7.28± (12.4) (1.77) (0.26) (19.7) (0.059) (0.47) (6.17)
0.039)
FN258- 1 329 (13) 185±1 80 (3.15) 300 (11.8) 314 55 6.5 500 1.5 12 M6 AWG6 3.1
55/07 (7.28± (12.4) (2.17) (0.26) (19.7) (0.059) (0.47) (6.83)
0.039)
EMC Con-
Con
formance FN258- 2 329 (13) 220 (8.66) 80 (3.15) 300 (11.8) 314 55 6.5 --- 1.5 --- M6 --- 4.0
Models 75/34 (12.4) (2.17) (0.26) (0.059) (8.82)
(FN258)
FN258- 2 379±1.5 220 (8.66) 90±0.8 350±1.2 364 65 6.5 --- 1.5 --- M10 --- 5.5
100/35 (14.9± (3.54± (13.8± (14.3) (2.56) (0.26) (0.059) (12.13)
0.059) 0.031) 0.047)
FN258- 2 439±1.5 240 (9.45) 110±0.8 400±1.2 414 80 6.5 --- 3 --- M10 --- 7.5
130/35 (17.3± (4.33± (15.7± (16.3) (3.15) (0.26) (0.12) (16.53)
0.059) 0.031) 0.047)
FN258- 3 439±1.5 240 (9.45) 110±0.8 400±1.2 413 80 6.5 500 4 15 M10 50 11
180/07 (17.3± (4.33± (15.7± (16.3) (3.15) (0.26) (19.7) (0.16) (0.59) mm2(0.07 (24.25)
0.059) 0.031) 0.047) 7 inches2)
14 -65
Specifications
External Diagrams
External diagrams of the noise filters are shown below in mm (inches).
Standard Specifications and EMC Conformance Models
(manufactured by Schaffner EMC (KK))
P
F
F
G
E
G
E
A
A
D C
D H C
L
B
B
O
J O
Diagram 2
Diagram 1
160±1 (6.3±0.039)
P
45°±5
F
14 516±1.5 (20.3±0.059)
)
64± 2
0.079
E
G
(1.06±0.079) (3.94±0.02)
±
27 100
60 0.5 (2.52
A 564±1.5 (22.2±0.059) ±0.2 ±0.5
(2.36± 0.02)
D H C M5×8
(11.8± 0.039)
220 0.5
300 ± 1
275 ± 0.5
(10.8± 0.02 )
(8.66± 0.02)
250 1
(9.84± 0.039)
(2.36± 0.02 )
60± 0.5
±
±
B
φ9±0.2
O
J
0.012)
40±0.3
M12
210±0.5 210±0.5 3±0.2
±
(0.12±0.0079)
(1.57
(8.27±0.02) (8.27±0.02)
Diagram 3 64±1 (2.52±0.039)
Diagram 4
14 -66
Simplified Models
Model Code No. Noise Filter mm (inch) Terminal Block Weight

(kg
W D H A B C X Y (lb))
LNFD-2203HY 72600-D2203HY 240 125 100 210 95 33 9 11 1.5
(9.45) (4.92) (3.94) (8.27) (3.74) (1.3) (0.35) (0.43) (3.31)
LNFD-2203HY 72600-D2203HY 240 125 100 210 95 33 10 13 1.6
(9.45) (4.92) (3.94) (8.27) (3.74) (1.3) (0.39) (0.51) (3.53)
LNFD-4203HY 72600-D4203HY 270 155 125 240 125 43 9 11 2.2
(10.6) (6.1) (4.92) (9.45) (4.92) (1.69) (0.35) (0.43) (4.85)
LNFD-4303HY 72600-D4303HY 270 155 125 240 125 43 10 13 2.2
(10.6) (6.1) (4.92) (9.45) (4.92) (1.69) (0.39) (0.51) (4.85)
External Diagrams
W
A
See note
14
R (L1) (T1) U
S (L2) (T2) V
D
B
T (L3) (T3) W φ30

(G) E
φ5
C
Hn(Max.)
Note: The diagram shows a

3-phase model.
C
Details of
5 (0.2)
X M4×8 mounting hole
Details of
(0.59)
15
terminal
φ12
block
Y 10 15
(0.39) (0.59)
Mounting screws: 4-M4 x 10
14 -67
Specifications
14.3.8 Surge Absorbers
14.3.8 Surge Absorbers

Always use a surge absorber (recommneded manufacturer: Marcon Electronics) with inductive loads,
such as magnetic contactors, magnetic relays, magnetic valves, solenoids, and magnetic brakes, that are
connected near the Inverter.
The surge absorber absorbs energy accumulated in the coils of the magnetic contactor, and so requires a
capacity equal to that of the coils. Never connect the surge absorber to the Inverter output terminals (U,
V, and W).
IMPORTANT Failure to connect a surge absorber means that there is a risk of signal failure because the surge voltage gener-
ated by the coils when the magnetic contactor is turned ON and OFF can affect the Inverter control signal
wires.
J Specifications and Model Numbers

The surge absorber specifications and model numbers are shown in the following table.
Device Surge Absorbers
14 Model Specifications Code Number

200 to 230 V Large-capacity coil other than a DCR2-50A22E 220 VAC C002417
relay 0.5 µF + 200 Ω
Control relay LY-2, LY-3, DCR2-10A25C 250 VAC C002482
HH-22, HH-23, 0.1 µF + 100 Ω
MM2, MM4
380 to 460 V device DCR2-50D100B 1000 VDC C002630
0.5 µF + 220 Ω
J Dimensions
The surge absorber dimensions are shown in the following diagram.
Unit: mm (inches)
68 (2.68)
Details of
mounting holes
2-3 tap
(1.02)
26
Two 4-dia Lead 910

Lead 250 mounting holes
9 (0.35)
φ0.8
33 (1.3)
φ4.8 30 16
(1.18) (0.63)
7 (0.28)
24
(0.94)
76 (2.99) 692−241
φ18
30 36 22.5 16 34
(1.18) (1.42) (0.89)(0.63) (1.34)
Weight: 22 g Weight: 5 g Weight: 150 g
DCR2-50A22E DCR2-10A25C DCR2-50D100B
14 -68
15
Appendix
This appendix explains the Inverter drive basics, how to select the drive ca-
pacity, designing an interface and cooling configuration, wiring, and the
VS-626M5 drive specifications.
15.1 Inverter Drive Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -2

15.1.1 Principle of an Inverter Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -2 15
15.1.2 Inverter and Converter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . 15 -3
15.1.3 Squirrel Cage Induction Motor Characteristics . . . 15 -3
15.1.4 Controlling an Induction Motor Using Vector
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -5
15.2 Basic Inverter Drive mechanics . . . . . . . . . 15 -6
15.2.1 Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -6
15.2.2 Rotator and Linear Operator Outputs . . . . . . . . . . 15 -6
15.2.3 Inertial Moment and GD2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -7
15.2.4 Converting Metric Units and SI Units . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -10
15.3 Determining Drive Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -11
15.3.1 Load Drive Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -11
15.3.2 Acceleration/deceleration Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -15
15.3.3 Calculating Start and Stop Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -17
15.3.4 Intermittent Load Operating Capacity . . . . . . . . . . 15 -18
15.4 Interface Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -19
15.4.1 Sequence Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -19
15.4.2 Speed Reference Signals
(M5A Stand-alone Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -21
15.4.3 Sequence Output Signals
(M5A Stand-alone Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -21
15.4.4 Analog Monitor Signals (M5A Stand-alone Drive) 15 -22
15.4.5 YENET1200 Signals (M5N NC Drive) . . . . . . . . . . 15 -22
15.5 Inverter/Converter Cooling Design . . . . . . . 15 -23
15.5.1 Temperature Rise within the Control Panel . . . . . 15 -23
15.5.2 Heat Exchanger Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -24
15.6 Wiring Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -25
15.6.1 Independent Operation for Speed Control Using a
Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -25
15.6.2 Speed Control Operation Combined with NC . . . . 15 -27
15.6.3 Multi-step Speed Operation Combined with PLC 15 -28
15.7 Internal Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 -29
15.8 VS-626M5 Specifications Entry Tables . . . 15 -30
15 -1
Appendix
15.1.1 Principle of an Inverter Drive
15.1 Inverter Drive Basics

This section explains the basics of an inverter drive.
15.1.1 Principle of an Inverter Drive

An inverter is a frequency conversion device that converts a commercial frequency power supply to a vari-
able frequency power supply. Fig. 15.1 show an operation diagram for a 3-phase voltage Inverter consist-
ing of switches, such as relay contacts. S1 and S4, S3 and S6, and S5 and S2 work as pairs to repeatedly turn
ON and OFF each half-cycle. Their ON/OFF timing is staggered by one-third of a cycle, so a square wave
AC voltage can be obtained as the output, as shown in Fig. 15.2. The frequency of the AC output voltage
is proportional to the speed at which the switches are turned ON and OFF; in other words, inversely propor-
tional to the cycle. This is the basic operating principle of an inverter.
S1 S3 S5
U
Ed V
W
S4 S6 S2
15 Fig 15.1 Inverter Operating Principle
Switches
S1, S4 S1 ON S4 ON S1 ON
Output
voltage Ed
Vu-v0
Vv-w0
Vw−u0
0 60° 120°180° 360°

Fig 15.2 Switch Operation and Output Voltage
In reality, a motor drive inverter requires a variable voltage and variable frequency (VVVF), so sine wave
pulse width modulation (PWM) control is used, as shown in Fig. 15.3. When the carrier frequency is in-
creased, sine wave current flows through the motor.
15 -2
1 cycle 1 cycle
Switches
(See Fig.15.2)
Phase−U
voltage signal PWM carrier signal Phase−U voltage signal
S1, S4
ON
S2, S3
ON
Average output voltage
(a) Output frequenncy: High (b) Output frequenncy: Low

Output voltage: High Output voltage: Low
Fig 15.3 Sine Wave PWM Control
15.1.2 Inverter and Converter Configuration

As shown in Fig. 15.4, the configuration consists of a VS-656MR5 Converter, which rectifies a commer-
15
cial power supply and converts it to direct current, a main circuit capacitor, which smooths the rectified
voltage, and a VS-626M5 Inverter, which converts the direct current to the required AC frequency. The
converter switching element uses IGBT as used by the Inverter.
VS-656MR5 Converter VS-626M5 Inverter

P
Induction
ACL motor
3-phase
AC power
supply
N
Main circuit Main circuit
capacitor capacitor
Fig 15.4 Inverter and Converter Configuration
15.1.3 Squirrel Cage Induction Motor Characteristics

The squirrel cage induction motor characteristics are contrasted with the DC motor and the principle of
torque generation is explained below. Fig. 15.5 shows the model diagrams for each from the direction of
the axis.
Torque occurs in the DC motor using electromagnetic force proportional to the accumulated current that
flows in the armature winding, and the magnetic flux created by the magnetic field current. The torque
generated in this way is easy to control because the magnetic field windings from which the magnetic cur-
rent flows and the armature windings are independent.
On the other hand, the squirrel cage induction motor consists of a rotator with a so-called “squirrel-cage”
construction, and a stator with stator windings. When 3-phase alternating current flows through the stator
windings, a magnetic field of magnetic flux φm is generated. This is equivalent to the magnetic flux gener-
ated by the DC motor magnetic field current.
Magnetic flux φm can be expressed using the following formula. This current is called magnetized current
Im , and is almost equivalent to the unladen current of the squirrel-cage induction motor.
Formula: φm = MIm
15 -3
Appendix
15.1.3 Squirrel Cage Induction Motor Characteristics
Magnetic field +
winding Stator Flange
+ Commutator
Torque
Magnetic Magnetic flux φ m

field
−
−
Stator winding
(a) DC Motor
Stator winding
Short-circuit ring Stator Rotator conductor
Rotator
Terminal U I2 Terminal V
15 Magnetic
flux φm Torque
ωr
ω1
Terminal W
(b) Squirrel Cage Induction Motor
Fig 15.5 Motor Model Diagrams
As shown in Fig. 15.5, the rotator is positioned inside the stator; i.e., within the rotation magnetic field.
When there is a difference between the angular velocity ωr of the rotator and the angular velocity ω1 of
the rotation magnetic field, the rotator conductor cuts the alternating magnetic field of the differential an-
gular velocity. Consequently, secondary induction electromotive force E2 is generated in the rotator con-
ductor due to the effect of magnetic field induction. Also, counterelectromotive force E1 is generated in
the stator due to the effects of electromagnetic induction, and interlinkage between the magnetic flux of
the rotation magnetic field and the stator winding.
E1 = kω1 φm = 2πkf1 φm
Both tips of the rotator conductor are connected to the short-circuit ring, hence the name “squirrel cage.”
The secondary current I2 thus flows due to the secondary induction electromotive force E2. This is equiva-
lent to the armature current of the DC motor.
Torque is generated using electromagnetic force proportional to the accumulation of secondary current I2
and magnetic flux φm in the same way as the DC motor, causing the rotator to rotate. The ratio of the rotator
to the speed differential of the rotator magnetic field is called the induction motor “slip.” If the rotator is
rotating at the same speed as the rotation magnetic field, the relative position of both will not change, so
the electromagnetic induction effect does not occur, and torque will not be generated. This is called syn-
chronous speed. Synchronous speed and slip are expressed using the following formulas.
120f
Synchronous speed N = (min−1)
P
N − Nr
Slip S =
N
15 -4
Nr: Rotator speed (min−1), f: Power supply frequency (Hz), P: No. of motor poles
Also, switching to 3-phase alternating current will reverse the order of the phases, causing the rotation
magnetic field to rotate in reverse, so the motor will rotate in reverse.
In this way, the squirrel cage induction motor changes slip to meet the required torque, generates the re-
quired primary current, and functions as an energy converter that converts electric power (electrical ener-
gy) to to torque and speed (mechanical energy). Differing from the DC motor, however, there is the prob-
lem that the magnetic flux of the rotation magnetic field and the secondary current cannot be controlled
directly, so careful planning for the control is required.
15.1.4 Controlling an Induction Motor Using Vector Control

Vector control permits controls equivalent to the DC motor in a squirrel cage induction motor. This control
method is called slip frequency control, it requires a speed detector, and it performs control taking the de-
tected speed as a standard. Nearly all vector control inverters in use employ this method.
Vector control uses applies the torque generation principle of the squirrel cage induction motor to inverter
control. Primary current I1, which is supplied to the induction motor in line with the torque references, is
distributed to secondary current I2 and magnetized current Im as per the set value inside the motor, and
performs control so that the required torque is generated.
The VS-626M5 control block is shown in Fig. 15.6.
The speed controller performs control so that there is no difference in speed reference value ωr* and speed
detection value ωr according to the speed detector signal, and outputs secondary current reference value
I2* using a secondary current reference limiter. Rated speed settings and speed adjustment parameters are
used to standardize the signals. The speed controller gain and integral time can be selected to suit the con-
trol mode. 15
The magnetic flux reference part inputs the speed detection value ωr and outputs the magnetic flux refer-
ence value φ* to control fixed outputs.
The vector controller develops the torque generation principle. Primary current reference value I1*, and
its frequency and phases, are generated from secondary current reference value I2*, magnetic flux refer-
ence value φ*, and speed detection value ωr. Use the motor codes to select the parameters depending upon
the motor model.
S*
Current flows through the current controller according to primary current reference vector I1 , and per-
forms control to generate the required torque.
Speed control Vector control Current control

Torque limiter Current controller
Speed controller * S*+ S
V 1* VS-656MR5
Speed *+ I 2* I1 I1
refer- ωr I1
* −
Converter
ence −
= I*22 + I*m2 θ1
Current
* reference PWM VS-626M5
φ* 1 Im θ + control Inverter
M θ= I *2
+
tan−1 I m
2
Magnetic flux
reference R2
S
ωr I1
CT
sdt
ωs +
+ ωr
M Induction motor
E Encoder
Fig 15.6 VS-626M5 Control Block
15 -5
Appendix
15.2.1 Torque
15.2 Basic Inverter Drive mechanics

This section explains the torque, motive power, and inertial moment that are the basis of selecting motor and
inverter capacities.
15.2.1 Torque
Torque is a moment of force that causes the rotation axis on the rotator to rotate about a center. As shown
in Fig. 15.7, when external force f (N) is used in a tangential direction at point P, which is separated by
the distance r (m) only from the center of rotation O, the torque T can be expressed using the following
formula.
T = f ⋅ r (N ⋅m)
P
r
O f0
f
Fig 15.7 Torque Definition
Also, as shown in Fig. 15.8, if a gearbox is used, the torque increases and decreases proportional to the
shifting gears, so taking motor axis speed NM (min−1) and load axis speed NL (min−1), the motor axis calcu-
lated torque TM (NSm) can be expressed using the following formula.
N LT L T
15 TM =
NM
= aL (N ⋅m)
TM
Motor axis
Motor
NM (min−1)
Inertial moment
TL JL (kg⋅m2)
Load axis NM
Load machinery (Gear ratio a = )
NL (min−1) NL
Fig 15.8 Torque when a Gearbox Is Used
15.2.2 Rotator and Linear Operator Outputs

Using torque T (NSm) on the rotator, the output PR during rotation at speed N (min−1) can be expressed
using the following formula.
P R = 2πNT = 0.1048NT (W)

60
As shown in Fig. 15.9, taking the force F (N), which is used on the speed V (m/min.) and the load, the output
PL when performing linear operations can be expressed using the following formula.
P L = FV = 0.0167FV (W)
60
V (m/min)
N (min −1)
Ball screw
W (kg)
Bed
Fig 15.9 Linear Operation Output
15 -6
15.2.3 Inertial Moment and GD2

Inertial moment is a measure of the ease of the rotation operation of the rotator. Taking the total mass m
(kg) of the rotator, and the rotation radius r (m), the inertial moment J can be expressed using the following
formula.
J = mr 2 (kg ⋅m2)
The relationship to the flywheel effect GD2 that has been used until now can be expressed using the follow-
ing formula.
J = GD (kg ⋅m2)
2
4
The various inertial moment shapes are summarized below. Friction and other losses, however, have not
been considered, and the efficiency is taken to be 1.
J Cylindrical Inertial Moment

Inertial moment J1 during rotation along an axis centered on the mass m1 (kg) and radius r1 (m) of a cylinder
can be expressed using the following formula.
m 1r 1 2
J1 = (kg ⋅m2)
2
L (m)
r1
(m)
Mass m1 (kg) 15
Fig 15.10 Cylindrical Inertial Moment
J Tubular Inertial Moment

Inertial moment J2 during rotation along an axis centered on the mass m2 (kg), outer radius r1 (m), and inner
radius r2 (m) of a cylinder can be expressed using the following formula.
2
m (r + r 2 2)
J2 = 2 1 (kg ⋅m2)
2
L (m)
r1 (m)
r2 (m)
Mass m2 (kg)
Fig 15.11 Tubular Inertial Moment
J Load Reel Inertial Moment

Inertial moment J3 of a load reel, as shown in Fig. 15.12, concentrates the entire load on the contact point
between a rope and pulley, and can be expressed using the following formula.
J 3 = m 3 r 1 2 (kg ⋅m2)
r1 (m)
Rope
Pulley
m3 (kg)
Fig 15.12 Load Reel Inertial Moment
15 -7
Appendix
15.2.3 Inertial Moment and GD2
J Linear Operator Inertial Moment

Fig. 15.3 shows linear operation such as a motor turning a ball screw to drive a table. Example (a) shows
horizontal operation, and example (b) shows vertical operation. Both horizontal and vertical inertial mo-
ments JH and JV take the full load mass mL (kg), counterweight mass mC (kg), and ball screw reed PB, and
can be expressed using the following formula.
2
m LP B
JH = (kg ⋅m2)
4π 2
(m L + m C) P B 2
JV = (kg ⋅m2)
4π 2
mL Motor
µ
Motor mC
Counter-
PB weight
mL
PB
(a) Horizontal Operation (b) Vertical Operation

15 Fig 15.13 Linear Operator Inertial Moment
15 -8
J Inertial Moment Converted on a Motor Axis with a Gearbox

To obtain the required mechanical speed, a pulley and gears that can accelerate and decelerate are some-
times used. In Fig. 15.8, the load inertial moment converted to the motor axis as gear ratio a can be ex-
pressed using the following formula.
NM 2 JL J
JM = = L2 (kg ⋅m2)
NL 2 a
A simplified diagram of the rotation circumference is shown in Table 15.1.
Table 15.1 Simplified Diagram of the Rotation Circumference
Rotation axis is D0
the same as the Hollow cylinder
cylinder center- Solid cylinder D1
D0
(D 2 = D 0 2∕2) D 2 = (D 0 2 + D 1 2)∕2
line
Rotation axis Right-angle

c D0
passes through box
the center of Cylinder
gravity D 2 = (b 2 + c 2)∕3 D 2 = L 2∕3 + D 0 2∕4
b
L
D0
Sphere
D2 = 2 D0 2 15
D0
5 Hollow sphere
D 5 − D1 5
D2 = 2 · 0 3
5 D0 − D1 3
D1
Cone
D2 = 3 D0 2
D0
10 Circle
D2 = D0 2 + 3 D1 2
D0
4
D1
Rotation axis is c D0
Right-angle
at one tip box Cylinder
D 2
2 D2 = 4 L2 + 0
D = (4b 2 + c 2)∕3 3 4
L
b
Rotation axis is c D0
outside rotator Right-angled
box Cylinder
2 2
D 2 = 4b + c D 2
D2 = 4 L2 + 0
b
3
L
3 4
+ 4 (bd + d 2 )
+ 4 (dL + d 2 )
d
General equation The general equation for the rotation circumference when the rotation axis
Center of
when rotation gravity
is outside the rotator is shown below.
axis is outside ro-
tator D22 = D12 + 4d2
D1: Rotation circumference when the axis parallel to the rotation
d
axis and whose center of gravity passes through the rotation axis is Rotation
axis
hypothetically the rotation axis.
15 -9
Appendix
15.2.4 Converting Metric Units and SI Units
15.2.4 Converting Metric Units and SI Units

This manual uses SI units. SI units differ from the metric units for gravity used to date, so conversion is
necessary. Table 15.2 shows how to convert the main units of gravity and force to SI units.
Table 15.2 Metric Units and SI Units Conversion Table

Quantity Metric Unit SI Unit Conversion
Force and Load kgf N 1 kgf = 9.80665 N
Weight kgf --- The metric unit for weight and the SI unit
for mass are the same. (Mass expressed us-
ingg SI units for bodies in the metric mea-
surementt ffor weight
i ht Wk
Wkgff are expressedd as
Mass kgf S s2/m kg Wkg.
Torque kgf S m NSm 1 kgf S m = 9.80665 N S m

Inertial Moment gf S cm S s2 kg S m2 1 gf S cm S s2 = 9.80665 x 10−5 kg S m2
Speed (Revolu- rpm min−1 1 rpm = 1 min−1
tions)
Vibration G m/s2 1 G = 9.80665 m/s2
Note: The relationship between the metric GD2 and the SI unit for inertial moment is as follows:
GD2 = 4J.
15
15 -10
15.3 Determining Drive Capacity

When controlling machine speed, an inverter drive must supply torque to accelerate and decelerate the drive
system (couplings, machine, and motor), as well as torque to match the characteristics of the machine that
makes up the motor load. Consider the following points when determining drive capacity.
D Make clear the ratings to be used (continuous rating, short-time rating, and repetitive rating) to suit
the load characteristics.
D Consider the efficiency of the motive force transmission mechanism and the load dispersion, and select
a drive capacity greater than the motive force required by the load.
D Select a capacity that can sufficiently provide the startup torque and maximum torque required by the
load. Use the following equation to select the drive capacity.
Drive load ≧ Motive force to drive the load mechanism + Motive force to accelerate and decel-
erate the load mechanism to the required speed
The above equation shows the method for calculating load drive force and acceleration/deceleration motive
force.
15.3.1 Load Drive Capacity
The torque-speed characteristics of the load mechanism that uses the VS-626M5 are classified as listed
in Table 15.3. The methods of calculating load drive capacity that are described are typical examples.
Table 15.3 Typical Load Torque-Speed Characteristics

15
Load Characteristics Load Examples Speed-Torque Characteristics Motor Capacity
Fixed Torque Load Load torque over Conveyers Load torque is fixed regardless of speed. Motor capacity is the
speed is a fixed Cranes Output is proportional to speed. same as the maximum
load. speed load capacity.
Winches 1.0
Usually a friction
Torque and output
load. Other friction loads

Load torque
and gravity loads
Load output
0 Speed 1.0
Fixed Output Load Required output Within fixed torque range: Required rated output
over speed is a Load torque is fixed regardless of speed. when using a drive
fixed load. with fixed torque
Output is proportional to speed. characteristics is as
Within fixed output range: follows:
Output required by load is fixed. Required output =
Load output x Fixed
Load torque is inversely proportional to speed. output control ratio1/2
1.0
Center drive low ten- 0.5

Load torque
sion winders
Main axis of ma- Load output
chine-tool 0 1.0 2.0
V
Veneer rotor
t relays
l
Reduced Output Load torque over- Intermediate speed-torque and output charac- Motor capacity is the
Load speed is a variable teristics of fixed torque load and fixed output same as the maximum
load. load speed load capacity.
Load has the inter-
1.0
mediate characteris-
tics of fixed output
load and fixed
torque load.
Load torque
Load output
0 1.0
15 -11
Appendix
J Machine-tool Main Axis Drive

The motive force required for the main axis drive, such as a lathe or machining center, is determined using
the cutting motive force. The cutting process requires fixed output characteristics, and the fixed output
control range requires a ratio of 1: 10 to 30. The methods of calculating the required motive force shown
are examples of lathe cutting processing, machining center milling processing, and drill processing. (To
accurately calculate the required force, the condition of the cutting oil, the material of the cutting tools,
the shape, and the hardness of the material being cut all affect the cutting resistance, so these must also
be considered.)
As shown in Fig. 15.14, when using a lathe cutting processing, the object to be cut is rotated, and the blade
is pressed against it to perform the cutting operation, so the motive force PLC required to cut can be ex-
pressed using the following equation.
K S dLV
PC = = dLV (kW)
60 × 1000 × η C SC ⋅ ηC
V= πDNs (m/min)
1000
KS: Cutting resistance (N/mm2)
d: Cutting depth (mm)
L: Length of blade actually performing cutting (i.e., amount of feed per rotation) (mm)
D: Diameter of object being processed (mm)
NS: Main axis speed (min−1)
ηC: Machine efficiency 0.7 to 0.85
SC: Cutting efficiency (i.e., cutting amount per 1 kW per minute) (CC/kW/min.)
15
D
d
L
Fig 15.14 Example of Lathe Cutting Process
As shown in Fig. 15.15, if using milling processing, the blade is mounted to the main axis and rotated to
cut the object being processed, so the motive force PF required can be expressed using the following for-
mula.
K S δWf δWf
PF = = (kW)
60 × 1000 × η F
2
1000 2 S F η F
KS: Cutting resistance (N/mm2)
δ: Cutting depth (mm)
W: Cutting width (mm)
f: Feed speed (mm/min.)
SF: Cutting efficiency (i.e., cutting amount per 1 kW per minute) (CC/kW/min.)
ηF: Machine efficiency 0.7 to 0.85
f
(a) Side Milling (b) Front Milling

Fig 15.15 Example of Milling Processing
15 -12
As shown in Fig. 15.16, when performing drill processing, the blade is mounted to the main axis and ro-
tated, opening a hole in the material being processed, so the motive force PD required can be expressed
using the following formula. The load torque M differs depending on the material, and the ratio of the drill
radius D: Feed speed f, so care must be applied.
2
M ⋅ 2πn πD f
PD = = (kW)
60 × 100 × 1000 × η D 4 × 1000 × S D η D
M: Drill load torque (N ⋅cm)
n: Main axis speed (min−1)
ηD: Machine efficiency 0.7 to 0.85
D: Drill radius (mm)
f: Feed speed (mm/min.)
SD : Cutting efficiency (i.e., cutting amount per 1 kW per minute) (CC/kW/min.)
15
Fig 15.16 Example of Drill Processing
J Gravity Load Drive

The motive force required to move a load such as a crane or loader vertically differs greatly depending on
whether or not a counterweight is used. The motive force in each case can be expressed using the following
formulas.
mL V
Without counterweight P GL = (kW)
6120η
(m L − m C)V
With counterweight P GLC = (kW)
6120η
V: Vertical travel speed (m/min.)
η: Machine efficiency
mL: Load mass (kg)
mC: Counterweight mass (kg)
Drum
Motor Motor
Speed
Speed
mC
V (m/min) V (m/min)
mL
Load
(kg)
mL
(kg)
(a) Without Counterweight (b) With Counterweight

Fig 15.17 Gravity Loads
15 -13
Appendix
J Friction Load Drive

The horizontal movements of conveyers such as crane movement and table drives are friction loads. The
motive force PF required taking the friction coefficient to be µ can be expressed using the following formu-
la.
um L V
PF = (kW)
6120η
Friction coefficient
Speed µ
V (m/min)
Motor
mL (kg)
Fig 15.18 Friction Loads
15
15 -14
15.3.2 Acceleration/deceleration Capacity

When stopping machinery operation, the acceleration method can be selected from rapid acceleration/de-
celeration to smooth acceleration/deceleration, depending on the application. A comparison of these ac-
celeration methods is shown in Table 15.4. Calculate the acceleration/deceleration capacity using the se-
verest current-limiting acceleration according to capacity. The formula for calculating the drive capacity
required from the acceleration time t (s) is shown below.
D Required drive capacity of the fixed torque characteristics range (0 ≦NM ≦ NB)
2
JM NM 2
PM = 2 π
60
  1000 t
(kW)
D Required drive capacity of the fixed torque characteristics + the fixed output characteristics range
(0 ≦NM ≦ NMAX)
2
J M (N M 2 + N B 2)
PM = 2 π
60
  2000 t
(kW)
JM: Motor axis conversion inertial moment (kg ⋅m2)

PM: Basic low-speed motor output (kW)
NM: Operation speed (min−1)
NB: Basic low speed (min−1)
NMAX: Maximum speed (min−1)
Table 15.4 Acceleration Formulas
Acceleration Method Control Method Explanatory Diagram Remarks
Current-limited Accel- This method suppresses Current limit Fixes the torque gener- 15
eration the current during accel- Current Adjustable range ated by the motor during
eration to a fixed value and speed
acceleration.
to protect the drive unit
and machinery.
Speed
ta
Time
0
Time-limited Accelera- This method suppresses Fixes the acceleration

tion the acceleration rate so Speed
torque.
that there is linear accel- Adjustable
eration change over range
time, against rapid
speed reference
ta
changes.
Time
0
S-curve Acceleration This method further Suppresses the rate of

suppresses torque over variation in the torque at
the above method, to Speed Adjustable
Speed the start and end points
perform smooth accel- range during acceleration.
eration.
ta
Time
0
An example of calculations based on standard drive and machinery specifications is shown below. With
actual machinery, the calculated values may vary slightly due to mechanical loss, fluctuations in the power
supply voltage, and machine noise and motor magnetic field noise countermeasures.
15 -15
Appendix
15.3.2 Acceleration/deceleration Capacity
J Calculation Conditions
Table 15.5 Calculation Conditions
Item Value
Acceleration Time 2.5 s (0 to 6,000 min−1)
0.5 s (0 to 1,500 min−1)
Inertial Moment JM 0.13 kg S m2
Load: 0.10 kg S m2
Motor: 0.03 kg S m2 (assuming load to be x 0.3)
Output Characteristics (30 min. Rating) Basic low speed NB: 1,500 min−1
(kW)
Max. output (120%)
Output 30 min. rating
0 (min−1)
0 1500 6000
Maximum Output During Acceleration/de- 120% of 30 min. rated output

celeration
J Calculations
15 In the example shown in Table 15.5, as a result of performing the calculations, the motive force required
from the acceleration/deceleration time is as follows: Upper formula: 30 min. rated 7.5 kW (47.7 NSm);
Lower formula: 15 kW (95.0 N ⋅m).
D At 0 to 1,500 min−1
2
60
 
P M = 2 π 0.13 × 1500 = 6.41 (kW)
1000 × 0.5
2
D At 0 to 6,000 min−1
2
0.13 × (6000 2+1500 2)
PM = 2 π
60
  2000 × 2.5
= 10.89 (kW)
15 -16
15.3.3 Calculating Start and Stop Times

After selecting the machine characteristics and Inverter capacity, the start and stop times can be calculated
using Table 15.6. For the motor characteristics, refer to 14.1 Drives.
Table 15.6 Formulas for Calculating Start and Stop Times

Item Calculating from Torque Calculating from Output
Motor Characteristics Torque (NSm) Output (kW)
TM PM
Motor Motor
speed speed
0 NB NMAX 0 NB NMAX
(min−1) Fixed Fixed (min−1)
Fixed Fixed
torque output torque output
Fixed Torque Characteristics t = 2 π ⋅ JM ⋅ NM ⋅ 1

2 JM
(0 ≦ NM ≦ NB) 60 TM t= 2π
60
  ⋅
1000 P M
⋅ NB ⋅ NM
0 ↔ NM Acceleration/deceleration Time
Fixed Output Characteristics N M 2–N 2B 2 JM N 2–N B 2
(NB ≦ NM ≦ NMAX) t = 2 π ⋅ JM ⋅ 1 ⋅
60 T 2N B
t= 2π
60
  ⋅
1000 P M
⋅ M
2
M
NB ↔ NM Acceleration/deceleration Time
Fixed Torque + Fixed Output Characteris-
tics t = 2 π ⋅ JM ⋅ 1 ⋅
60 TM
N M 2 + N 2B
2N B
t= 2π
60
 
2
⋅
JM
1000 P M
N 2 + NB2
⋅ M
2
15
(NB ≦ NM ≦ NMAX)
0 ↔ NM Acceleration/deceleration Time
NM: Operation speed (min−1)
NB: Basic low speed (min−1)
MMAX: Maximum speed (min−1)
JM: Motor axis conversion inertial moment (kg ⋅m2) (= Motor inertial moment + motor axis conversion load inertial moment)
TM: Motor maximum torque at basic low speed (N ⋅m) (For a standard motor, max. torque = 30 min. rated torque x 1.2)
PM: Motor maximum output at basic low speed (kW) (For a standard motor, max. output = 30 min. rated output x 1.2)
Note: The values obtained from actual units may differe from calculated values due to mechanical losses, fluctuation in supply volt-
ages, mechanical noise, and measures taken for motor’s magnetic noise.
15 -17
Appendix
15.3.4 Intermittent Load Operating Capacity
15.3.4 Intermittent Load Operating Capacity

If operations, such as tapping a machine-tool or driving a conveyer table, are frequently reversed, care must
be taken in selecting the capacity. When using an operation cycle that includes acceleration/deceleration
operations such as those shown in Fig. 15.19, make a selection so that the motor equivalence efficiency
torque TR is less than the inverter continuous rated torque. (The maximum value of TP will be 120% of
the Inverter 30 min. rating.)
TP2 (tr + tf) + TL2 ts

TR = (N•m)
tC
TL TP
Motor torque Time
tr ts t f
−TP
tc
NM
Motor speed Time
Fig 15.19 Motor Torque and Speed Timechart
The motor reverse rating is the rating over the load where the motor load changes cyclically. When the
15 reverse rated output is taken to be t1, and with no load is taken to be t2, a as expressed in the following
formula is called %ED (Einschalt Dauer). t1 + t2 is regulated to 10 minutes.
t1
α= × 100 (%)
t1 + t2
15 -18
15.4 Interface Design

This section explains the interface design for the signals.
15.4.1 Sequence Input Signals

Among the input signals, 12-bit digital references (1CN) and sequence input signals (6CN), which control
the operation status of forward rotations, reverse rotations, and torque limits, etc., can be used in common
with the relay contacts and transistor switches, as shown in Fig. 15.20. Also, the signal circuit common
can be selected from the 0 V common, which uses the Inverter power supply, the 24-V common, or the
external common, which uses a separate 24-V power supply (20 to 26 V). The wiring differs depending
on the input method, so refer to Fig. 15.21 to perform the wiring correctly. Also, the 1CN common and
6CN common are isolated, so each common can be selected independently. For signal details, refer to 4.1.4
Details on Sequence Input Signals.
PLC Inverter PLC Inverter
Relay Output Transistor Output
Module Module
Forward Forward
rotation rotation
Reverse Reverse
rotation rotation
0V 0V
SS SS
Voltage resistance 35 VDC min.
Relay contact capacity
Rated current 100 mA min.
15
35 VDC min.
Rated current 100 mA min.
(a) Relay Contact (b) Transistor (Open Collector)

Fig 15.20 Operation Signals Connection Examples
15 -19
Appendix
15.4.1 Sequence Input Signals
EXTCOM
24VCOM
0VCOM
3.3 kΩ
390 Ω
(a) 0 V Common
EXTCOM
24VCOM
0VCOM
3.3 kΩ
390 Ω
(b) 24 V Common
15 +24 V (or 0 V)
EXTCOM
24VCOM
0VCOM
3.3 kΩ
390 Ω
0 V (or +24 V)
(c) External Common

Signal Name Pin Number
1CN 6CN
EXTCOM 31 19, 20, 21
24VCOM 32 22, 23
0VCOM 33 24, 25
Fig 15.21 Input Method Selection
15 -20
15.4.2 Speed Reference Signals (M5A Stand-alone Drive)

As shown in Fig. 15.22 and Fig. 15.23, the speed reference signals can be used as either analog or digital
signals. Analog signals have a rated speed reference of ±10 V. Voltage drop due to wiring impedance and
drift due to temperature variations and wear and tear can be adjusted using the control parameters in the
Inverter, and the control parameters and adjustment resistors at PLC and NC.
The digital speed references (1CN) uses both BCD and binary signals. In this case, reference errors due
to temperature drift and voltage drop do not occur, unlike with analog signals. Also, if speed variation is
not continuous, the speed setting parameters within the Inverter are switched externally so that multi-step
speed operations can also be used. The digital speed reference (1CN) input circuit is the same as the se-
quence input signal (6CN). The signal circuit common can be selected independently of the sequence input
signals (refer to Fig. 15.21).
For the signal details, refer to 4.2 Analog Speed References (Stand-alone Drive), and 4.3 Using a 12-bit
Digital Speed Reference.
PC, NC Inverter
±10 V
D/A
Fig 15.22 Example of Analog Speed Reference Signals

15
PC, NC Inverter
Level
conver-
sion
Fig 15.23 Example of Digital Speed Reference Signals
15.4.3 Sequence Output Signals (M5A Stand-alone Drive)

Sequence signals such as zero speed and malfunction signals, which notify externally the Inverter opera-
tion status, use the relay contacts and transistor switches. The transistor switch output circuit is bi-direc-
tional, as shown in Fig. 15.24, so both the 0-V common and +24-V common can be used, in the same way
as for the relay outputs.
Fig 15.24 Output Interface Circuit
15 -21
Appendix
15.4.4 Analog Monitor Signals (M5A Stand-alone Drive)
15.4.4 Analog Monitor Signals (M5A Stand-alone Drive)

The monitor signals output from the Inverter are speedometer signals and load rate meter signals. Use a
10 V full-scale voltmeter or a PLC Analog Input Module. Use the monitor signal wires at 20 m max. If
the length of the wires exceeds 20 m, or noise is superimposed on the signal wires, install an isolation am-
plifier midway along the line to good effect.
For signal details, refer to 4.5 Analog Monitor Signals (for Stand-alone Drives).
15.4.5 YENET1200 Signals (M5N NC Drive)

The YENET1200 communications system for Yaskawa NC Units sends and receives data such as speed
references, sequence I/O signals, motor speed, and failure information using serial communications. These
serial communications signals are connected to 4CN on the YENET1200 Card. If an Inverter is installed
at the terminal, connections must be made to 4CN and 1CN for terminal processing.
For details of YENET1200 communications, refer to the Yaskawa NC Unit operation manuals.
Inverter
4CN−2 S
4CN−6 *S
4CN−4 R
4CN−3 SH
15
1CN−7 ALM−
1CN−8 ALMC
Fig 15.25 Connection when the Inverter is the Terminal Unit
Inverter
NC Unit
4CN−1 *S
P
4CN−2 S
4CN−3 SH
4CN−8 SH
4CN−5 FG
1CN−1 +24 VIN

1CN−4 ESP0
1CN−6 ALM+
1CN−8 ALMC
Fig 15.26 Connection between NC Unit and Inverter
15 -22
15.5 Inverter/Converter Cooling Design
15.5 Inverter/Converter Cooling Design

If the Inverter/Converter is built into the panel, be sure to mount it vertically for effective cooling, and make
sure there is sufficient space to both the sides, and top and bottom, in consideration of maintenance and ventila-
tion, as shown in Fig. 2.9 and Fig. 2.10. (Refer to 2.3 CLEARANCES for details.) There are two Inverter/Con-
verter models: External heatsink cooling models for the fully-enclosed control board mounting, and models
mounted inside the panel, which house the whole unit in the control panel. The external heatsink cooling model
cools the majority of generated loss from the unit using external air directly, so the generated loss in the control
panel is reduced.
The maximum operating temperature of the Inverter/Converter is 55_C. Design the cooling system so that the
average temperature rise within the control panel is 10 K (10°C (50°F)) max., taking the maximum control pan-
el ambient temperature to be 40°C (103°F). Consequently, heat caused by the generated loss of the Inverter must
be discharged using forced air currents and a heat exchanger. For the calorific value and cooling air speed of
each Inverter/converter by capacity, refer to 14.1.5 Calorific Value and Cooling Air Speed.
15.5.1 Temperature Rise within the Control Panel

Taking the calorific value within the panel P (W), rate of heat conduction of the metal plate k (W/m2 ⋅°C),
and control panel surface area in contact directly with the external air A (m2), temperature rise within the
control panel ∆T (K) can be expressed using the following formula.
∆T =
P (K)
k×A
The value of k changes according to the conditions as shown below.
D With no internal circulation fan: 4 (W/m2 ⋅°C) 15
D With internal circulation fan: 6 (W/m2 ⋅°C)
D Cooling air duct with forced air current (with internal circulation fan): 9 (W/m2 ⋅°C)
The internal temperature rise ∆T (K) when using a heat exchanger can be expressed using the following
formula.
∆T =
P
k × (A − B) + qh
qh: Heat exchanger cooling ability (W/°C)
B: Heat exchanger surface area (m2)
Air duct
AIR
Fig 15.27 Configuration of Control Panel with Air Duct
15 -23
Appendix
15.5.2 Heat Exchanger Specifications
15.5.2 Heat Exchanger Specifications

To improve the cooling abilities of the control panel, install one of the Heat Exchangers (manufactured
by Yaskawa) shown in Table 15.8.
Table 15.7 Heat Exchanger Specifications

Heat Exchanger Cooling Ability Dimensions Mounting Surface
(mm (inches)) (m2)
REX1550 110 W/10°C (50°F) 295 x 890 x 50 (11.6 x 35 x 1.97) 0.31
(W x H x D)
HEATEX02 250 W/10°C (50°F) 440 x 924 x 50 (17.3 x 36.4 x 1.97) 0.45
(W x H x D)
The calorific content of the Cooling Ability column is the calorific tolerance when the internal air tempera-
ture rise within the unit is suppressed to 10 K (10 °C (50°F)) max.
Mount the heat exchanger internally as shown in Fig. 15.28 so that the internal air is drawn in from the
top and expelled through the bottom, and so that the external air is drawn in from the bottom and expelled
from the top.
Top
15
Internal air Case
flow
External air
flow
Bottom
Heat exchanger
Fig 15.28 Example of Heat Exchanger Mounting
15 -24
15.6 Wiring Examples

Several examples of wiring diagrams are given below.
15.6.1 Independent Operation for Speed Control Using a Digital Operator

The following example shows independent operation using a Digital Operator. Fixed-position stop control
using RUN, stop, and a motor encoder is possible, so this operation is useful for test operations. As shown
in Fig. 15.29, operation is possible by wiring the motor encoder and connecting the main circuit only. For
Digital Operator operations, refer to Chapter 5 Operating the Digital Operator.
15
15 -25
Appendix
15.6.1 Independent Operation for Speed Control Using a Digital Operator
3MCCB
Special busbar
Motor
P/ N/ P1N1 power P/ N/ Cooling fan
1MCCB 1MC L 3-phase Z1
VS−656MR5 supply cable 200 VAC*1 Z2
P1 P1
R R/L1 Z3
N1 N1 VS−626M5
3-phase S S/L2
200 VAC*1 5CN 51CN U
T/L3 IM
T U/T1 V
V/T2
W/T3 W
2MCCB 2MC
1-phase r A1/r
200 VAC t A2/t
Flat cable
52CN
(Grounded to
100 Ω or less.) 1CN Not used (Grounded to
100 Ω or less.)
2CN
Not used +5V 4,5,6 1
0V 1,2,3 2
3CN
PA 16 3
:PA 17 P 4
PB 18 5
:PB 19 P 6
PLC 14 PG
MCCB: Molded Case Circuit Breaker 7
15 MC:
L:
Magnetic Contactor
AC reactor
6CN
:PLC 15 P 8
9
Digital Operator
19,20,21 EXTCOM0 THSA 8 11 TS
22,23 24VCOM THSB 9 P 12
SEQ REF 24,25 0VCOM SS 7 10
6 RDY
7 EMG 1CN
8 FWD PAO 13
9 REV :PAO 14
10 TLH PBO 15
DIGITAL OPERATOR 11 TLL(INC) :PBO 16
JVOP−132 PLCO 11
12 SSC(SV)
13 RST :PLCO 12
14 CHW SS 17
5 DAS
LOCAL DRIVE
15 PPI
DSPL
REMOTE PRGM 16 ORT
17 LGR EXTCOM 31
DATA
JOG
ENTER 18 MGR 24VCOM 32
0VCOM 33
LOCAL
REMOTE RESET 3 SCOM D1 19
4 0V D2 20
RUN STOP 2 SS D3 21
D4 22
33 ZSPD D5 23
34 AGR D6 24
35 SDET D7 25
36 TDET D8 26
37 TLE D9 27
38 ORG D10 28
39 ORE D11 29
40 CHWE D12 30
42 COM1
6CN
43
44 FLT SM 47
45
0V 48
26 FC0
27 FC1 LM 50
28 FC2
29 FC3 0V 49
*: 400-V class: 3-phase 400 VAC 41 FLTL
46 TALM
P Indicated shielded twisted-pair cable
30 COM2
I/O Card
Fig 15.29 Stand-alone Operation Using Digital Operator
15 -26
15.6.2 Speed Control Operation Combined with NC

This is the most popular operation using a main axis drive for a machine-tool. Sequence input signals such
as forward rotation and reverse rotation, and output signals such as zero speed and speed matching, are
connected to the I/O Module in the sequencer, and the speed references are connected to the axis control
module in the CPU. A basic connection example is shown in Fig. 15.30.
3MCCB
Special busbar
Motor
3-phase Cooling fan

Z1
P/ N/ P/ N/ 200 VAC*1 Z2
1MCCB 1MC L P1N1 power Z3
VS−656MR5
3-phase R R/L1 supply cable P1
P1
200 VAC*1 N1 VS−626M5 U IM
S S/L2 N1
U/T1 V
T T/L3 5CN 51CN V/T2
W/T3 W
2MCCB 2MC
1-phase r A1/r
200 VAC t A2/t
Flat cable
52CN
(Ground to 100 Ω (Ground to 100 Ω
1CN Not used or less.)
or less.) 2CN
Not used +5V 4,5,6 1
0V 1,2,3 2
Digital Opera-
3CN
PA 16
:PA 17 P
3
4 15
tor (optional) PB 18 5
:PB 19 P 6
PLC 14 PG
MCCB: Molded Case Circuit Breaker 7
MC: Magnetic Contactor NC PLC 15 P 8
L: AC reactor 9
Output Module 6CN
*3 19,20,21 EXTCOM0*2 THSA 8 11 TS
22,23 24VCOM THSB 9 P 12
External 24 V
24,25 0VCOM SS 7 10
power supply
6 RDY
7 EMG
8 FWD
NC
9 REV
1CN Control Axis
10 TLH
PAO 13 Module
11 TLL(INC) :PAO 14 P
12 SSC(SV) PBO 15
13 RST P
:PBO 16
14 CHW PLCO 11
5 DAS :PLCO 12 P
15 PPI SS 17
16 ORT
17 LGR
18 MGR
6CN
SCOM 3
Input Module 0V 4
33 ZSPD SS 2
34 AGR
35 SDET
36 TDET
37 TLE
38 ORG
39 ORE
40 CHWE
42 COM1
43
44 FLT 6CN
45 SM 47
*1 400-V class: 3-phase 400 VAC
SM Speedometer
*2 EXTCOM0 on 6CN and EXTCOM 26 FC0 0V 48
on 1CN are isolated internally. 27 FC1
*3 Connection when sequence input 28 FC2 LM 50
common is an external common. 29 FC3
LM Load meter
41 FLTL 0V 49
46 TALM
P indicates shielded twisted- 30 COM2
pair cable. I/O Card
Fig 15.30 Operation Combined with NC
15 -27
Appendix
15.6.3 Multi-step Speed Operation Combined with PLC
15.6.3 Multi-step Speed Operation Combined with PLC

As shown in Fig. 15.31, this is a multi-step speed operation to a maximum of eight speeds using internal
speed settings by changing the digital speed reference settings. This method is effective when performing
operations by repeating speed patterns that have been set beforehand, such as transfer machines and other
special hole-boring equipment. The speed references are set internally, so there is no effect from speed
reference offset and noise. For multi-step speed operations, select internal speed settings using the control
constant C1-37 (SEL2) settings. For details, refer to 4.3 Using a 12-bit Digital Speed Reference.
Motor
3MCCB Special busbar
3-phase Cooling fan
Z1
200 VAC*1 Z2
P/ N/ P/ N/ Z3
1MCCB 1MC L
P1N1 power supply
R R/L1VS−656MR5 cable P1 VS−626M5 U
3-phase P1 IM
U/T1
200 VAC*1 S S/L2 N1 N1 V
V/T2
W/T3 W
T T/L3 5CN 51CN
2MCCB 2MC
1-phase r A1/r
200 VAC t A2/t Flat cable 52CN
Not used
(Ground to 100 Ω 1CN (Ground to 100 Ω

or less.) 3CN or less.)
2CN
+5V 4,5,6
15
Not used Digital Operator 1
0V 1,2,3 2
(optional)
PA 16 3
MCCB: Molded Case Circuit Breaker :PA 17 P 4
MC: Magnetic Contactor PC PB 18 5
L: AC reactor :PB 19 P 6
Output Module 6CN PLC 14 7 PG
*3 19,20,21 EXTCOM0*2 :PLC 15 P 8
22,23 24VCOM 9
External 24 V
power supply 24,25 0VCOM
6 RDY THSA 8 11 TS
7 EMG THSB 9 P 12
8 FWD SS 7 10
9 REV PC
10 TLH 1CN Encoder Interface
11 TLL(INC) PAO 13
12 SSC(SV) :PAO 14 P
13 RST PBO 15
14 CHW :PBO 16 P
5 DAS PLCO 11
15 PPI :PLCO 12 P
16 ORT SS 17
17 LGR
18 MGR Output module
*2
3 SCOM EXTCOM 31 *3
4 0V 24VCOM 32 External 24 V
2 SS 0VCOM 33 power supply
Input Module
D1 19
33 ZSPD
D2 20
34 AGR D3 21
35 SDET D4 22
36 TDET D5 23
37 TLE 24
D6
38 ORG D7 25
39 ORE D8 26
40 CHWE D9 27
42 COM1 D10 28
D11 29
43 D12 30
*1 400-V class: 3-phase 400 VAC
44 FLT
*2 EXTCOM0 on 6CN and EXTCOM 45
on 1CN are isolated internally. 6CN
*3 Connection when sequence input

26 FC0 SM 47
common is an external common. 27 FC1 SM Speedometer
28 FC2 0V 48
29 FC3
41 FLTL LM 50
46 TALM LM Load meter
indicates shielded twisted- 30 COM2 0V 49
P
pair cable. I/O Card
Fig 15.31 Multi-step Speed Operation Using Internal Speed Settings
15 -28
15.7 Internal Block Diagram
15.7 Internal Block Diagram

The M5 Drive internal block diagram is shown below.
3MCCB
VS-656MR5 Converter VS-626M5 Inverter Motor

Cooling fan
Z1
Z2
P/ P/ Z3
1MCCB 1MC L
R/L1 U/T1 U
R
S/L2 + + V/T2 V
S
T/L3 W/T3 W
T
N/ N/
P1 P1
Power
2MCCB 2MC N1 N1 supply
A1/r
r (RCC)
+
A2/t
t Control
power
supply
(RCC) Internal cooling
fan
TS TS
15
TS TS
Gate driver Gate driver
2CN TS
51CN
5CN
Detector
(AD) Detector
(AD)
Detector
CPU (AD) PG
PG
P−ROM pulse
proces-
sor
DSP 1CN
(DIO)
6CN Motor encoder
I/O Card (See note.) signal outputs
Speed reference (AD)
Analog speed reference (±10 V)
Sequence inputs (14 points) Sequence inputs 12-bit digital refer- 12-bit digital references
(DI) ences (DI) (12 points)
CPU
Sequence outputs Digital Operator
Sequence outputs (10 points)
(DO)
PROM DRIVEFWDREVREMOTE
SEQ REF
Error codes (4 points) Error codes
(DO)
EEPROM
(Constants)
3CN DIGITAL OPERATOR
Speedometer signals
Speedometer output (10 V) Load meter signals
JVOP−132
Load meter output (10 V) (AO)

LOCAL DRIVE
REMOTE
DSPL
PRGM
DATA
JOG ENTER
LOCAL
REMOTE RESET
RUN STOP
* An I/O Card is mounted when using an M5A Independent Drive

Fig 13.59 Internal Block Diagram
15 -29
Appendix
15.8 VS-626M5 Specifications Entry Tables

Enter the specifications according to the configuration in use. Uncompleted items will be taken to be Yaskawa
standard settings, as indicated by numbers in dotted-line boxes.
Customer Name Model Device Name Application
Machining center, lathe ( ) Main axis drive/Other ( )
J Machine Specifications
Power Required Short-time rating kW ( min., %ED) Continuous rating kW
Power Transmis- 1. Gear --- High speed (H) Medium speed (M) Low speed (L)
sion Method 2. Belt Speed control
3. Direct connec- range (min−1)
tion
i Gear ratio
4. Built-in motor Load axis/Motor
axis
Motor axis con-
version inertial
moment
(kg S m2: GD2/4)
Acceleration/de- times/min. Acceleration/de-
celeration Fre- celeration time
quency (0 ↔ Top) (s)
15 Speedometer 1. Not used

2. Used: Speedometer full scale ( ) min−1
Load Meter 1. Not used
2. Used: Load meter full scale ( )% (Over continuous rating)
Orientation Con- 1. Not used (No Orientation Card)
trol Method 2. Motor encoder (No Orientation Card)
3. Load axis encoder (with ETC62613X)
4. Magnetic sensor (with ETC62614X)
5. NC orientation (No Orientation Card)
Solid Tap
p 1. Not used --- Speed (H) Speed (L) Tap size
2. Used Max. speed φ to φ
(min−1)
Acceleration/de-
celeration time (s)
Speed
p Refer- 1. Analog
ence
2. Digital 2-1 Binary
2-2 2-digit BCD
2-3 3-digit BCD
2-4 Internal speed settings
3. Serial commu- 3-1 YENET1200
nications
Input Common 1. Sequence input signals 1-1 0 V common
Method (M5A 1-2 +24 V common
Type Only)
1-3 External common
2. 12-bit digital input signals 2-1 0 V common
2-2 +24 V common
2-3 External common
Remarks
15 -30
15.8 VS-626M5 Specifications Entry Tables
J Motor Specifications
Model Output characteristics Characteristic drawing number

Winding Selection 1. Single winding Max. rated output (during
Output 100% torque reference)
2. Winding selection (kW) Continuous rated output
p
Continuous Rated Torque N S m (Basic low speed)

Shape 1. Motor with frame
2. Built-in motor
Mounting Method 1. Leg mounted
2. Flange mounted
Motor Inertial Moment kgSm2 (GD2/4)
Dimensions No.
Speed (min−1)
Remarks
J Inverter Specifications
Model CIMR-M5
Reference Card 1. I/O Card (ETC62612X) (M5A)
2. YENET1200 Card (ETC62611X-SXXXX) (M5N) 15
Mounting Configuration 1. Mounted in the panel (with fan)
2. External heatsink cooling (without fan)
Connection Diagram
Remarks
J Converter Specifications
Model CIMR-MR5
Servo Control Power Supply 1. Without power supply (MR5A)
2. With power supply (MR5N)
Mounting Configuration 1. Mounted in the panel (with fan)
2. External heatsink cooling (without fan)
Remarks
J Power Supply and Environmental Specifications
Power Supply Voltage 1. 3-phase 200 V (50/60 Hz), 220 V (50/60 Hz), 230 V (60 Hz)
2. 3-phase 400 V (50/60 Hz), 440 V (50/60 Hz), 460 V (60 Hz)
Tolerable voltage fluctuation 10% to 15%
Tolerable frequency fluctuation ±5%
Voltage unbalance between wires 5% max.
Ambient Temperature and Humidity Inverter and Converter: 0% to 55% (internal air temperature 45°C
(113°F) max.)
5% to 95% (with no condensation)
Motor: 0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F)
95% max. (with no condensation)
Location for Use Indoors (with no corrosive gas or dust), or as per other standard specifi-
cations.
15 -31
Appendix
J Remarks
If using magnetic sensor orientation, enter the mounting radius of the magnetic.
Magnetic emitter: ( 1. MG-1378BS 2. MG1444S)
Magnet
Magnetic sensor: ( 1. FS-1378C 2. FS-200A)
R
R= mm
15
15 -32
VECTOR-CONTROLLED INVERTER DRIVES WITH
POWER REGENERATIVE FUNCTION FOR MACHINE TOOLS
VARISPEED-626M5/656MR5
USER'S MANUAL
IRUMA BUSINESS CENTER (SOLUTION CENTER)
480, Kamifujisawa, Iruma, Saitama 358-8555, Japan
Phone 81-4-2962-5696 Fax 81-4-2962-6138
YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.
2121 Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone 1-847-887-7000 Fax 1-847-887-7370
YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL COMERCIO LTD.A.
Avenida Fagundes Filho, 620 Bairro Saude-Sao Paulo-SP, Brazil CEP: 04304-000
Phone 55-11-5071-2552 Fax 55-11-5581-8795
YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH
Am Kronberger Hang 2, 65824 Schwalbach, Germany
Phone 49-6196-569-300 Fax 49-6196-569-312
YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD.
1 Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods Cumbernauld, G68 9LF, United Kingdom
Phone 44-1236-735000 Fax 44-1236-458182
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION
7F, Doore Bldg. 24, Yeoido-dong, Youngdungpo-Ku, Seoul 150-877, Korea
Phone 82-2-784-7844 Fax 82-2-784-8495
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.
151 Lorong Chuan, #04-01, New Tech Park 556741, Singapore
Phone 65-6282-3003 Fax 65-6289-3003
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD.
No.18 Xizang Zhong Road. Room 1702-1707, Harbour Ring Plaza Shanghai 200001, China
Phone 86-21-5385-2200 Fax 86-21-5385-3299
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD. BEIJING OFFICE
Room 1011A, Tower W3 Oriental Plaza, No.1 East Chang An Ave.,
Dong Cheng District, Beijing 100738, China
Phone 86-10-8518-4086 Fax 86-10-8518-4082
YASKAWA ELECTRIC TAIWAN CORPORATION
9F, 16, Nanking E. Rd., Sec. 3, Taipei, Taiwan
Phone 886-2-2502-5003 Fax 886-2-2505-1280
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
YASKAWA
In the event that the end user of this product is to be the military and said product is to be
employed in any weapons systems or the manufacture thereof, the export will fall under
the relevant regulations as stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade
Regulations. Therefore, be sure to follow all procedures and submit all relevant
documentation according to any and all rules, regulations and laws that may apply.
Specifications are subject to change without notice
MANUAL NO. SIE-S626-7.5B
for ongoing product modifications and improvements. Printed in Japan October 2005 01-4 3
© 2001-2005 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 05-7⑦ 96-71088, 98-A1002

Sie S626 7.5B

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Sie S626 7.5B

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

VECTOR-CONTROLLED INVERTER DRIVES WITH

POWER REGENERATIVE FUNCTION FOR MACHINE TOOLS

MANUAL NO. SIE-S626-7.5B

This instruction manual describes installation, maintenance and inspection,

YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

The ISO symbol is used in this manual.

Notes for Inverter and Converter

J Confirmation upon Delivery

J Disconnecting the Digital Operator

J Maintenance and Inspection

Notes for Motor

J Maintenance and Inspection

J Free Warranty Period and Scope

D Problems due to improper maintenance or handling, carelessness, or other reasons where

AEXAMPLE" Indicates application examples.

INFO Indicates supplemental information.

IMPORTANT Indicates important information that should be memorized.

5 Operating the Digital Operator 5

7 Wide Fixed-output Control 7

8 Orientation Control Using an

9 Magnetic Sensor Orientation 9

11 Operating Status Displays 11

13 13 Maintenance and Inspection

Notes for Safe Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii

1.2 Identifying Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -5

2.2 Checking and Controlling the Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -5

2.4 Attaching the Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -9

5 Operating the Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -1

7 Wide Constant Power Control Using Winding Selection 7 -1

8 Orientation Control Using an Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -1

9 Magnetic Sensor Orientation Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -1

11 Operating Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 -1

13 Maintenance and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 -1

This chapter provides an overview of the VS-626M5 Inverter and

1.2 Identifying Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -5

1.1.2 Inverter Models

* Specify all standards through the construction when ordering.

1.1.3 Converter Models

Table 1.2 Converter Models

* Specify all standards through the construction when ordering.

1.2 Identifying Components

Upper and Lower Covers Opened

CHARGE LED CHARGE

Supply Output N1 1CN (Not used.)

Fig 1.1 Appearance of Converter, Model CIMR-MR5A27P55 (200 V, 7.5 kW)

Upper and Lower Covers Opened

Main Circuit P/¨ P

7-segment LED display

2CN 8CN (Optional)

3CN 9CN/10CN (Optional)

2.1 Confirmation upon Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -2

2.2 Checking and Controlling

2.4 Attaching the Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -9

2.1 Confirmation upon Delivery

Table 2.1 Checks

2.1.1 Inverter Nameplate Information

Inverter Model MODEL : CIMR−M5A27P5

YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN

Fig 2.1 Inverter Nameplate

Symbol Specifications Symbol Max. applicable motor output

Fig 2.2 Inverter Model Numbers

J Inverter Specification Designation

Symbol Max. applicable motor output Symbol Enclosure